WO2012074549A1 - Temperature-stabilized storage systems - Google Patents

Temperature-stabilized storage systems Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012074549A1
WO2012074549A1 PCT/US2011/001939 US2011001939W WO2012074549A1 WO 2012074549 A1 WO2012074549 A1 WO 2012074549A1 US 2011001939 W US2011001939 W US 2011001939W WO 2012074549 A1 WO2012074549 A1 WO 2012074549A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
region
stored material
unit
wall
storage
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2011/001939
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Fong-Li Chou
Geoffrey F. Deane
Lawrence Morgan Fowler
William Gates
Jenny Ezu Hu
Roderick A. Hyde
Edward K.Y. Jung
Jordin T. Kare
Mark K. Kuiper
Nathan P. Myhrvold
Nathan Pegram
Nels R. Peterson
Clarence T. Tegreene
Mike Vilhauer
Charles Whitmer
Lowell L. Wood, Jr.
Ozgur Emek Yildirim
Original Assignee
Tokitae Llc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US12/927,981 external-priority patent/US9139351B2/en
Priority claimed from US13/135,126 external-priority patent/US8887944B2/en
Priority claimed from US13/199,439 external-priority patent/US8322147B2/en
Application filed by Tokitae Llc filed Critical Tokitae Llc
Priority to EP11844442.1A priority Critical patent/EP2646739A4/en
Priority to CN201180056904.0A priority patent/CN103282717B/en
Publication of WO2012074549A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012074549A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3802—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container in the form of a barrel or vat
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3802—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container in the form of a barrel or vat
    • B65D81/3811—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container in the form of a barrel or vat formed of different materials, e.g. laminated or foam filling between walls
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3813—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container being in the form of a box, tray or like container
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3813—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container being in the form of a box, tray or like container
    • B65D81/3823—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container being in the form of a box, tray or like container formed of different materials, e.g. laminated or foam filling between walls
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3825—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container being in the form of a box, tray or like container with one or more containers located inside the external container
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3825—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container being in the form of a box, tray or like container with one or more containers located inside the external container
    • B65D81/3834—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation rigid container being in the form of a box, tray or like container with one or more containers located inside the external container the external tray being formed of different materials, e.g. laminated or foam filling between walls
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3888—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation wrappers or flexible containers, e.g. pouches, bags
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D81/00—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents
    • B65D81/38—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation
    • B65D81/3888—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation wrappers or flexible containers, e.g. pouches, bags
    • B65D81/3897—Containers, packaging elements, or packages, for contents presenting particular transport or storage problems, or adapted to be used for non-packaging purposes after removal of contents with thermal insulation wrappers or flexible containers, e.g. pouches, bags formed of different materials, e.g. laminated or foam filling between walls
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D2203/00—Decoration means, markings, information elements, contents indicators
    • B65D2203/10—Transponders
    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D2201/00—Insulation
    • F25D2201/10—Insulation with respect to heat
    • F25D2201/14—Insulation with respect to heat using subatmospheric pressure

Definitions

  • a stored material module including a plurality of storage units configured for storage of medicinal units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container and including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit; a stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the stored material module; a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one stabilizer unit; and a central stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit in the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit including: a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in an outer wall of a substantially thermally sealed storage container including a flexible conduit, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container adjacent to the external opening in the outer wall; an aperture in the lid; a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible conduit of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible conduit from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; a positioning shaft with a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid, the positioning shaft of a length greater than the thickness of the lid in combination with the length of the wall between the surface of
  • Apparatus described herein include, but are not limited to: a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, the structural region including an outer wall and an inner wall with a gas-sealed gap between the outer wall and the inner wall; an activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, the activation region including one or more getters; a connector attached to the structural region and to the activation region, the connector including a flexible region and a region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region; and a vacuum pump operably attached to the connector.
  • Methods described herein include, but are not limited to: establishing vacuum within a gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions; heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas- sealed apparatus; allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material; transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus; and separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
  • Methods of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device also include, but are not limited to: assembling substantially all structural components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap; attaching the storage device to a gas-sealed apparatus, the gas-sealed apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the gas-sealed apparatus; activating the vacuum pump to establish gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device; heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time; heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one getter activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device; allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature
  • FIG. 1 depicts a substantially thermally sealed storage container in cross-section.
  • FIG. 2 shows aspects of a substantially thermally sealed storage container in cross- section.
  • FIG. 3 depicts aspects of a storage structure and interchangeable modular units for use within a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates, in cross-section, aspects of a storage structure
  • FIG. 5 depicts a stored material module and a central stabilizer configured for use with a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a stored material module and central stabilizer as depicted in Fig. 5, with two of the storage units positioned to allow access to the interior of a third storage unit within the stored material module.
  • FIG. 7 shows a stored material module and a central stabilizer configured for use with a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a stored material module and central stabilizer as depicted in Fig. 7, with two of the storage units positioned to allow access to the interior of a third storage unit within the stored material module.
  • FIG. 9 depicts aspects of a storage unit.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates aspects of a storage unit such as that depicted in Fig. 9.
  • FIG. 11 shows aspects of a stored material module.
  • FIG. 12 depicts a stored material module cap attached to two stabilizer units.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates aspects of a stored material module cap.
  • FIG. 14 depicts parts of a stored material module cap, such as illustrated in Fig.
  • FIG. 15 shows a stored material module cap, such as illustrated in Fig. 13, in cross-section.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates an interior view of parts of a stored material module cap.
  • FIG. 17 depicts a partial cross-section of a stored material module cap attached to a stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 18 shows a central stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a central stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 18.
  • FIG. 20 depicts, in cross-section, a central stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 21 shows a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates, in cross-section, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit such as those shown in Fig. 21.
  • FIG. 23 depicts, in cross-section, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit such as those illustrated in Fig.22, with two of the storage units positioned to allow access to the interior of a third storage unit within the stored material module.
  • FIG. 24 shows a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 26 depicts an embodiment of a central stabilizer, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 27 shows aspects of an embodiment of a central stabilizer, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit such as depicted in Fig. 26. .
  • FIG. 28 illustrates an embodiment of a central stabilizer, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit, with the central stabilizer and the stabilizer unit positioned to allow access to a storage unit.
  • FIG. 29 depicts aspects of the embodiment illustrated in Fig. 28.
  • FIG. 30 shows aspects of a storage unit.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates aspects of a storage unit such as that shown in Fig. 30.
  • FIG. 32 depicts, in cross-section, a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible conduit and a stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 33 shows, in cross-section, a transportation stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 34 illustrates aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in
  • FIG. 35 depicts aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
  • FIG. 36 shows aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates, in cross-section, aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
  • FIG. 38 depicts aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
  • FIG. 39 shows aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig.
  • FIG. 40A illustrates a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a transportation stabilizer unit.
  • FIG. 40B depicts a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a transportation stabilizer unit such as illustrated in Fig. 40A. ⁇ tr
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic of an apparatus.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic of an apparatus such as that illustrated in Figure 41.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic of an apparatus such as that depicted in Figures 41 and 42.
  • FIG. 44 is a schematic of an apparatus such as that depicted in Figures 41, 42 and 43.
  • FIG. 45 depicts a flowchart of a method.
  • FIG. 46 illustrates a flowchart of a method.
  • FIG. 47 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 48 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 49 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 50 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 51 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 52 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 53 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 54 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 55 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • FIG. 56 illustrates a flowchart of a method.
  • FIG. 57 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
  • FIG. 58 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
  • FIG. 59 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
  • FIG. 60 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
  • FIG. 61 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
  • FIG. 62 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
  • FIG. 63 is a schematic of a storage container.
  • Containers and apparatus such as those described herein have a variety of potential uses.
  • containers and apparatus such as those described herein are useful for stable maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range without reliance on external power sources to maintain the temperature range within the storage area.
  • containers and apparatus such as those described herein are suitable for maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range in locations with minimal municipal power, or unreliable municipal power sources, such as remote locations or in emergency situations.
  • Containers and apparatus such as those described herein may be useful for the transport and storage of materials that are sensitive to temperature changes that can occur during shipment and storage.
  • the storage systems described herein are useful for the shipment and storage of medicinal agents, including vaccines.
  • Thermal stabilization of medicinal agents, such as vaccines, for use beyond the cold chain includes economic, logistical, regulatory, procurement and policy issues (see Kristensen and Chen, "Stabilization of vaccines: lessons learned," Human Vaccines, vol. 6, no. 3, March 2010, pages 229-231 , which is incorporated by reference).
  • Methods and apparatus described herein are useful to establish and maintain a stable and extremely low gas pressure within an internal, gas-sealed region of a container.
  • Methods and apparatus as described herein have a variety of potential uses in the manufacture of containers that include internal, gas-sealed regions with durable gas pressure below atmospheric pressure, such as near-vacuum gas pressure, without active pumping of gas out of the internal gas-sealed regions.
  • Methods and apparatus described herein may be utilized to establish and maintain a durable low gas pressure region internal to a container structure, and may be particularly useful in regard to containers fabricated from materials that lose their structural stability at temperatures below the activation temperatures required by many getter materials.
  • the methods and apparatus as described herein may be utilized to establish and maintain a stable gas pressure below atmospheric pressure, such as near-vacuum gas pressure, within an internal, gas-sealed cavity within a portion of a larger device fabricated all or in part from aluminum.
  • a stable gas pressure below atmospheric pressure, such as near-vacuum gas pressure
  • the methods and apparatus as described herein may be useful in the manufacture and durability of containers fabricated out of plastic-metal composites that include internal, gas-impermeable spaces with gas pressure less than that of the environment surrounding the container, such as substantially evacuated, gas-impermeable internal spaces.
  • gas-sealed regions with low gas pressure may be incorporated into the structure of containers as part of the insulation for the container.
  • Internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of containers as partial insulation for the container may include other materials or features, such as insulation materials, electronics or structural features of the container.
  • intemal, gas- sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of a container may include multilayer insulation material (MLI).
  • MMI multilayer insulation material
  • internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of a container may include wires or conduits connecting electronic components operably attached to different regions of the container.
  • Internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure may also isolate electronics incorporated into the device from external factors, such as chemically active materials, magnetically active materials, water, heat and cold.
  • internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of a container may include structural elements such as flanges, supports, struts and other features improving the structural stability of the container.
  • Internal, gas-sealed regions of low pressure may have advantages of low weight and cost in a finished, manufactured device. Methods and apparatus described herein may be used to manufacture substantially thermally sealed storage devices, such as those suitable for stable maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range without reliance on external power sources to maintain the temperature range within the storage area.
  • containers and devices such as those manufactured with the methods and apparatus described herein are suitable for maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range in locations with minimal municipal power, or unreliable municipal power sources, such as remote locations or in emergency situations.
  • containers and devices such as those manufactured with the methods and apparatus described herein may be useful for the transport and storage of materials that are sensitive to external temperature changes that can occur during shipment and storage.
  • the storage systems described herein are useful for the shipment and storage of medicinal agents, including vaccines.
  • Many medicinal agents, including vaccines currently in regular use are highly sensitive to temperature variations, and must be maintained in a particular temperature range to preserve stability, as well as the potency and efficacy of the medicinal agents.
  • the temperature range to maintain stability in storage is inherent to the particular formulation and medicinal agent.
  • many medicinal agents including vaccines, must be stored in a predetermined temperature range, such as between 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade, or between 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade, or between 10 degrees Centigrade and 15 degrees Centigrade, or between 15 degrees Centigrade and 25 degrees Centigrade, or between -15 degrees Centigrade and -5 degrees Centigrade, or between -50 degrees Centigrade and -15 degrees Centigrade, to preserve efficacy of the medicinal agent.
  • a predetermined temperature range such as between 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade, or between 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade, or between 10 degrees Centigrade and 15 degrees Centigrade, or between 15 degrees Centigrade and 25 degrees Centigrade, or between -15 degrees Centigrade and -5 degrees Centigrade, or between -50 degrees Centigrade and -15 degrees Centigrade, to preserve efficacy of the medicinal agent.
  • a temperature range such as between 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade, or between 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade, or between 10 degrees Centigrade and 15 degrees Centigrade, or between 15 degrees Centigrade and 25 degrees Centigrade, or between -15 degrees Centigrade and -5 degrees Centigrade, or between -50 degrees Centigrade and -15 degrees Centigrade, is often referred to as the "cold chain.”
  • Containers and storage devices such as those fabricated using methods and apparatus described herein may be designed in a variety of sizes and shapes, depending on the embodiment.
  • containers and storage devices may be fabricated in various sizes, shapes and materials depending on the intended use of the container or storage device.
  • a representative example of a storage container is shown in Figure 63 and described in the associated text (see below).
  • containers and storage devices manufactured using the methods and apparatus described herein may be of a shape and size for convenient portability, such as no more than 1 kilogram (kg), 2 kg, 5 kg, 7 kg or 10 kg.
  • containers and storage devices manufactured using the methods and apparatus described herein may be of a size and shape to be carried easily by an individual person, either directly or with a carrier, such as with a satchel, duffle bag, rucksack, carryall, handbag, haversack, knapsack, pack, pouch, suitcase, tote, travel bag or backpack.
  • containers and storage devices may be fabricated in a shape and size for transport using a small wheeled conveyance operated by a single person, such as with a mass of no more than 15 kg, 20 kg, or 25 kg.
  • containers and storage devices manufactured using the methods and apparatus described herein may be of a size and shape to be carried easily by a person using a handcart, a rickshaw, a gurney, a bicycle or a motorcycle, such as in a saddlebag, carrier or rack.
  • containers and storage devices may be fabricated in a shape and size for transport using a truck, wagon, pickup, van or other motorized delivery vehicle, such as with a mass of no more than 30 kg, 35 kg, 40 kg, 45 kg, 50 kg or 55 kg.
  • containers and storage devices may be fabricated in a shape and size for substantially stationary use, for example with a mass of greater than 100 kg.
  • FIG. 1 shown is an example of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 that may serve as a context for introducing one or more apparatuses described herein.
  • the container 100 is depicted in cross-section to view interior aspects.
  • Figure 1 depicts a vertically upright, substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 including an outer wall 105, an inner wall 110 and a connector 115.
  • Figure 1 depicts the container 100 as including a connector 115 with a flexible segment 160, configured to form a flexible connector.
  • the connector 115 with a flexible segment 160 as illustrated in Figure 1 is fabricated with materials sufficient to support the mass of the inner wall 110 and any material internal to the inner wall 110.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include a connector 115 without a flexible segment, or a connector 115 with fixed segments.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 with extremely low heat conductance and extremely low heat radiation transfer between the outside environment of the container and the area internal to the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is configured for extremely low heat conductance and extremely low heat radiation transfer between the outside environment of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 and the inside of a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is less than 1 Watt (W) when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees Centigrade (C) and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
  • the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is less than 700 mW when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees C and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
  • the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is less than 600 mW when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees C and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
  • the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is approximately 500 mW when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees C and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured for transport and storage of material in a predetermined temperature range within a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 for a period of time without active cooling activity or an active cooling unit.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in an environment with an external temperature of approximately 40 degrees C may be configured for transport and storage of material in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C within a substantially, thermally sealed storage region 130 for up to three months.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in an environment with an external temperature of approximately 40 degrees C may be configured for transport and storage of material in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C within a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 for up to two months.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in an environment with an external temperature of approximately 40 degrees C may be configured for transport and storage of material in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C within a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 for up to one month.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 includes a minimal thermal gradient.
  • the interior of a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 is essentially the same temperature, for example with an internal thermal gradient (e.g. top to bottom or side to side) of no more than 5 degrees Centigrade, or of no more than 3 degrees Centigrade, or of no more than 1 degree Centigrade.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes a storage structure configured for receiving and storing at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module. The choice of number and type of both the heat sink module(s) and the stored material module(s) will determine the specific thermal properties and storage capabilities of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 for a given intended time for length of storage in a given temperature range.
  • relatively more heat sink module(s) may be included in the storage structure and relatively fewer stored material module(s) may be included.
  • relatively fewer heat sink module(s) may be included in the storage structure and relatively more stored material module(s) may be included.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be of a portable size and shape, for example a size and shape within expected portability estimates for an individual person.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured for both transport and storage of material.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured of a size and shape for carrying, lifting or movement by an individual person.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 and any internal structure has a mass that is less than approximately 50 kilograms (kg), or less than approximately 30 kg, or less than approximately 20 kg.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 has a length and width that are less than approximately 1 meter (m).
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may have external dimensions on the order of 45 centimeters (cm) in diameter and 70 cm in height.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container includes external handles, hooks, fixtures or other projections to assist in mobility of the container.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container includes external straps, bands, harnesses, or ropes to assist in transport of the container.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container includes external fixtures configured to secure the container to a surface, for example flanges, brackets, struts or clamps.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 illustrated in Figure 1 is roughly configured as an oblong shape, however multiple shapes are possible depending on the embodiment.
  • a rectangular shape, or an irregular shape may be utilized in some embodiments, depending on the intended use of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • a substantially round or ball-like shape of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be utilized in some embodiments.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container includes zero active cooling units during routine use. No active cooling units are depicted in Figure 1 , for example.
  • active cooling units may include one or more of: actively powered fans, actively pumped refrigerant systems, thermoelectric systems, active heat pump systems, active vapor-compression refrigeration systems and active heat exchanger systems.
  • the external energy required to operate such mechanisms may originate, for example, from municipal electrical power supplies or electric batteries.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container, as described herein includes, no active cooling units during regular use as described herein.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes an outer assembly, including an outer wall 105.
  • the outer wall 105 substantially defines the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100, and the outer wall 105 substantially defines a single outer wall aperture 150.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes an inner wall 110.
  • the inner wall 110 substantially defines a single inner wall aperture 140.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes a gap 120 between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105.
  • the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 are separated by a distance and substantially define a gap 120. The surfaces of the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 to not meet or come into thermal contact across the gap 120 when the container is in its usual position.
  • At least one section of ultra efficient insulation material is included in the gap 120.
  • Substantially evacuated space may be included in the gap 120, with the container segments sufficiently sealed to minimize gas leakage into the gap 120 from the region external to the container.
  • the container 100 includes a connector 115 forming a conduit 125 connecting the single outer wall aperture 150 with the single inner wall aperture 140.
  • the connector 115 illustrated in Figure 1 is a flexible connector, in some embodiments the connector 115 may be not be a flexible connector.
  • the container 100 includes a single access aperture to the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, wherein the single access aperture is formed by an end of the connector 115.
  • the container 100 includes an outer assembly, including one or more sections of ultra efficient insulation material substantially defining at least one thermally sealed storage region, wherein the outer assembly and the one or more sections of ultra efficient insulation material substantially define a single access aperture to the at least one thermally sealed storage region.
  • the container 100 includes an inner assembly within the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, including a storage structure configured for receiving and storing at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that the outer wall aperture 150 is located at the top of the container during use of the container.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at the top edge of the outer wall 105 during routine storage or use of the container.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that an aperture in the exterior of the container connecting to the conduit 125 is at the top edge of the container 100 during storage of the container 100.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at an opposing face of the container 100 relative to a base or bottom support structure of the container 100.
  • Embodiments wherein the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at the top edge of the outer wall 105 during routine storage or use of the container may be configured for minimal passive transfer of thermal energy from the region exterior to the container.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at an opposing face of the container 100 as a base or bottom support structure of the container 100 may also be configured so that thermal energy radiating from a floor or surface under the container 100 does not directly radiate into the aperture in the outer wall 105.
  • the inner wall 1 10 substantially defines a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 within the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 depicted in Figure 1 includes a single substantially thermally sealed storage region 130
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include a plurality of substantially thermally sealed storage regions.
  • a plurality of storage regions (e.g. 130) within the container they may be associated with a single conduit to the region exterior to the container.
  • a plurality of storage regions e.g.
  • each of the plurality of storage regions may be associated with a single, distinct conduit.
  • more than one storage region may be associated with a single conduit to the region external to the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • a plurality of storage regions may be, for example, of comparable size and shape or they may be of differing sizes and shapes as appropriate to the embodiment. Different storage regions may include, for example, various removable inserts, at least one layer including at least one metal on the interior surface of a storage region, or at least one layer of nontoxic material on the interior surface, in any combination or grouping.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 depicted in Figure 1 is approximately cylindrical in shape, a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may be of a size and shape appropriate for a specific embodiment.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may be oblong, round, rectangular, square or of irregular shape.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may vary in total volume, depending on the embodiment and the total dimensions of the container 100.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 configured for portability by an individual person may include a single substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 with a total volume less than 30 liters (L), for example a volume of 25 L or 20 L.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 configured for transport on a vehicle may include a single substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 with a total volume more than 30 L, for example 35 L or 40 L.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may include additional structure as appropriate for a specific embodiment.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage region may include stabilizing structures, insulation, packing material, or other additional components configured for ease of use or stable storage of material.
  • a substantially thermally sealed container 100 includes at least one layer of nontoxic material on an interior surface of one or more substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • Nontoxic material may include, for example, material that does not produce residue that may be toxic to the contents of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, or material that does not produce residue that may be toxic to the future users of contents of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • Nontoxic material may include material that maintains the chemical structure of the contents of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, for example nontoxic material may include chemically inert or non-reactive materials.
  • Nontoxic material may include material that has been developed for use in, for example, medical, pharmaceutical or food storage applications.
  • Nontoxic material may include material that may be cleaned or sterilized, for example material that may be irradiated, autoclaved, or disinfected.
  • Nontoxic material may include material that contains one or more antibacterial, antiviral, antimicrobial, or antipathogen agents.
  • nontoxic material may include aldehydes, hypochlorites, oxidizing agents, phenolics, quaternary ammonium compounds, or silver.
  • Nontoxic material may include material that is structurally stable in the presence of one or more cleaning or sterilizing compounds or radiation, such as plastic that retains its structural integrity after irradiation, or metal that does not oxidize in the presence of one or more cleaning or sterilizing compounds.
  • Nontoxic material may include material that consists of multiple layers, with layers removable for cleaning or sterilization, such as for reuse of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region.
  • Nontoxic material may include, for example, material including metals, fabrics, papers or plastics.
  • a substantially thermally sealed container 100 includes at least one layer including at least one metal on an interior surface of at least one thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • the at least one metal may include gold, aluminum, copper, or silver.
  • the at least one metal may include at least one metal composite or alloy, for example steel, stainless steel, metal matrix composites, gold alloy, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or silver alloy.
  • the at least one metal includes metal foil, such as titanium foil, aluminum foil, silver foil, or gold foil.
  • a metal foil may be a component of a composite, such as, for example, in association with polyester film, such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) polyester film.
  • the at least one layer including at least one metal on the interior surface of at least one storage region 130 may include at least one metal that may be sterilizable or disinfected.
  • the at least one metal may be sterilizable or disinfected using plasmons.
  • the at least one metal may be sterilizable or disinfected using autoclaving, thermal means, or chemical means.
  • the at least one layer including at least one metal on the interior surface of at least one storage region may include at least one metal that has specific heat transfer properties, such as a thermal radiative properties.
  • the container 100 may be configured for storage of one or more medicinal units within a storage region 130.
  • some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 0 degrees Centigrade and approximately 10 degrees Centigrade.
  • some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 2 degrees Centigrade and approximately 8 degrees Centigrade.
  • some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 5 degrees Centigrade and approximately 15 degrees Centigrade.
  • some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 0 degrees Centigrade and approximately -10 degrees
  • Vaccine 20 1148-1156 (2002), which are all herein incorporated by reference.
  • a medicinal may include drugs, vaccines, therapeutics, vitamins, pharmaceuticals, remedies, homeopathic agents, naturopathic agents, or treatment modalities in any form, combination or configuration.
  • a medicinal may include vaccines, such as: a vaccine packaged as an oral dosage compound, vaccine within a prefilled syringe, a container or vial containing vaccine, vaccine within a unijet device, or vaccine within an externally deliverable unit (e.g. a vaccine patch for transdermal applications).
  • a medicinal may include treatment modalities, such as: antibody therapies, small-molecule compounds, anti-inflammatory agents, therapeutic drugs, vitamins, or pharmaceuticals in any form, combination or configuration.
  • a medicinal may be in the form of a liquid, gel, solid, semi-solid, vapor, or gas.
  • a medicinal may be a composite.
  • a medicinal may include a bandage infused with antibiotics, anti-inflammatory agents, coagulants, neurotrophic agents, angiogenic agents, vitamins or pharmaceutical agents.
  • the container 100 may be configured for storage of one or more food units within a storage region 130.
  • a container 100 may be configured to maintain a temperature in the range of -4 degrees C and -10 degrees C during storage, and may include a storage structure configured for storage of one or more food products, such as ice cream bars, individually packed frozen meals, frozen meat products, frozen fruit products or frozen vegetable products.
  • the container 100 may be configured for storage of one or more beverage units within a storage region 130.
  • a container 100 may be configured to maintain a temperature in the range of 2 degrees C and 10 degrees C during storage, and may include a storage structure configured for storage of one or more beverage products, such as wine, beer, fruit juices, or soft drinks.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes a gap 120 between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105.
  • the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 are separated by a distance and substantially define a gap 120.
  • the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 do not directly come into contact with each other.
  • the connector 115 supports the entire mass of the inner wall and any contents of the storage region 130.
  • additional supporting units may be included in the gap 120 to provide additional support to the inner wall 110 in addition to that provided by the connector 115.
  • thermally non-conductive strands attached to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120, wherein the thermally non-conductive strands are configured to extend around the surface of the inner wall 110 facing the gap 120 and provide additional support or movement restraint on the inner wall 110 and, by extension, the contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • the central regions of the plurality of strands wrap around the inner wall 110 at diverse angles, with the corresponding ends of each of the plurality of strands fixed to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120 at multiple locations.
  • One or more thermally non-conductive strands may be, for example, fabricated from fiberglass strands or ropes.
  • One or more thermally non-conductive strands may be, for example, fabricated from strands of a para- aramid synthetic fiber, such as KevlarTM.
  • a plurality of thermally non-conductive strands may be attached to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120 at both ends, with the center of the strands wrapped around the surface of the inner wall 110 facing the gap 120.
  • a plurality of strands fabricated from stainless steel ropes may be attached to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120 at both ends, with the center of the strands wrapped around the surface of the inner wall 110 facing the gap 120.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include one or more sections of an ultra efficient insulation material.
  • ultra efficient insulation material there is at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material within a gap 120.
  • the term "ultra efficient insulation material,” as used herein, may include one or more type of insulation material with extremely low heat conductance and extremely low heat radiation transfer between the surfaces of the insulation material.
  • the ultra efficient insulation material may include, for example, one or more layers of thermally reflective film, high vacuum, aerogel, low thermal conductivity bead-like units, disordered layered crystals, low density solids, or low density foam.
  • the ultra efficient insulation material includes one or more low density solids such as aerogels, such as those described in, for example: Fricke and Emmerling, Aerogels- preparation, properties, applications, Structure and Bonding 77: 37-87 (1992); and Pekala, Organic aerogels from the polycondensation of resorcinol with formaldehyde, Journal of Materials Science 24: 3221-3227 (1989), which are each herein incorporated by reference.
  • "low density” may include materials with density from about 0.01 g/cm 3 to about 0.10 g/cm 3 , and materials with density from about 0.005 g/cm 3 to about 0.05 g/cm 3 .
  • the ultra efficient insulation material includes one or more layers of disordered layered crystals, such as those described in, for example: Chiritescu et al.,
  • the ultra efficient insulation material includes at least two layers of thermal reflective film surrounded, for example, by at least one of: high vacuum, low thermal conductivity spacer units, low thermal conductivity bead like units, or low density foam. See, for example, Mikhalchenko et al., "Study of heat transfer in multilayer insulation based on composite spacer materials," Cryogenics, 1983, pages 309-311, which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • the ultra efficient insulation material may include at least two layers of thermal reflective material and at least one spacer unit between the layers of thermal reflective material.
  • the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one multiple layer insulating composite such as described in U.S. Patent 6,485,805 to Smith et al., titled “Multilayer insulation composite,” which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one metallic sheet insulation system, such as that described in U.S. Patent
  • the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one thermal insulation system, such as that described in U.S. Patent 6,967,051 to Augustynowicz et al., titled “Thermal insulation systems,” which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one rigid multilayer material for thermal insulation, such as that described in U.S. Patent 7,001,656 to Maignan et al., titled “Rigid multilayer material for thermal insulation,” which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • the ultra-efficient insulation material may include multilayer insulation material, or "MLI.”
  • an ultra efficient insulation material may include multilayer insulation material such as that used in space program launch vehicles, including by NASA. See, e.g., Daryabeigi, Thermal analysis and design optimization of multilayer insulation for reentry aerodynamic heating, Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets 39: 509-514 (2002), which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • the ultra efficient insulation material may include space with a partial gaseous pressure lower than atmospheric pressure external to the container 100.
  • the ultra efficient insulation material may include space with a gaseous pressure lower than atmospheric pressure external to the gas-sealed gap 120. See, for example, Nemanic, "Vacuum insulating panel,” Vacuum, vol. 46, nos. 8-10, 1995, pages 839-842, which is incorporated by reference.
  • the ultra efficient insulation material may substantially cover the inner wall 110 surface facing the gap 120.
  • the ultra efficient insulation material may substantially cover the outer wall 105 surface facing the gap 120.
  • MLI multilayer insulation material
  • the at least one layer of multilayer insulation material may substantially surround the surface of the inner wall 1 10.
  • the plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material may include layers of differing thicknesses, or layers with and without associated spacing elements.
  • there may be one or more additional layers within or in addition to the ultra efficient insulation material such as, for example, an outer structural layer or an inner structural layer.
  • An inner or an outer structural layer may be made of any material appropriate to the embodiment, for example an inner or an outer structural layer may include: plastic, metal, alloy, composite, or glass. See, for example, US Patent No. 4,726,974 to Nowobilski et al., titled "Vacuum insulation panel," which is incorporated by reference.
  • the gap 120 includes a substantially evacuated gaseous pressure relative to the atmospheric pressure external to the container 100.
  • a substantially evacuated gaseous pressure relative to the atmospheric pressure external to the container 100 may include substantially evacuated gaseous pressure surrounding a plurality of layers of MLI, for example between and around the layers.
  • a substantially evacuated gaseous pressure relative to the atmospheric pressure external to the container 100 may include substantially evacuated gaseous pressure in one or more sections of a gap.
  • the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to lxlO "2 torr.
  • the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to 5X10 "4 torr.
  • the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to lxl 0 "2 torr in the gap 120.
  • the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to 5X10 "4 torr in the gap 120.
  • the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than 1x10 " torr, for example, less than 5xl0 "3 torr, less than 5x10 " torr, less than 5xl0 "5 torr, SxlO ⁇ torr or 5xl0 "7 torr.
  • the gap 120 includes a plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material and substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to lxlO "2 torr.
  • the gap 120 includes a plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material and substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to 5x10 "4 torr.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be fabricated from a variety of materials.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be fabricated from metals, fiberglass or plastics of suitable characteristics for a given embodiment.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include materials of a suitable strength, hardness, durability, cost, availability, thermal conduction characteristics, gas-emitting properties, or other considerations appropriate for a given embodiment.
  • the materials for fabrication of individual segments of the container 100 are compatible with forming a gas-impervious seal between the segments.
  • the outer wall 105 is fabricated from stainless steel.
  • the outer wall 105 is fabricated from aluminum.
  • the inner wall 110 is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, the inner wall 110 is fabricated from aluminum. In some embodiments, all or part of the connector 115 is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, all or part of the connector 115 is fabricated from aluminum.
  • Embodiments include a container with an inner wall 110 and an outer wall 105 fabricated from stainless steel, and a connector 115 with segments fabricated from stainless steel and segments fabricated from aluminum.
  • the connector 115 is fabricated from fiberglass.
  • portions or parts of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be fabricated from composite or layered materials.
  • an outer wall . 105 may be substantially fabricated from stainless steel, with an external covering of plastic, such as to protect the outer surface of the container from scratches.
  • an inner wall 1 10 may substantially be fabricated from stainless steel, with a coating within the substantially sealed storage region 130 of plastic, rubber, foam or other material suitable to provide support and insulation to material stored within the substantially sealed storage region 130.
  • Figure 1 illustrates a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 1 10, with a connector 1 15 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10.
  • the inner wall 1 10 roughly defines a
  • the connector 1 15 is configured to entirely support the mass of the inner wall 1 10 and the total contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • a gap 120 includes a gaseous pressure significantly less than atmospheric pressure (e.g. less than or equal to 1 10 " torr, less than or equal to lxl O "3 torr, less than or equal to lxl 0 ⁇ torr, or less than or equal to 5x10 ⁇ torr)
  • the connector 1 15 as depicted in Figure 1 supports the mass of the inner wall 1 10 and any contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 against the force of the partial pressure within the gap 120.
  • the downward force on the region of the inner wall 1 10 directly opposite to the end of the conduit 125 is approximately equivalent to 100 pounds of weight at that location due to the partial pressure in the gap 120.
  • the connector 1 15 when the container 100 is in an upright position, substantially supports the mass of the inner wall 1 10 and any contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 without additional supporting elements within the gap 120.
  • the inner wall 1 10 is connected to the connector 1 15, and the inner wall 1 10 does not contact any other supporting units when the container 100 is in an upright position.
  • the inner wall 1 10 may swing or otherwise move within the gap 120 in response to motion of the container 100.
  • the flexible connector 1 15 may bend or flex in response to the transportation motion, and the inner wall 110 may correspondingly swing or move within the gap 120.
  • Figure 2 depicts aspects of some embodiments of a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • Figure 2 depicts in cross-section an inner wall 110 in conjunction with a connector 115.
  • a connector 115 with a flexible segment 160 is illustrated, a connector 115 may be non-flexible in some embodiments.
  • the interior of the connector 115 substantially defines a conduit 125 between the exterior of the container and the interior of a storage region 130.
  • the multiple flanges of the flexible segment 160 of the connector 115 form an elongated thermal pathway on the surface of the connector 115 forming the edges of the conduit 125 between the storage region 130 and the region exterior to the container.
  • the elongated thermal pathway of the conduit 125 provides reduced thermal energy transfer along the conduit 125 in comparison with a smooth (i.e. non-flanged) connector 115.
  • the connector 115 illustrated in Figure 2 includes a first compression unit 250 substantially encircling one end of the flexible segment 160 and a second compression unit 240 substantially encircling another end of the flexible segment 160. Although only a single compression strand 230 is illustrated in the view of Figure 2, in an actual embodiment a plurality of compression strands 230 are positioned around the
  • the plurality of compression strands 230 are attached to both the first compression unit 250 and the second compression unit 240, substantially fixing a maximum distance allowable between the first compression unit 250 and the second compression unit 240.
  • a junction unit 270 joins the connector 115 with the inner wall 110 of the container 100.
  • junction units 270 may be included in the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 to ensure a suitably strong, durable and/or gas-impermeable connection between the inner wall 110 and the connector 115 and/ or the outer wall 105 and the connector 115.
  • a "junction unit,” as used herein, includes a unit configured for connections to two different components of the container 100, forming a junction between the different components.
  • a substantially thermally sealed container 100 may include a gas-impermeable junction between the first end of the connector 115 and the outer wall at the edge of the outer wall aperture.
  • a substantially thermally sealed container 100 may include a gas-impermeable junction between the second end of the duct and the inner wall at the edge of the inner wall aperture. Some embodiments include a gas-impermeable junction between the second end of the duct and the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, the gas-impermeable junction substantially encircling the aperture in the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • one or more junction units 270 may be included in the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 to ensure a suitably strong and gas- impermeable attachment between the inner wall 110 and the connector 115 and/ or the outer wall 105 and the connector 115.
  • Some embodiments include a gas-impermeable junction between the first end of the duct and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100, the gas-impermeable junction substantially encircling the aperture in the exterior.
  • a substantially ring-shaped junction unit may be included to functionally connect the top edge of the connector 115 and the edge of the aperture in the outer wall 105.
  • Figure 2 illustrates a substantially ring- shaped junction unit 270 between the bottom edge of the connector 115 and the edge of the aperture in the inner wall 110.
  • Junction units such as those depicted 270 in Figure 2 may be fabricated from roll bonded clad metals, for example as roll bonded transition inserts such as those available from Spur Industries Inc., (Spokane WA).
  • a roll bonded transition insert including a layer of stainless steel bonded to a layer of aluminum is a suitable base for fabricating a junction unit 270 between an aluminum outer wall 105 or inner wall 110 and a stainless steel connector 115.
  • a junction unit 270 is positioned so that identical materials are placed adjacent to each other, and then operably sealed together using commonly implemented methods, such as welding.
  • a roll bonded transition insert including a layer of stainless steel bonded to a layer of aluminum may be used in a first junction unit, suitably positioned so that the aluminum outer wall 105 may be welded to the aluminum portion of the first junction unit.
  • junction unit 270 may be welded to the top edge of the stainless steel connector 115.
  • a second junction unit 270 may be similarly used to operably attach the bottom edge of the stainless steel connector 115 to the edge of the aperture in the aluminum inner wall 110.
  • brazing methods and suitable filler materials may be used to operably attach a connector 115 fabricated from materials distinct from the materials used to fabricate the outer wall 105 and/or the inner wall 110.
  • the interior of the storage region 130 includes a storage structure 200.
  • the storage structure 200 is fixed to the interior surface of the inner wall 110.
  • the storage structure 200 illustrated in Figure 2 includes a plurality of apertures 220, 210 of an equivalent size and shape. Some of these apertures 220, 210 are completely depicted and some are only partially depicted in the cross-section illustration of Figure 2.
  • the storage structure 200 includes a planar structure including a plurality of apertures 220, 210, wherein the planar structure is located adjacent to a wall of the thermally sealed storage region 130 opposite to the single access aperture and substantially parallel with the diameter of the single access aperture.
  • the plurality of apertures 220, 210 included in the storage structure 200 include substantially circular apertures.
  • the plurality of apertures 220, 210 included in the storage structure 200 include a plurality of apertures 220 located around the circumference of the storage structure 200, and a single aperture 210 located in the center of the storage structure 200. As illustrated in Figure 2, the apertures 220, 210 included in the storage structure 200 are of substantially similar size and shape, allowing for the interchange of the heat sink units and the stored material modules in different apertures 220, 210.
  • a storage structure may include brackets, hooks, springs, flanges, or other configurations as appropriate for reversible storage of the heat sink modules and stored material modules of that embodiment.
  • a storage structure may include brackets and/or hooks.
  • a storage structure may include brackets with openings configured for heat sink modules and stored material modules to slide into the structure.
  • a storage structure may include hanging cylinders and/or a carousel-like structure with openings configured for heat sink modules and stored material modules to slide into the structure.
  • a storage structure with aspects configured to assist in the insertion, positioning and removal of heat sink modules and/or stored material modules, such as slide structures and/or positioning guide structures.
  • Some embodiments include an external insertion and removal device, such as a hook, loop or bracket on an elongated pole configured to assist in the insertion, positioning and removal of heat sink modules and/or stored material modules.
  • a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes one or more storage structures 200 within an interior of at least one thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • a storage structure 200 is configured for receiving and storing of at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module.
  • a storage structure 200 is configured for interchangeable storage of at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module.
  • a storage structure may include racks, shelves, containers, thermal insulation, shock insulation, or other structures configured for storage of material within the storage region 130.
  • a storage structure includes at least one bracket configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module.
  • a storage structure includes at least one rack configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some embodiments, a storage structure includes at least one clamp configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some embodiments, a storage structure includes at least one fastener configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some embodiments, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes one or more removable inserts within an interior of at least one thermally sealed storage region 130. The removable inserts may be made of any material appropriate for the embodiment, including nontoxic materials, metal, alloy, composite, or plastic. The one or more removable inserts may include inserts that may be reused or reconditioned. The one or more removable inserts may include inserts that may be cleaned, sterilized, or disinfected as appropriate to the embodiment. In some
  • a storage structure includes at least one bracket configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module.
  • a storage structure is configured for interchangeable storage of a plurality of modules, wherein the modules include at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include no heat sink units. In some embodiments, the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include heat sink units within the interior of the container 100, such as within a storage region 130. Heat sink units may be modular and configured to be removable and interchangeable. In some embodiments, heat sink units are configured to be interchangeable with stored material modules. Heat sink modules may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment. Materials for inclusion in a heat sink module may be selected based on properties such as thermal conductivity, durability over time, stability of the material when subjected to particular temperatures, stability of the material when subjected to repeated cycles of freezing and thawing, cost, weight, density, and availability. In some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from metals.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from stainless steel.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from aluminum.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from plastics.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from polyethylene.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from polypropylene.
  • a heat sink unit may be fabricated to be durable and reusable, for example a heat sink unit may be fabricated from stainless steel and water.
  • a heat sink unit may be brought to a suitable temperature before placement in a storage region 130, for example a heat sink unit may be frozen at -20 degrees Centigrade externally to the container 100 and then brought to 0 degrees Centigrade externally to the container 100 before placement within a storage region 130.
  • heat sink unit includes one or more units that absorb thermal energy. See, for example, U.S. Patent 5,390,734 to Voorhes et al., titled “Heat Sink,” U.S. Patent 4,057,101 to Ruka et al., titled “Heat Sink,” U.S. Patent 4,003,426 to Best et al., titled “Heat or Thermal Energy Storage Structure,” and U.S. Patent 4,976,308 to Faghri titled “Thermal Energy Storage Heat Exchanger,” and Zalba et al., "Review on thermal energy storage with phase change: materials, heat transfer analysis and
  • all of the heat sink materials included within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 are located within specific heat sink units, as illustrated in the following Figures. All of the embodiments described herein include heat sink materials only within sealed heat sink units, maintained physically distinct and separated from any stored material within a storage region 130. This physical distance allows for the transfer of heat energy to the heat sink from the interior of the storage region 130 without excessive cooling of the stored material, which may damage the stored material For example, many medicinals must be stored a temperatures near to but above freezing (e.g. approximately 2 degrees Centigrade to approximately 8 degrees Centigrade).
  • Heat sink units may include, for example: units containing frozen water or other types of ice; units including frozen material that is generally gaseous at ambient temperature and pressure, such as frozen carbon dioxide (C0 2 ); units including liquid material that is generally gaseous at ambient temperature and pressure, such as liquid nitrogen; units including artificial gels or composites with heat sink properties; units including phase change materials; and units including refrigerants. See, for example: U.S. Patent 5,261,241 to Kitahara et al., titled "Refrigerant," U.S.
  • heat sink materials include tetradecane and hexadecane binary mixtures (see, for example, Bo et al., "Tetradecane and hexadecane binary mixtures as phase change materials (PCMs) for cool storage in district cooling systems," Energy 24: 1015-1028 (1999), which is incorporated by reference).
  • heat sink materials include
  • the heat sink materials used for a given embodiment may vary depending on the desired internal temperature of the storage region 130 and the length of intended use, as well as other factors such as cost, weight and toxicity of the heat sink material. Although in the embodiments described herein the heat sink materials are only intended for use within a sealed heat sink unit, toxicity of a heat sink material may be relevant for manufacturing or disposal purposes. As an example, for embodiments wherein the storage region 130 is intended to be maintained between approximately 2 degrees to
  • water ice or a water-ice combination may be used as a heat sink material.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container includes one or more stored material modules.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include stored material modules within a storage region 130 in association with a storage structure 200.
  • a stored material module may be configured to reversibly mate with the edge of an aperture 220, 210 in the storage structure 200, as illustrated in Figure 3.
  • a stored material module may be configured for use with a given size container 100 and storage structure 200 with apertures 220, 210 of specific dimensions.
  • a stored material module may be of a height suitable to fit a storage structure 200 within a storage region 130 in an upright position without coming into contact with the interior surface of the storage region 130.
  • a stored material module may be cylindrical and fit with minimal extra space within an aperture 220, 210 of a storage structure 130.
  • stored material modules refers to modular units configured for storage of materials within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • Stored material modules are modular and configured to be removable and interchangeable.
  • Stored material modules are configured to be removable and interchangeable with each other as well as with heat sink units, i.e. of a similar size and shape.
  • Stored material modules such as those described herein are configured to fit, with minimal open space, within an aperture 220, 210 within a storage structure 200.
  • Stored material modules may include a plurality of storage units.
  • a stored material module may include a plurality of cups, drawers, inserts, indentations, cavities, or chambers, each of which may be a storage unit configured for storage of material.
  • stored material modules are configured to be interchangeable with heat sink units.
  • Stored material modules may be configured to be fixed in place within a storage region 130 with a storage structure 200.
  • Stored material modules may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment. Materials for inclusion in a stored material module may be selected based on properties such as thermal conductivity, durability over time, stability of the material when subjected to particular temperatures, stability, strength, cost, weight, density, and availability.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from metals.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from stainless steel.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from aluminum.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from plastics.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from polyethylene.
  • heat sink modules are fabricated from polypropylene.
  • Figure 3 illustrates aspects of a storage structure 200 and a plurality of modules 300, including heat sink modules 310 and stored material modules 320.
  • the storage structure 200 is configured for receiving and storing a plurality of modules 300, wherein the modules include at least one heat sink module 310 and at least one stored material module 320.
  • the storage structure 200 is configured for interchangeable storage of a plurality of modules 300, wherein the modules include at least one heat sink module 310 and at least one stored material module 320.
  • the storage structure 200 includes a planar structure including a plurality of circular apertures 220, 210 (see Figure 2).
  • the plurality of modules 300 illustrated in Figure 3 are configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of the circular apertures 220, 210.
  • the plurality of modules 300 are configured to be interchangeable at different locations within the storage structure 200.
  • the storage structure 200 includes circular apertures 220, 210 of substantially equivalent size and spacing configured to facilitate the modular format of the plurality of modules 300.
  • the container 100 exterior is not depicted in Figure 3, the storage structure 200 and the plurality of modules 300 are configured for inclusion within a storage region 130 of a container 100.
  • a stored material module 320 includes a plurality of storage units 330.
  • the storage units 330 are arranged in a columnar structure within the stored material module 320.
  • Each storage module 320 includes a plurality of storage units positioned in a columnar array.
  • the plurality of storage units 330 may be of a substantially equivalent size and shape, as depicted in Figure 3.
  • the plurality of storage units 330 may be positioned in a columnar array and wherein the storage units 330 are of a substantially equivalent horizontal dimension and wherein the plurality of storage units 330 include individual storage units 330 of at least two distinct vertical dimensions.
  • Storage units 330 with fixed horizontal dimensions may be stacked in a linear array.
  • storage units 330 with fixed width or diameter need not have the same height.
  • storage units 330 of varying heights may be desirable for storage of materials of varying sizes or heights.
  • storage units 330 of varying heights may be configured for storage of different size vaccine vials.
  • a storage unit 330 may be configured, for example, for storage of standard-size 2 cc vaccine vials, or standard-size 3 cc vaccine vials.
  • a stored material module 320 may also include a cap 340.
  • the cap 340 may be configured to enclose the adjacent storage unit 330.
  • the cap may be removable and replicable.
  • a central stabilizer 350 may be attached to a stored material module 320.
  • a central stabilizer 350 may be attached to a cap 340 reversibly, for example with a threaded screw on the central stabilizer 350 configured to mate with a threaded aperture on the surface of the cap 340.
  • Stored material modules 320 and associated stored material units 330 may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment.
  • the stored material modules 320 and stored material units 330 may be fabricated from a low thermal mass plastic, or a rigid foam material.
  • the stored material modules 320 and stored material units 330 may be fabricated from acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) plastic.
  • the stored material modules 320 may include metal components.
  • a storage structure 200 and a plurality of modules 300 may be configured for interchangeable storage of heat sink modules 310 and stored material modules 320.
  • the choice of the type and number of heat sink modules 310 and stored material modules 320 may vary for any particular use of the container 100.
  • relatively fewer stored material modules 320 and relatively more heat sink modules 310 may be included.
  • a total of nine heat sink modules may be included in the outer ring of the storage structure 200 and a single stored material module 320 may be included in the center of the ring.
  • An embodiment such as depicted in Figure 3 may, for example, be configured to store a single stored material module 320 and a total of nine heat sink modules 310 including water ice for at least three months at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
  • An embodiment such as depicted in Figure 3 may, for example, be configured to store two stored material modules 320 and a total of eight heat sink modules 310 including water ice for at least two months at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
  • a heat sink, module 310 including a particular volume of heat sink material at a particular temperature may be estimated to have a particular amount of energy storage, such as in joules of energy.
  • an incremental value of energy e.g. joules, per time of storage may be calculated.
  • an incremental value of energy e.g. joules, per access to a storage region may be calculated.
  • heat sink module(s) 310 with corresponding values of energy storage e.g. joules
  • heat sink module(s) 310 with corresponding values of energy storage e.g. joules, may be included as calculated per access to the storage region e.g. removal and/or insertion of stored material).
  • Figure 4 illustrates aspects of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 including stored material modules 310, 320.
  • Figure 4 depicts an inner wall 110 and an attached connector 115 in cross-section.
  • the storage region 130 within the inner wall 110 contains multiple storage modules 310, 320.
  • Figure 4 illustrates two heat sink modules 310 in cross-section. As is evident in the cross- section view, each of the two heat sink modules 310 includes two heat sink units, forming an upper and a lower heat sink region relative to the orientation of Figure 4.
  • Each of the heat sink modules 310 includes a cap 360.
  • the cap 360 may be configured to be removable, for example with screw- type threading configured to mate with an edge of the heat sink unit.
  • a heat sink unit or module may not include a cap 360 but instead by constitutively sealed.
  • the cap 360 may include a flange, handle, knob or shaft configured to enable the insertion and removal of the heat sink module 310 from the container 100.
  • a cap 360 may include a thin flexible arc of material externally to the cap, the arc of material of suitable strength to allow its use as a handle for the insertion and removal of the heat sink module 310 from the storage region 130.
  • a heat sink module 310 may be cylindrical, as illustrated in Figure 4.
  • a heat sink module 310 may contain, for example, water, water ice, and/or air.
  • a heat sink module 310 may contain a heat sink material that may be recharged, such as water (i.e. by re-cooling or re- freezing).
  • a heat sink module 310 may contain a heat sink material that may be replaced (i.e. by opening a cap 360).
  • the illustrated heat sink modules 310 are substantially cylindrical in shape and include caps 360 configured for reversible opening of the heat sink modules 310.
  • the heat sink modules 310 may be opened for recharging or replacement of heat sink material within the heat sink modules 310.
  • the heat sink modules 310 may be sealed closed (e.g. with a welding joint) and not configured for reversible opening.
  • the heat sink modules 310 may include two or more heat sink units (e.g. top and bottom relative to Figure 4). Heat sink units may be attached to form a heat sink module 310 with a module joint, for example an adhesive attachment, a weld attachment, or a screw-type reversible attachment.
  • Some embodiments include a plurality of heat sink modules 310 of a substantially cylindrical shape as depicted in Figures 3 and 4.
  • the materials used in the fabrication of the heat sink units may depend, for example, on the thermal properties of the heat sink material stored in the heat sink modules 310.
  • the materials used in the fabrication of the heat sink modules 310 may depend, for example, on cost, weight, availability, and durability.
  • the heat sink modules 310 may be fabricated from stainless steel of an appropriate type and thickness to the embodiment.
  • the heat sink modules 310 may include water stored internally as a heat sink material.
  • substantially cylindrical heat sink modules 310 may be fabricated from stainless steel and
  • the heat sink modules 310 may then be placed horizontally and frozen in an environment set to approximately -20 degrees C (for example, a standard freezer). After a sufficient time for the water within the heat sink modules 310 to freeze, the heat sink modules may be removed and placed at
  • the heat sink modules 310 contain both ice and liquid water, they are ready for use in a storage region 130 within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 with an approximate temperature range between 0 degrees C to 10 degrees C.
  • FIG. 4 depicts a stored material module 320 in cross-section in the center of the storage region 130.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a series of stored material units 330 arranged in a columnar array.
  • Each of the stored material units 330 includes a side region 440 and a bottom region 430 positioned at substantially right angles to the side region 440.
  • Each of the stored material units 330 includes a plurality of apertures 410 in the bottom of the stored material unit 330. Such apertures may be configured to improve thermal circulation around stored material within the stored material unit 330.
  • Such apertures may be configured to improve air flow around stored material within the stored material unit 330.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a base 420 at the lower end of the module 320, the base having an external surface configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of the center aperture 210 in the storage structure 200.
  • a stored material module 320 may be configured to reversibly mate with an aperture in a storage structure (see e.g. Figures 9, 10 and 11).
  • the stored material module 320 includes a plurality of stored material units 330. Although each of the stored material units 330 depicted in Figures 3 and 4 are of a similar vertical dimension, or height, in some embodiments the stored material units 330 may be of a variety of vertical dimensions, or heights.
  • Each of the stored material units 330 is configured in a cup-like shape.
  • Each of the stored material units 330 includes a side region 440 and a bottom region 430 positioned at substantially right angles to the side region 440.
  • Each of the stored material units 330 may include a plurality of apertures 410 in the bottom of the cuplike unit.
  • the stored material units 330 are arrayed in a columnar stack, with most of the stored material units 330 resting on top of a lower stored material unit 330. At the bottom of the column of stored material units 330, the lowest stored material unit 330 sits on top of a stored material module base 420. At the top of the column of stored material units 330, the highest stored material unit 330 is covered with a cap 340.
  • the cap 340 includes an attachment region 370.
  • a stored material module 320 includes a flange, knob, handle or shaft configured to enable removal and insertion of the stored material module 320 into a storage region 130.
  • a stored material module 320 includes an indentation along at least one vertical side, the indentation configured for insertion and support of wires as part of an information system.
  • a stored material module 320 includes an indentation along at least one vertical side, the indentation configured for insertion and support of wires as part of a sensor system.
  • Figure 4 depicts an attachment region 370 configured for reversible attachment of a central stabilizer unit 350 to the stored material module 320.
  • the attachment region 370 may include a threaded region configured to reversibly mate with a threaded region on a central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 may be configured from a material with low thermal conductivity, such as a low thermal mass plastic, or a rigid foam material.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 may be configured to substantially fill the conduit 125 in the connector 115.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 may be configured to provide " lateral stabilization and/or support to the attached the stored material module 320. As illustrated in Figure 4, a distal end of a central stabilizer unit 350 may protrude beyond the end of the connector 115.
  • Figure 5 illustrates aspects of an apparatus for use with a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • An apparatus includes: a stored material module including a plurality of storage units configured for storage of medicinal units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container and including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit; a storage stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the stored material module; a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one storage stabilizer unit; and a central stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit in the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • the size and shape of the apparatus is dependent on the particular container 100 with which the apparatus is used.
  • the stored material module base 420 is configured to reversibly mate with the surface of an aperture in the storage structure 200, while the lid 500 is configured to remain external to the container 100.
  • the apparatus therefore, must be of an appropriate length (e.g. along the axis between the stored material module base 420 and the lid handle 510) to allow the stored material module base 420 to reversibly mate with the surface of an aperture in the storage structure 200, while simultaneously allowing the lid 500 to remain external to the container 100.
  • the stored material module base 420, the stored material module 320 and the central stabilizer 350 of the apparatus are configured to be reversibly inserted and removed from the interior of the container 100 through the conduit 125.
  • the apparatus therefore, must be of a diameter (i.e. approximately horizontal relative to Figure 5) across the stored material module base 420, the stored material module 320 and the central stabilizer 350 to fit within the conduit 125.
  • the central stabilizer 350 has a diameter similar to the minimal diameter of the conduit 125, so that there is minimal air space between the outer surface of the central stabilizer 350 and the surface of the connector 115 when the apparatus is in use within the container 100.
  • An apparatus such as illustrated in Figure 5 also should be of a weight and size suitable for handling by a person.
  • the apparatus should be configured to allow an individual person to easily pull the apparatus partially out of the container 100 with one hand, and to remove stored material from a storage unit 330 with the opposite hand.
  • the total apparatus such as illustrated in Figure 5 should be no more than 3 kg, or no more than 5 kg, or no more than 7 kg, or no more than 10 kg when in use with stored material included within the storage units 330 A-I.
  • Components of the apparatus may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment. For example, multiple components may be fabricated from materials selected for attributes such as cost, strength, density, weight, durability, low thermal transfer properties, resistance to corrosion, and thermal stability. Some of the components may be fabricated from a rigid plastic material, such as polyoxymethylene (POM) or DelrinTM. Some of the components may be fabricated from stainless steel. Some of the components may be fabricated from aluminum. Some of the components may be fabricated from glass-reinforced plastic (GRP) or fiberglass.
  • a stored material module 320 includes a plurality of storage units, 330A, 330B, 330C, 330D, 330E, 330F, 330G, 330H, and 3301.
  • the storage units 330A-I are positioned in a columnar array in the stored material module 320.
  • the storage units 330A-I are positioned as a vertical stack within the stored material module 320.
  • the storage units 330 A-I are configured to be interchangeable within the stored material module 320.
  • storage unit 330 B and storage unit 330 D may be removed from the stored material module 320 and switched in position within the stored material module 320 (i.e.
  • storage units 330A-I are of a substantially similar size and shape. In some embodiments, there may be at least two storage units 330 of a similar diameter relative to the column of the stored material module 320 but with distinct lengths, or heights relative to the stored material module 320 illustrated in Figure 5. Such differently-sized storage units 330 may be suitable for storage of materials of different sizes within a single stored material module 320. For example, medicinal vials, such as vaccine vials, of different heights may be stored within a single stored material module 320 in distinct storage units 330 with different heights.
  • Each of the storage units 330A-I are configured for storage of medicinal units, more specifically each of the storage units 330A-I are configured for storage of medicinal vials, such as vaccine vials, of a set size and shape.
  • Each of the storage units 330A-I are configured for storage of a number of vaccine vials, depending on the size of the vaccine vials (i.e. 2 cc or 3 cc vials). Given the space available, each of the storage units 330A-I are configured to store a maximum number of medicinal vials, for example less than 30 medicinal vials, less than 20 medicinal vials, or less than 10 medicinal vials.
  • one or more of the plurality of the storage units 330A-I are configured to store prefiUed medicinal syringes and associated packaging, for example prefiUed syringes containing vaccine.
  • each of the storage units 330A-I may be configured to store a maximum number of prefilled medicinal syringes, for example less than 25 medicinal syringes, less than 20 medicinal syringes, less than 15 medicinal syringes, less than 10 medicinal syringes, or less than 5 medicinal syringes. Additional packaging, padding or
  • contamination-limiting material may be added to one or more storage unit 330 A-I as desirable for a specific embodiment and type of stored material.
  • One or more storage units 330A-I may also be left empty during use of the container, depending on the needs of the user.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container. More specifically, the stored material module 320 includes a stored material module base 420 operably attached to the stored material module at an end of the stored material module distal to the stored material module cap. The exterior surface of the stored material module base 420 is configured to reversibly mate with the edge surface of an aperture 220, 210 in the storage structure 200 (not illustrated in Figure 5). In some embodiments, as illustrated in Figures 26-31 and as discussed more fully in the associated text, a stored material module base 420 includes one or more apertures with edges configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of a stabilizer unit.
  • the apparatus depicted in Figure 5 also includes a storage stabilizer unit 570 configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module 320.
  • Each of the plurality of storage units 330A-I within the stored material module 320 include a surface configured to reversibly mate with an outer surface of the storage stabilizer unit 570. See also Figures 9-1 1 and associated text.
  • a single storage stabilizer unit 570 of a substantially rod-like shape is positioned along the outer edge of the surface of the stored material module 320. In some embodiments, there may be two or more storage stabilizer units 570.
  • a storage stabilizer unit 570 is configured to provide lateral support for the stored material module 320 column, maintaining the structure of the stored material module 320 during use.
  • a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from material such as stainless steel, plastic, or glass-reinforced plastic.
  • a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from a material that resists corrosion and maintains its properties in a given intended use.
  • a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from a material predicted to maintain its strength and structure at in that temperature range.
  • a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from a material with low corrosion properties in those conditions.
  • Figures 11 , 12 and 21-29 and associated text further describe storage stabilizer units 570.
  • the apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340 configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units (e.g. 330 A as illustrated in Figure 5) within the stored material module 320 and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one storage stabilizer unit 570.
  • the stored material module cap 340 is configured to be positioned at one end of the columnar array of stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320.
  • a stored material module cap 340 may include at least one aperture with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a tab of a stored material unit 330.
  • a stored material module cap 340 may include at least one aperture configured to attach a fastener between the stored material module 320 and the stored material module cap 340.
  • a stored material module cap 340 may be fabricated from a number of materials of low thermal density and sufficient strength and durability.
  • a stored material module cap 340 may be fabricated from low thermal density plastic, or glass-reinforced plastic.
  • a stored material module cap 340 is configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the cap may include a connection region 370, as described in more detail in Figures 13-17.
  • a connection region 370 may include a base and a rim, with a surface of the connection region 370 configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the central stabilizer 350.
  • a connection region 370 is configured to allow a user to reversibly slide the stored material module 320 and the central stabilizer unit 350 and to maintain their relative positions during use of the apparatus.
  • a stored material module cap 340 may include a connection region 370, including an aperture; and a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a surface of the central stabilizer 350.
  • an aperture in a stored material module cap 340 may be configured to allow for a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector positioned to mate with a
  • a stored material module cap 340 may include a surface region configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and a central stabilizer 350.
  • the apparatus illustrated in Figure 5 also includes a central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 is configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap 340, wherein the central stabilizer unit 350 is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit 125 in the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 is positioned with a central axis substantially identical to the column formed by the stored material module 340 during regular use.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 includes a base 560, wherein the base 560 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap 340.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 may include an aperture 550 configured for user access to a fastener release for a fastener between the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module 340.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 may include a fastener positioned to reversibly attach the central stabilizer unit to the stored material module cap 340.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 may include a mechanical release operably attached to the fastener, the release positioned for access from an exterior surface of the central stabilizer unit 350, such as through an aperture 550.
  • the apparatus illustrated in Figure 5 includes a lid 500 attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit 350 at a site distal to the stored material module cap 340.
  • the lid 500 is attached to a handle 510 on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the lid 500 includes a display 520, for example a digital display unit, such as a monitor, screen, or video display device.
  • the display 520 may be integral to the lid 500.
  • a display 520 may be a LCD display.
  • the lid may also include an electromechanical user input device 530, such as a button operably attached to circuitry.
  • the user input device 530 and associated circuitry is operably attached to the display 520, for example so that a signal is sent to the display 520 when the user input device 530 is operated by a user.
  • a person may depress a button user input device 530 and send a signal to the circuitry system, causing the system to respond by sending a signal to display the most recent sensor readings on the display 520.
  • the lid 500 may include an access aperture 540 for access to a connector operably connected to circuitry positioned under the lid 500.
  • the lid 500 may be fabricated out of a variety of materials with low thermal conductivity and appropriate durability, hardness and strength.
  • the lid may be fabricated from a suitable plastic, glass-impregnated plastic, or aluminum.
  • the lid 500 serves as a cover for a circuitry system located in the space under the lid and external to the container 100.
  • a circuitry system may include a global positioning device (i.e. GPS) and be configured to send a signal to a display 520 at set intervals, or in response to an input signal when a user input device 530 is operated by a user.
  • a circuitry system may be operably connected to a temperature sensor located on a stored material module 320 or within a stabilizer unit 570, the circuitry system configured to send a signal to a display 520 at set intervals, or in response to an input signal when a user input device 530 is operated by a user.
  • a circuitry system may be operably connected to an electromechanical switch located on a surface of the lid 500 in a region configured to mate with a surface of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 when the lid 500 is positioned on a container 100.
  • Such an electromechanical switch may be configured with the associated circuitry to maintain a closed electrical circuit when the switch is engaged (i.e. pressed down by the pressure of the surface of the container 100 against the lid 500).
  • a circuitry system and associated electromechanical switch located on a surface of the lid 500 may be configured to sound an alarm, such as a specific signal on the display 520, in response to the electromechanical switch being unengaged and the associated closed electrical circuit broken.
  • a circuitry system may be configured to record data, for example from a sensor, over time.
  • a circuitry system may be configured to display data on the display 520 in response to a user of the apparatus operating the user input device 530.
  • a circuitry system may be configured to display data on the display 520 in response to predetermined parameters, such as a preset GPS coordinate being detected or a preset temperature being detected by an attached sensor.
  • a circuitry system may include at least one power source.
  • An electrical power source may originate, for example, from municipal electrical power supplies, electric batteries, or an electrical generator device.
  • a power source may include an electrical connector configured to connect with a municipal electrical power supply, for example through a connection associated with an access aperture 540 in the lid 500.
  • a power source may include a battery pack.
  • a power source may include an electrical generator, for example a solar-powered generator.
  • sensors within the apparatus may also be operably connected to a power source located under the lid 500.
  • power source such as a battery pack may be operably connected to a temperature sensor located in a stabilizer unit through wires running through the stabilizer unit, through an aperture in the stored material module cap 340, through an aperture in the central stabilizer 350 to circuitry located under the lid 500.
  • power source such as a battery pack may be operably connected to display 520 associated with the surface of the lid 500.
  • a circuitry system may be operably connected to a computing device, such as via a wire connection, such as joined through an access aperture 540 in the lid 500 or a wireless connection.
  • the computing device may include a display, such as a monitor, screen, or video display device.
  • the computing device may include a user interface, such as a keyboard, keypad, touch screen or computer mouse.
  • a computing device may be a desktop system, or it may include a computing device configured for mobility, for example a PDA, tablet-type device, laptop, or mobile phone.
  • a system user may use the computing device to obtain information regarding the circuitry system and apparatus, query the circuitry system, or set predetermined parameters regarding the circuitry system.
  • a remote system user such as an individual person operating a remote computing device, may send signals to the circuitry system with instructions to set the parameters of acceptable temperature readings from a temperature sensor, and instructions to transmit a signal to the display 520 if temperature readings deviate from the acceptable parameters.
  • a circuitry system may include a controller.
  • a circuitry system may include a power distribution unit.
  • the power distribution unit may be configured, for example, to conserve the energy use by the system over time.
  • the power distribution unit may be configured, for example, to minimize total energy within the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 within the container 100, for example by minimizing power distribution to one or more sensors located within the stored material module 320 or stabilizer unit 570.
  • the power distribution unit may include a battery capacity monitor.
  • the power distribution unit may include a power distribution switch.
  • the power distribution unit may include charging circuitry.
  • the power distribution unit may be operably connected to a power source.
  • the power distribution unit may be configured to monitor electricity flowing between the power source and other components within the circuitry system.
  • a wire connection may operably connect a power distribution unit to a power source.
  • the circuitry system may include additional components.
  • the circuitry system may include at least one indicator, such as a LED indicator or a display indicator.
  • the circuitry system may include at least one indicator that provides an auditory indicator, such as an auditory transmitter configured to produce a beep, tone, voice signal or alarm.
  • the circuitry system may include at least one antenna.
  • An antenna may be configured to send and/or receive signals from a sensor network.
  • An antenna may be configured to send and/or receive signals from an external network, such as a cellular network, or as part of an ad- hoc system configured to provide information regarding a group of substantially thermally sealed containers 100.
  • the circuitry system may include one or more global positioning devices (e.g. GPS).
  • the circuitry system may include one or more data storage units, such as computer DRAM, hard disk drives, or optical disk drives.
  • the circuitry system may include circuitry configured to process data from a sensor network.
  • the circuitry system may include logic systems.
  • the circuitry system may include other components as suitable for a particular embodiment.
  • the circuitry system may include one or more external network connection device.
  • An external network connection device may include a cellular phone network transceiver unit.
  • An external network connection device may include a WiFiTM network transceiver unit.
  • An external network connection device may include an Ethernet network transceiver unit.
  • An external network connection device may be configured to transmit with Short Message Service (SMS) protocols.
  • An external network connection device may be configured to transmit to a general packet radio service (GPRS).
  • SMS Short Message Service
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • An external network connection device may be configured to transmit to an ad-hoc network system.
  • An external network connection device may be configured to transmit to an ad-hoc network system such as a peer to peer communication network, a self-realizing mesh network, or a ZigBeeTM network.
  • Figure 6 illustrates aspects of the use of an apparatus such as that shown in Figure 5.
  • Figure 6 illustrates how components of the apparatus may shift relative to each other for access of stored material within the storage units 330 A-I.
  • some of the plurality of stored material units 330 A-I have moved relative to the column of the stored material module 320.
  • Stored material units 330 A and 330 B have moved vertically, or upwards as viewed in Figure 6, relative to the remainder of the column of the stored material module 320 including stored material units 330 C-I and the base 420.
  • the relative movement of the stored material units 330 A and 330 B allows a user of the apparatus to access material stored in stored material unit 330 B, for example by grasping a stored medicinal vial therein with the user's fingers.
  • the relative movement of the stored material units 330 A and 330 B allows a user of the apparatus to insert material into stored material unit 330 B, for example by placing medicinal vial from a user's fingers into stored material unit 330 B.
  • the relative movement of the stored material units should be sufficient to allow access to the stored material within the stored material units.
  • stored material units that were previously in contact with each other e.g. 330 B and 330 C in Figure 5 should move at least 3 cm, at least 4 cm, or at least 5 cm apart depending on the size of the stored material.
  • stored material units that were previously in contact with each other e.g.
  • FIG. 6 in some embodiments there are multiple storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • the storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are each configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units 330 A-I within the stored material module 320 and configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of each of the storage stabilizer units 330 A-I.
  • the storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are configured as tubular structures, and the storage units 330 A-I are configured with a circular surface region that reversibly mates with the surfaces of the tubular structures.
  • distinct storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B may be of different relative diameters.
  • storage stabilizer unit 570 A may be of approximately double the diameter of storage stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • storage stabilizer unit 570 A may have a diameter of approximately one centimeter, while storage stabilizer unit 570 B may have a diameter of approximately a half centimeter.
  • the plurality of storage units 330 A-I are configured to slide along an axis substantially defined by one or more storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • the storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are configured as tubular structures, and the storage units 330 A-I are configured with a corresponding surface region that reversibly mates with and can slide along the surfaces of the tubular structures.
  • the corresponding storage units 330 A-I surfaces configured to mate with the surfaces of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570B are similarly of different sizes (see Figures 9-11 and associated text).
  • the embodiment illustrated in Figure 6 includes two storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B, however in some embodiments there may be a single storage stabilizer unit or more than two storage stabilizer units.
  • the choice of number and relative positioning of storage stabilizer units depends on the intended use of a particular container 100. For example a container 100 designed for use in a relatively stable setting may require fewer storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B than a container 100 designed for frequent transport or relocation in use.
  • a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be fabricated from a variety of materials. The choice of material may be made relative to considerations such as durability, thermal properties, corrosion resistance and cost.
  • a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be fabricated from plastic, or glass-reinforced plastic.
  • Figure 7 illustrates an apparatus such as that shown in Figure 5 in a full side view. An apparatus in the configuration illustrated in Figure 7 is suitable for use with, and placement in, a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • An apparatus such as illustrated in Figure 7 includes a lid 500 with an integral handle 510 and a user input device 530, such as an electromagnetic switch. The lid 500 is attached to a central stabilizer unit 350 at an opposing end from the base 560 of the central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the central stabilizing unit 350 includes an aperture 550 configured to allow a user of the apparatus to access a fastener within the central stabilizing unit 350, such as a fastener configured to reversibly hold the central stabilizing unit in position relative to a stored material module cap 340.
  • the apparatus includes a stored material module 320 attached to the stored material module cap 340 at an opposing face of the stored material module cap 340 from the central stabilizing unit 350.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a plurality of storage units (e.g. 330) arrayed in a vertical stack with the top edge of each storage unit in the stack in contact with the corresponding lower edge of the adjacent storage unit.
  • the bottom of the stored material module 320 includes a stored material module base 420.
  • the apparatus may also include one or more storage stabilizer unit located behind the storage units in the instant view.
  • Figure 8 depicts an apparatus such as the one shown in Figure 7, in a similar full side view.
  • the apparatus illustrated in Figure 8 includes the same features as in Figure 7, with the addition that two of the storage units (330 A and 330 B) are separated from the rest of the stack of storage units (330 C-I). This configuration would allow access to material stored within the storage unit identified as 330 C.
  • the separation of the storage units 330 A and 330 B from the remainder of the units is along an axis substantially defined by two storage stabilizer units, 570 A and 570 B.
  • Figure 9 illustrates aspects of a stored material unit 330.
  • the illustrated stored material unit 330 includes a side wall 440.
  • the side wall 440 is formed from a curved plane in a substantially cylindrical structure.
  • the lower edge of the side wall 440 includes at least one indentation 940.
  • the edges of the indentation 940 are configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of one or more corresponding tabs 900 on an adjacent stored material unit 330.
  • a stored material unit 330 may include at least one tab structure 900 on an upper edge of the cup-like structure.
  • a stored material unit 330 may include at least one indentation 940, wherein the indentation 940 is configured to reversibly mate with a tab structure 900 on an adjacent stored material unit 330.
  • a series of tab structures 900 and corresponding indentations 940 may assist in stabilization of a columnar array of stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320.
  • a series of tab structures 900 and corresponding indentations 940 may be configured to minimize potential displacement of the stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320.
  • a series of tab structures 900 and corresponding indentations 940 may be configured to increase stability of stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320 during addition or removal of stored material to one or more stored material units 330.
  • a stored material unit 330 includes a bottom 430, which is substantially planar and attached to the side wall 440 at substantially right angles.
  • the stored material unit bottom 430 may include one or more apertures 410, configured to allow air circulation through the stored material unit, such as during storage or when the apparatus is being inserted into or removed from a substantially thermally sealed container.
  • the side wall 440 includes at least one gap 910, configured as a region of the side wall 440 that is shorter than other regions.
  • a gap 910 may be oriented and configured to allow a user of the apparatus to view the interior of the stored material unit 330, such as any material stored within the stored material unit 330.
  • a gap 910 may be oriented and configured to allow a user of the apparatus increased access to any material stored within the stored material unit 330, such as when the stored material unit is distanced from an adjacent stored material unit (e.g. as in Figure 8).
  • a gap 910 may be configured to allow thermal circulation through a stored material unit 330.
  • a gap 910 may be configured to allow air flow through the stored material unit 330.
  • a gap 910 may be configured to allow visual identification of stored material within the stored material unit
  • a stored material unit 330 may include at least one stabilizer unit attachment region 920, 930. As illustrated in Figure 9, the stored material unit 330 includes two stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930. As illustrated in Figure 9, each of the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 is configured with a surface of a size and shape to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit 570. For example, stabilizer unit attachment region 920 is configured to reversibly mate with the surface of stabilizer unit 570 B in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 5. For example, stabilizer unit attachment region 930 is configured to reversibly mate with the surface of stabilizer unit 570 A in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 5.
  • a stabilizer unit attachment region may be of another shape.
  • a stabilizer unit attachment region may be configured in a substantially oblong, rectangular, triangular or other shape as required for the surface to reversibly mate with the surface of a corresponding stabilizer unit.
  • the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 have surfaces that are configured to allow the stabilizer unit to slide relative to the surface of the stored material unit 330.
  • the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 are of a length shorter than the length of the surface of a corresponding stabilizer unit.
  • the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 are configured to reversibly mate with a substantial region of the surface of a corresponding stabilizer unit as the surfaces move relative to each other.
  • Figure 10 illustrates aspects of a stored material unit 330.
  • the view illustrated in Figure 10 is a "top down" view of a stored material unit 330 such as the one illustrated in Figure 9.
  • a stored material unit 330 includes a side wall 440, and a bottom region 430.
  • the bottom region may include apertures 410, for example to promote air flow through the stored material unit 330.
  • the side wall 440 may include one or more tab structures 900.
  • the stored material unit 330 may include at least one stabilizer unit attachment region 920, 930. In embodiments wherein the stored material unit includes more than one stabilizer unit attachment region 920, 930, the regions may be of differing sizes and shapes, for example to promote stability, to maintain the directionality of the apparatus, or as suitable for other design requirements.
  • stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B include other features within their interiors as further illustrated in Figure 11.
  • Figure 11 depicts aspects of a stored material unit 330 in horizontal cross- section along with the associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B and lower stored material units in the columnar array.
  • the view depicted in Figure 11 is similar to the view as illustrated in Figure 10, only with the addition of multiple lower stored material units as well as associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • a stored material unit 330 includes a side wall 440, and a bottom region 430.
  • the side wall 440 may include one or more tab structures 900.
  • the bottom region may include apertures 410, for example to promote air flow through the stored material unit 330.
  • the apertures 410 in adjacent stored material units e.g. 330 A, 330 B and 330 C in Figure 5 need not align or correspond in a linear array through the column.
  • the stored material unit 330 shown in Figure 11 includes stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930.
  • the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 are of similar curvilinear shapes with distinct diameters.
  • Each of the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 have surfaces which reversibly mate with the exterior surfaces of stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • Each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B includes an inner tube and at least one exterior tube of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned as at least one interior and at least one exterior tube relative to each other, the tubes sized to slide relative to each other.
  • the tubes included in each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B form a telescoping structure along the length of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • each of the interior tubes included in each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B forms an interior aperture, including an interior space within each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • the interior space within a stabilizer unit 570A, 570B may include additional components.
  • the interior space within stabilizer unit 570 A includes a circuitry connector 1 1 10, such as common connectors between wires and circuitry components.
  • a circuitry connector 1 1 10 may include, for example, a cable connector, a quick-disconnect, a keyed connector, a plug and socket connector, or other types of electrical connectors as suitable to a particular embodiment.
  • the interior space within stabilizer unit 570 B includes a retaining unit 1100.
  • the retaining unit 1100 is configured to maintain tension on a rod, as further illustrated in Figure 17.
  • the interior space within a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be empty or include other components as suitable for a given embodiment.
  • Figure 12 illustrates a stored material module cap 340 and two associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B in the absence of a stored material module 320.
  • a stored material module cap 340 and associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are generally implemented in combination with a stored material module 320, the stored material module 320 has been removed from Figure 12 for purposes of illustration.
  • a stored material module cap 340 includes an attachment region 370.
  • each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B includes an inner tube and at least one exterior tube of different internal diameters.
  • Figure 12 illustrates that stabilizer unit 570 A includes an inner tube 1200 and an outer tube 1220, with the exterior surface of the inner tube 1200 positioned to reversibly mate with the interior surface of the outer tube 1220.
  • the inner tube 1200 is positioned to slide relative to the outer tube 1220 in a telescoping fashion, so that the inner tube 1200 reversibly slides within the outer tube 1220.
  • the end of the inner tube 1200 may be operably attached to a surface of the stored material module cap 340 if desired in a specific embodiment.
  • Figure 12 also illustrates that stabilizer unit 570 B includes an outer tube 1210 and an inner tube 1230. The exterior surface of the inner tube 1230 positioned to reversibly mate with the interior surface of the outer tube 1210.
  • the inner tube 1230 is positioned to slide relative to the outer tube 1210 in a telescoping fashion, so that the inner tube 1230 reversibly slides within the outer tube 1210.
  • the end of the outer tube 1210 may be operably attached to a surface of the stored material module cap 340 if desired in a specific embodiment.
  • Each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B may also include a retaining unit operably attached to the inner tube 1200, 1230 and positioned to slide within an aperture in the corresponding outer tube 1220, 1210. See Figures 24 and 25 for further detail on these retaining units.
  • Figure 13 depicts aspects of a stored material module cap 340.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes connection region 370.
  • the connection region 370 has a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a central stabilizer 350, such as an attachment region 560 of a base of a central stabilizer 350.
  • the stored material module cap 340 is configured to reversibly attach to a central stabilizer 350.
  • Stored material modules 320 configured to be placed in apertures 220 in an edge region of a storage structure 200 (see Figure 2 for example) may include different embodiments of a stored material module cap 340 as suitable for their configuration.
  • Stored material modules 320 configured to be placed in apertures 220 in an edge region of a storage structure 200 (see Figure 2 for example) may also include a stored material module cap 340 as illustrated in Figure 13 to provide interchangeability and flexibility of configurations of the stored material modules 320 within a storage structure 200.
  • the connection region 370 illustrated in Figure 13 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a central stabilizer 350, including a base of the connection region 1350 and a rim of a connection region 1340. The base of the connection region 1350 and a rim of a
  • connection region 1340 as illustrated in Figure 13 forms a flared structure configured to slide along a corresponding surface of a central stabilizer 350.
  • the connection region 370 illustrated in Figure 13 also includes an indentation 1330.
  • an indentation 1330 may be of a size and shape to include a circuitry connector 1310, such as a universal serial bus (USB) connector.
  • a circuitry connector 1310 may also include, for example, a cable connector, a quick-disconnect, a keyed connector, a plug and socket connector, or other types of electrical connectors as suitable to a particular embodiment.
  • an indentation 1330 may be of a size and shape to expose a shaft 1320 within the stored material module cap 340.
  • the lower region of the stored material module cap 340 is configured to reversibly attach with the upper face of the topmost stored material unit 330 in a stored material module 320.
  • the stored material module cap 340 may include an aperture 1360 with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a tab structure 900 on a stored material unit 330.
  • a stored material module cap 340 may include one or more apertures 1300 configured to hold a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and an adjacent stored material unit 330.
  • a stored material module cap 340 may also include a surface region 1370 configured to provide minimal overlap with a gap 910 in a stored material unit 330.
  • a surface region 1370 configured to provide minimal overlap with a gap 910 in a stored material unit 330 may be configured to maximize the space available for a user of the system to access stored material in the stored material unit 330, for example by using fingers to remove stored material.
  • a user of the system may use a device, such as a rod, tongs, tweezers, pincers, pliers or similar devices.
  • Figure 14 depicts aspects, in an angled cross-section view, of a stored material module cap 340 such as illustrated in Figure 13.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a connection region 370 with a base region 1350 and a rim region 1340.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a lower region configured to reversibly attach to the upper face of the topmost stored material unit 330 in a stored material module 320.
  • the lower region includes an aperture 1300 configured to hold a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and an adjacent stored material unit 330.
  • the lower region includes a surface region 1370 configured to provide minimal overlap with a gap 910 in a stored material unit 330.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330.
  • the aperture 1330 is of sufficient dimensions to provide space for a circuitry connector 1310.
  • the circuitry connector 1310 and the corresponding region of the stored material module cap 340 may include apertures configured for a fastener 1430 to attach the circuitry connector 1310 to the stored material module cap 340.
  • the circuitry connector 1310 illustrated in Figure 14 is a universal serial bus (USB) type connector, but other types of circuitry connectors may be used in various embodiments as required by the specific circuitry of an embodiment.
  • the circuitry connector 1310 includes an aperture 1400 positioned to reversibly mate with a
  • the stored material module cap 340 depicted in Figure 14 also includes interior structures configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 corning into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340. As will be further shown in the subsequent Figures, this transfer of force by mechanical parts results in one or more stabilizer units (e.g. 570 A, 570 B, not illustrated in Figure 14) held in a fixed position relative to the stored material module cap 340. As illustrated in Figure 14, the stored material module cap 340 includes an indentation 1330 of a size and shape to expose a shaft 1320 enclosed within an internal aperture of the stored material module cap 340. The shaft 1320 includes side regions of varying widths relative to the diameter of the shaft.
  • stabilizer units e.g. 570 A, 570 B
  • the shaft includes side regions of varying diameters relative to the axis of the length of the shaft, or diameters approximately parallel with the top surface of the connection region 370 as illustrated in Figures 13 and 14.
  • the shaft 1320 has an equilibrium position relative to the force along the axis of the shaft 1320 from the pressure of an attached spring 1450.
  • the shaft 1320 is configured to transmit force along the axis of the shaft 1320 in response to pressure from a surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340, including the end of the shaft 1320.
  • the shaft 1320 contacts with a central stabilizer 350 with the surface of the stored material module cap 340 at the end of the shaft 1320 results in the shaft 1320 to move within its associated aperture, resulting in a side region with a different and larger diameter to be placed adjacent to a rod 1410 attached to a rotating plate 1420.
  • the different and larger diameter region of the shaft 1320 causes motion of the rotating plate 1420.
  • the interior of the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1440 sufficient to allow for motion of the rotating plate 1420. Further aspects of interior structures configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340 are illustrated in the following Figures.
  • Figure 15 illustrates, in a full cross-section view, further aspects of a stored material module cap 340 such as depicted in Figure 14.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a connection region 370 with a base region 1350 and a rim region 1340. As shown in Figure 15, the base region 1350 and rim region 1340 form a flanged region for reversibly mating with a corresponding surface of a central stabilizer 350.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a lower region configured to reversibly attach with the upper face of the topmost stored material unit 330 in a stored material module 320.
  • the lower region includes an aperture 1300 configured to hold a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and an adjacent stored material unit 330.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330.
  • the aperture 1330 is of sufficient dimensions to provide space for a circuitry connector 1310.
  • the circuitry connector 1310 and the corresponding region of the stored material module cap 340 may include apertures configured for a fastener 1430 to attach the circuitry connector 1310 to the stored material module cap 340.
  • the circuitry connector 1310 includes an aperture 1400 positioned to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a central stabilizer 350.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes interior structures configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes an internal aperture of a size and shape to include a shaft 1320 enclosed within the stored material module cap 340. In the confirmation illustrated, the shaft 1320 end projects above the lower edge of the aperture 1330.
  • a central stabilizer 350 reversibly attached to the stored material module cap 340 would apply pressure to the shaft 1320 end, forcing the shaft downward relative to the view in Figure 15.
  • a central stabilizer 350 reversibly attached to the stored material module cap 340 would apply pressure to the shaft 1320 end, pressing against a spring 1450 positioned at the base of the shaft 1320.
  • the shaft 1320 includes side regions of varying widths relative to the diameter of the shaft 1320.
  • the shaft 1320 includes a region with a relatively small width 1510.
  • the shaft 1320 has an equilibrium position relative to the force along the axis of the shaft 1320 from the pressure of an attached spring 1450. At the equilibrium position, the region of small width 1510 is adjacent to the end of an adjacent rod 1410.
  • the side region of the shaft 1320 adjacent to the rod 1410 is of a different and larger diameter than the region of small width 1510.
  • the pressure on the rod 1410 causes motion of a rotating plate 1420.
  • the interior of the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1440 sufficient to allow for motion of the rotating plate 1420.
  • Figure 16 shows the interior structures of a stored material module cap 340, such as illustrated in the preceding Figures, with attached stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • the interior structures of the stored material module cap 340 are configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340.
  • a stored material module cap 340 is illustrated in a top-down cross-section view, which is substantially perpendicular to the view illustrated in Figure 15.
  • Figure 16 shows a stored material module cap 340 including apertures 1360 with edges configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of corresponding tabs 900 on an adjacent stored material unit 330.
  • the center region of attached stabilizer unit 570 A includes circuitry 1110.
  • the embodiment illustrated in Figure 16 corresponds with the embodiment depicted in Figure 11, although the view is rotated 180 degrees in Figure 16 relative to Figure 11.
  • the stored material module cap 340 region adjacent to attached stabilizer unit 570 A may include a slot 1610 configured to provide space for additional circuitry or wiring (not illustrated in Figure 16) connected to the circuitry 1110 in the center region of attached stabilizer unit 570 A.
  • the center region of attached stabilizer unit 570 B includes a retaining unit 1100.
  • the retaining unit 1 100 is configured to transmit force to the end of a rod 1600 attached to the rotating plate 1420 in opposition to the force transmitted via the movement of the rotating plate 1420.
  • force is transmitted from the shaft 1320 to the adjacent rod 1410 and, correspondingly, to the rotating plate 1420.
  • This transmission of force results in the motion of the rotating plate 1420, as illustrated by the double arrows in Figure 16.
  • the movement of the rotating plate 1420 is limited by an attached rotation pin 1620, which is configured to restrict movement of the rotating plate 1420 along its plane, as illustrated by the double arrows in Figure 16.
  • the movement of the rotating plate 1420 is also restricted by the edges of the aperture 1440.
  • the end of the rod 1600 is moved relative to the stabilizer unit 570 B and retaining unit 1100. This results in the position of the stabilizer unit 570 B relative to the stored material module cap 340, as further illustrated in Figure 17.
  • Figure 17 depicts an embodiment of a stored material module cap 340 attached to a stored material unit 330 and an associated stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • a gap 910 in the side of the stored material unit 330 is visible in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 17.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a base region 1350 and a rim region 1340 configured to reversibly mate with the surface of a central stabilizer unit 350 (not depicted in Figure 17).
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330 and a circuitry connector 1310 within the aperture 1330.
  • Another aperture 1440 is located in the interior of the stored material module cap 340.
  • the interior aperture 1440 is of a size and shape to accommodate the rotating plate 1420.
  • the movement of the rotating plate 1420 is limited by an attached rotation pin 1620, which is configured to permit motion of the rotating plate 1420 in a substantially horizontal direction relative to Figure 17.
  • the movement of the rotating plate 1420 is also restricted by the edges of its associated aperture 1440.
  • the rotating plate 1420 has an attached rod 1600.
  • the rod tip 1710 moves through an aperture 1700 formed in the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of the stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • Both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 include apertures of similar size and shape positioned to form the aperture 1700 in the stabilizer unit 570 B when the rods 1210, 1230 are in a specific relative position.
  • the rods 1210, 1230 form the aperture 1700 in the stabilizer unit 570 B when the stabilizer unit 570 B is in its shortest position, i.e. when the rods 1210, 1230 have maximum surface areas in contact.
  • the position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 is limited by pressure from the surface of the retaining unit 1 100. In the
  • the stabilizer unit 570 B is in a restrained position relative to the stored material module cap 340.
  • the position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 prevents the relative movement of the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230.
  • the position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 prevents the telescoping extension of the stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • the embodiment illustrated is operated as follows. Physical pressure of a central stabilizer 350 depresses the end of a shaft 1320 positioned within the stored material module cap 340.
  • the shaft 1320 includes regions of varying diameters, or widths, which provide varying degrees of force against a rod 1410 attached to a rotating plate 1420 within an internal aperture 1440 in the stored material module cap 340.
  • the rotating plate has a second rod 1600 attached, and the rod tip 1710 of the second rod 1600 is positioned to reversibly fit within an aperture 1700 formed in both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of a stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • a retaining unit 1100 located within the inner rod 1230 prevents the rod tip 1710 from substantially entering the interior of the inner rod 1230.
  • the position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 prevents the extension of stabilizer unit 570 B by blocking the relative movement of the inner surface of the outer rod 1210 and the outer surface of the inner rod 1230.
  • the removal of the central stabilizer 350 from an adjacent stored material module cap 340 allows the spring 1450 operably attached to the shaft 1320 to extend the surface of the shaft 1320 above the surface of the stored material module cap 340. This brings a region of the shaft 1320 with a relatively small width 1510 into contact with the surface of a rod 1410 attached to a rotating plate 1420.
  • the rotating plate 1420 then moves so that the rod tip 1710 of a second attached rod 1600 is no longer within the aperture 1700 in the stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of the stabilizer unit 570 B may slide relative to each other, creating a telescoping stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • This mechanism results in the stabilizer unit 570 B held in a fixed position relative to the stored material module cap 340.
  • the function of the herein-described mechanism operates to retain the position and relative length of a stabilizer unit in relation to a stored material module cap when the apparatus is configured to store material.
  • one or more stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B may include internal retaining units 1720 which establish limits on the relative position of the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B.
  • the inner rod 1230 of a stabilizer unit 570 B includes a retaining unit 1720 attached to the interior surface of the inner rod 1230.
  • the retaining unit 1720 includes a projection 1750 configured to fit within a slit-like aperture (not visible in Figure 17) in both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230.
  • the length of the slit-like aperture in both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 establishes the maximum and minimum distance that the inner rod can move relative to the outer rod before the projection 1750 at the end of the slit-like aperture prevents further relative movement of the rods 1210, 1230.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates aspects of a central stabilizer unit 350.
  • a central stabilizer unit 350 includes a base region 560, with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding surface of a stored material module cap 340 (not shown in Figure 18).
  • the base region 560 includes one or more flanges 1850 configured to reversibly mate with the corresponding surface of a stored material module cap 340 and hold the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module cap 340 in a stable position relative to one another.
  • the one or more flanges 1850 are configured to reversibly mate with the rim 1340 and the base 1350 of the attachment region 370 in a stored material module cap 340.
  • the base region 560 includes an aperture 1830 configured to accommodate the attachment region 370 in a stored material module cap 340.
  • the base region 560 may include a circuitry connector 1840 of a type to mate with the
  • circuitry connector 1840 is a USB connector, however other types of connectors may be utilized depending on the embodiment.
  • the circuitry connector 1840 is attached to the base region 560 at a position within the aperture 1830 to reversibly mate with the corresponding circuitry connector 1310 in an attachment region 370 in a stored material module cap 340.
  • the stable positioning of the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module cap 340 (not shown in Figure 18) mates the respective circuitry connectors 1310, 1840.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 includes an exterior wall 1810.
  • the exterior wall 1810 may be fabricated from a material with sufficient durability and strength for the embodiment.
  • the material used to fabricate the exterior wall 1810 should also have low thermal conduction.
  • some types of rigid plastics, or glass-impregnated plastics are suitable materials for an exterior wall 1810 of a central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the outer surface dimensions of a central stabilizer unit 350 are of a size and shape to fit within a connector 1 15.
  • a central stabilizer unit 350 such as described herein should be of a size and shape to substantially fill the interior space of a conduit 125 in a substantially thermally sealed container 100 during use.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 includes an interior region 1800 as defined by the inner surface of the exterior wall 1810 of the central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the interior region 1800 may be substantially filled with a low density, low thermal conduction material, such as low density plastic foam.
  • circuitry connectors and/or circuitry may be within the interior region 1800.
  • wires may be located in the interior region 1800 connecting the circuitry connector 1840 to a display unit (e.g. 520 of Figure 5) on the exterior of the container 100, or on a lid 500 (see Figures 5-8).
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 may include an interior stabilizer 1820.
  • An interior stabilizer 1820 may be included as necessary in some embodiments to further reinforce and stabilize the structure of the central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the interior stabilizer 1820 is a hollow tube made of a material of suitable rigidity and low thermal conductivity, for example a rigid plastic material.
  • the interior stabilizer 1820 may also be attached to a lid 500 (see Figures 5-8).
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 also includes an aperture 550 in the exterior wall 1810.
  • the aperture 550 may include a fastener release handle 1860, configured to control a fastener within the central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the fastener may be configured to stabilize the reversible attachment of the central stabilizer unit 350 to a stored material module cap 340.
  • Figure 19 illustrates an exterior view of a central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the view presented in Figure 19 is similar to the view presented in Figure 18, only at a different angle to present aspects of the features of the central stabilizer unit 350.
  • the exterior of a central stabilizer unit 350 is depicted in a horizontal view.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 shown includes an exterior wall 1810.
  • the internal surface of the exterior wall 1810 substantially defines an interior region 1800.
  • An interior stabilizer 1820 is located within the interior region 1800.
  • the end of the interior stabilizer 1820 is positioned above the edge of the exterior wall 1810. This positioning may be helpful, for example, to attach a lid 500 (see Figures 5-8) to the central stabilizer unit 350.
  • Figure 19 also illustrates an aperture 550 in the exterior wall 1810, and a fastener release handle 1860 located within the aperture 550.
  • the lower end of the central stabilizer unit 350 includes a base region 560.
  • the base region 560 is configured with surfaces of a size and shape to reversibly mate with corresponding surfaces on a stored material module cap 340 (not shown in Figure 19).
  • the base region 560 includes one or more flanges 1850 configured to reversibly mate with the corresponding surface of a stored material module cap 340 and hold the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module cap 340 in a stable position relative to one another.
  • the base region 560 includes an aperture 1830 configured to accommodate a connection region 370 of a stored material module cap 340.
  • the base region also includes a circuitry connector 1840.
  • Figure 20 illustrates a cross-section view of a central stabilizer unit 350 such as those depicted in Figures 18 and 19.
  • the central stabilizer unit 350 includes an exterior wall 1810 and an interior region 1800.
  • An interior stabilizer 1820 is located within the interior region 1800.
  • One end of the interior stabilizer 1820 is attached to the base region 560 of the central stabilizer unit 350, and the other end projects beyond the edge of the exterior wall 1810.
  • the interior stabilizer 1920 may be hollow and include an interior region 2000 configured to accommodate circuitry and circuitry connectors, such as wires.
  • the base region 560 may also include at least one aperture 2010 configured to
  • the lower region of the base region 560 includes a flange 1850 with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding surface of a stored material unit cap 340 (not shown).
  • An aperture 1830 in the lower portion of the base region 560 is configured to accommodate a stored material unit cap 340 (not shown).
  • a circuitry connector 1840 is positioned to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector (e.g. 1310, not shown in Figure 20) on a stored material unit cap 340.
  • Figure 20 illustrates that a central stabilizer unit 350 may include an aperture 550 in the exterior wall 1810.
  • the aperture 550 allows for user access to a fastener release handle 1860 located within the aperture 550.
  • a user may insert one or more fingers into the aperture 550 to operate the fastener release handle 1860.
  • the fastener release handle is connected to a fastener 2020.
  • the fastener 2020 is configured to reversibly provide tension on the surface of an adjacent stored material unit cap 340 (not shown), such as on a surface of a connection region 370 and/or the end of a shaft 1320.
  • a fastener 2020 is adjacent to a fastener stabilizer 2040.
  • the fastener stabilizer 2040 is attached to the internal surface of the exterior wall 1810.
  • a spring 2030 positioned between the adjacent surfaces of the fastener 2020 and the fastener stabilizer 2040 provides force on the fastener surface in a direction away from the adjacent surface of the fastener stabilizer 2040.
  • the force provided by the spring 2030 is in a substantially vertical, or downward, position.
  • the fastener 2020 is thereby moved in contact with the surface of an adjacent stored material unit cap 340 (not shown).
  • the fastener 2020 may be configured to depress a shaft 1320 and thereby to retain the position and relative length of a stabilizer unit 570 in relation to a stored material module cap 340 (not depicted in Figure 20).
  • the fastener 2020 may be configured to provide tension on the surface of an adjacent stored material unit cap 340 and thereby stabilize the relative positions of the central stabilizer unit 350 and the adjacent stored material unit cap 340.
  • a user of the apparatus may put pressure (i.e. from a finger) on the fastener release handle 1860 to reverse the movement of the fastener 2020 relative to the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 surface, releasing the associated tension and decoupling the fastener 2020 from the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 surface.
  • decoupling the fastener 2020 from the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 surface will also release the previously-stabilized relative positions of the central stabilizer unit 350 and the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 (see above Figures and text).
  • Figure 21 illustrates aspects of a stored material module 320 in association with a stored material module cap 340.
  • the assembled apparatus shown in Figure 21 depicts the relative positioning and association of the stored material module 320 and its base 420 in relation to an attached stored material module cap 340.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330 on a surface distal to the surface attached to the stored material module cap 340.
  • the aperture 1330 includes a circuitry connector 1310.
  • the assembly also includes a stabilizer unit 570 A in association with both the stored material module cap 340 and the stored material module 320.
  • Figure 22 depicts an internal cross-section view of the apparatus of Figure 21.
  • Figure 22 illustrates aspects of a stored material module 320 in association with a stored material module cap 340 and two stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a base 420.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a plurality of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I, positioned in a vertical array.
  • the plurality of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I, depicted in Figure 22 are of substantially similar heights relative to the vertical array of the stored material module 320, some embodiments may include stored material units of different heights but substantially similar widths or diameters.
  • the apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340 affixed to the top of the stored material module 320 at the upper edge of stored material unit 330 A.
  • the stored material module cap 340 is attached to the top of the upper edge of the side wall of stored material unit 330 A at the top of the column of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a circuitry connector 1310.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a rotating plate 1420 and an attached rod 1600. As illustrated in Figure 22, the rod 1600 is in contact with a retaining unit 1 100 and is in a configuration to prevent the relative movement of the outer rod and the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • a retaining unit 1720 within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 B and its associated projection 1750 are fixed at a set position within the inner rod.
  • the stabilizer unit 570 A positioned at the opposing side of the apparatus includes a retaining unit 2210 with a projection (not visible) attached at a location within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 A.
  • the projection (not visible) attached within stabilizer unit 570 A provides a maximum and minimum limit for the relative motion of the tubes within stabilizer unit 570 A, as depicted in subsequent Figures.
  • sensors 2200 are also located within the inner rod of stabilizer unit 570 A.
  • sensors may be attached to one or more stabilizer units (e.g. 570 A and 570 B), including on an interior surface of a stabilizer unit.
  • sensors may be attached to other regions of the container.
  • the sensors 2200 may be located as desired in a particular embodiment.
  • the sensors 2200 depicted in Figure 22 are positioned to be at approximately the top, center and bottom regions of a storage region 130 of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 when the apparatus is in use within the container 100.
  • the one or more sensors includes at least one temperature sensor.
  • At least one sensor may include a temperature sensor, such as, for example, chemical sensors, thermometers, bimetallic strips, or thermocouples.
  • the one or more sensors includes at least one sensor of a gaseous pressure within one or more of the at least one storage region, sensor of a mass within one or more of the at least one storage region, sensor of a stored volume within one or more of the at least one storage region, sensor of a temperature within one or more of the at least one storage region, or sensor of an identity of an item within one or more of the at least one storage region.
  • a substantially thermally sealed container 100 and associated apparatus may include a sensor network.
  • One or more sensors attached to a stored material module, a stored material module cap and/or a stabilizer unit may function as part of the network.
  • Figure 22 depicts a circuitry link 2220, such as a wire link, connecting the sensors 2200.
  • the circuitry link 2220 may also be connected to a circuitry connector 1310. Data from the sensors 2200 may be transmitted via the circuitry link 2220 to the exterior of the container 100, for example to a display 520 attached to a lid 500.
  • a sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a physical sensor component such as described in U.S. Patent 6,453,749 to Petrovic et al., titled "Physical sensor component," which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • a sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a pressure sensor such as described in U.S. Patent 5,900,554 to Baba et al., titled “Pressure sensor,” which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • a sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a vertically integrated sensor structure such as described in U.S. Patent 5,600,071 to Sooriakumar et al., titled “Vertically integrated sensor structure and method,” which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • a sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a system for determining a quantity of liquid or fluid within a container, such as described in U.S. Patent 5,138,559 to Kuehl et al., titled “System and method for measuring liquid mass quantity,” U.S. Patent 6.050,598 to Upton, titled “Apparatus for and method of monitoring the mass quantity and density of a fluid in a closed container, and a vehicular air bag system incorporating such apparatus," and U.S. Patent 5,245,869 to Clarke et al., titled “High accuracy mass sensor for monitoring fluid quantity in storage tanks,” which are each herein incorporated by reference.
  • sensors such as a system for determining a quantity of liquid or fluid within a container, such as described in U.S. Patent 5,138,559 to Kuehl et al., titled “System and method for measuring liquid mass quantity," U.S. Patent 6.050,598 to Upton,
  • a sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors of radio frequency identification (“RFID”) tags to identify material within the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region.
  • RFID tags are well known in the art, for example in U.S. Patent 5,444,223 to Blama, titled “Radio frequency identification tag and method,” which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • Figure 23 depicts an apparatus and view similar to that shown in Figure 22.
  • Figure 23 illustrates aspects of a stored material module 320 in association with a stored material module cap 340 and two stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B when the apparatus is in a configuration to allow the relative movement of the outer rod and the inner rod of the stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a base 420.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a plurality of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I, positioned in a vertical array. In the configuration illustrated in Figure 23, the outer rod and the inner rod of the stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B are in an "unlocked"
  • the apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340 affixed to the top of the stored material module 320 at the upper edge of stored material unit 330 A.
  • the stored material module cap 340 is attached to the top of the upper edge of the side wall of stored material unit 330 A at the top of the column of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a circuitry connector 1310.
  • the stored material module cap 340 includes a rotating plate 1420 and an attached rod 1600. As illustrated in Figure 23, the rod 1600 is not in contact with a retaining unit 1100 and is in a
  • a retaining unit 1720 within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 B and its associated projection 1750 are fixed at a set position within the inner rod.
  • the stabilizer unit 570 A positioned at the opposing side of the apparatus includes a retaining unit 2210 with a projection (not visible) attached at a location within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 A.
  • the projection (not visible) attached within stabilizer unit 570 A provides a maximum and minimum limit for the relative motion of the tubes within stabilizer unit 570 A, as depicted in subsequent Figures.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an exterior side view of an apparatus such as those depicted in Figures 21-23.
  • the apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 570 B.
  • the stored material module 320 is in a "closed" position, with minimal spaces between the stored material units 330 A- 330 I.
  • the stored material module 320 also includes a base 420.
  • the apparatus includes a stabilizer unit 570 B positioned along the side of the stored material module 320, with the axis of the stabilizer unit 570 B substantially parallel with the axis of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 570 B includes an outer tube 1210 and an inner tube 1230, which are shaped and positioned to slide in a telescoping fashion relative to each other.
  • the outer tube 1210 includes a slit-like aperture 2400 positioned along the length of the outer edge of the outer tube 1210.
  • the inner tube 1230 includes a projection 1750 of a size and shape to fit within the aperture 2400.
  • the projection 1750 is attached to a retaining unit 1720 ⁇ see, e.g. Figure 17) not depicted in Figure 24.
  • the retaining unit 1720 is attached at a fixed position relative to the inner tube 1230.
  • the configuration of aperture 2400 and projection 1750 creates a minimum and maximum distance for the relative slide positioning of the outer tube 1210 relative to the inner tube 1230.
  • Figure 25 illustrates an exterior side view of an apparatus such as those depicted in Figures 21-24.
  • the apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 570 A.
  • the stored material module 320 is in a "closed" position, with minimal spaces between the stored material units 330 A- 330 I.
  • the stored material module 320 also includes a base 420.
  • the apparatus includes a stabilizer unit 570 A positioned along the side of the stored material module 320, with the axis of the stabilizer unit 570 A substantially parallel with the axis of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 570 A includes an outer tube 1220 and an inner tube 1200, which are shaped and positioned to slide in a telescoping fashion relative to each other.
  • the outer tube 1220 includes a slit-like aperture 2500 positioned along the length of the outer edge of the outer tube 1220.
  • the inner tube 1200 includes a projection 2510 of a size and shape to fit within the aperture 2500.
  • the projection 2510 is attached to a retaining unit 2210 (see, e.g. Figure 22) not depicted in Figure 25.
  • the retaining unit 2210 is attached at a fixed position relative to the inner tube 1200.
  • the configuration of aperture 2500 and projection 2510 creates a minimum and maximum distance for the relative positioning of the outer tube 1220 relative to the inner tube 1200.
  • Figure 26 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus.
  • Figure 26 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600. In this configuration, the apparatus is in a "closed” or “locked” position, with minimal open space surrounding the stored material within the stored material module.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 is attached to the base 420 of the stored material module 320.
  • the central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame, the apertures 2610 formed along the axis of the stored material module 320, or substantially vertically as shown in Figure 26.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620.
  • the protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame.
  • the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figure.
  • Figure 27 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus such as shown in Figure 26.
  • Figure 27 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600. In this configuration, the apparatus is in a "closed” or “locked” position, with minimal access to the stored material within the stored material module. This position may be suitable for periods of storage.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630.
  • the central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620.
  • the protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame.
  • the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figures.
  • the relative movement of the stored material module 320 to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 is limited, as defined by the position of the aperture 2630.
  • Figure 28 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus such as illustrated in Figures 26 and 27.
  • the view of Figure 28 is similar to the view shown in Figure 26.
  • the apparatus is in an "open" position to allow access to material stored in the stored material module 320.
  • Figure 28 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 is attached to the base 420 of the stored material module 320.
  • the central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620.
  • the protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame.
  • the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 have slid relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figure.
  • the relative movement of the stored material module 320 to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 is limited, as defined by the direction and position of the aperture 2630. In Figure 28, the relative movement of the stored material module 320 is sufficient to form an access region 2800.
  • the access region 2800 would allow a user of the apparatus to access material stored in the stored material units within the stored material module 320.
  • each of the stored material units within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 to form access regions 2800 adjacent to each of the stored material units.
  • Figure 29 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus such as illustrated in Figures 26 - 28.
  • the view of Figure 29 is similar to the view shown in Figure 27.
  • the apparatus is in an "open" position to allow access to material stored in the stored material module 320.
  • Figure 29 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350.
  • the stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 is attached to a base 420 of the stored material module 320.
  • the central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame.
  • the stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of at least one aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620.
  • the protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame.
  • the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 have slid relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figure.
  • the relative movement of the stored material module 320 to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 is limited as substantially defined by the shape and position of the aperture 2630. In Figure 29, the relative movement of the stored material module 320 is sufficient to form an access region 2800.
  • the access region 2800 would allow a user of the apparatus to access material stored in the stored material units within the stored material module 320.
  • each of the stored material units within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 to form access regions 2800 adjacent to each of the stored material units.
  • Figure 30 illustrates a base stored material unit 2620 such as shown within an apparatus in Figures 26-29.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 is attached to a stored material module base 420. Similar to the stored material units depicted in other Figures (identified as 330), the base stored material unit 2620 includes a gap region 910 configured to allow visibility and access to stored material within the base stored material unit 2620.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 includes at least one aperture 2630 configured to mate with a projection on a corresponding interior surface of an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600 (see Figures 26-29). The lower edge of the aperture 2630 substantially defines the relative positions of the stored material unit 320 relative to the stabilizer unit 2600.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 includes a side wall 440.
  • At last one flange 3000 projects from the top edge of the side wall 440 of the base stored material unit 2620.
  • the at least one flange 3000 projects in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the surface of the side wall 440.
  • the at least one flange 3000 projects in a substantially perpendicular direction away from the exterior surface of the side wall 440.
  • the flange is configured to reversibly mate with the edges of an aperture 2600 in an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600.
  • the edge of the flange 3000 mating with the edge of an aperture 2600 creates the minimum and maximum size of an access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320.
  • edges of an aperture 2600 connecting with a edge of the flange 3000 substantially defines the vertical height of the access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320 (see Figures 26-29).
  • the contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the minimum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "closed” or “locked” position (see Figures 26 and 27).
  • the contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the maximum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "open” or “unlocked” position (see Figures 28 and 29).
  • Figure 31 illustrates a base stored material unit 2620 such as shown in Figure 30, and illustrated within an apparatus in Figures 26-29.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 is attached to a stored material module base 420.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 includes a gap region 910 configured to allow visibility and access to stored material within the base stored material unit 2620.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 includes at least one aperture 2630 configured to mate with a projection on a corresponding interior surface of an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600 (see Figures 26-29). The lower edge of the aperture 2630 substantially defines the relative potential motion of the stored material unit 320 relative to the stabilizer unit 2600.
  • the base stored material unit 2620 includes a side wall 440.
  • At last one flange 3000 projects from the top edge of the side wall 440 of the base stored material unit 2620.
  • the at least one flange 3000 projects in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the surface of the side wall 440, or horizontally as depicted in Figure 31.
  • the flange is configured to reversibly mate with the edges of an aperture 2600 in an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600.
  • the edge of the flange 3000 mating with the edge of an aperture 2600 creates the boundaries of an access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320.
  • edges of an aperture 2600 connecting with an edge of the flange 3000 substantially defines the vertical height of the access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320 (see Figures 26-29).
  • the contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the minimum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "closed” or “locked” position (see Figures 26 and 27).
  • the contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the maximum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "open” or “unlocked” position (see Figures 28 and 29).
  • Figure 32 depicts a transport stabilizer 3210 illustrated in association with a substantially thermally sealed container 100 in a vertical cross-section view.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 is intended for use in a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 is configured to assume some of the force associated with the connector 115 flexing or moving, particularly in situations when the substantially thermally sealed container 100 is subject to substantial motion.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 may be of use, for example, during shipment or transport of a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 is configured of a size and shape to reversibly mate with the interior of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector.
  • the dimensions of a transport stabilizer 3210 correspond to the dimensions of the interior of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector.
  • Figure 32 depicts a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector.
  • the substantially thermally sealed container 100 includes an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 110, with a gap 120 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 110.
  • the interior surface of the inner wall 110 substantially defines the boundary of a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130.
  • the interior of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 includes a storage structure 200 attached to the interior surface of the inner wall 110.
  • the storage structure includes a plurality of apertures 220, 210 (see Figure 2).
  • a center aperture 210 is positioned in the center of the support structure 200, with the edges of the center aperture 210 approximately
  • one or more support structures 3200 maintain the relative position of the substantially planar storage structure 200 relative to the interior surface of the inner wall 110.
  • Figure 32 depicts a transportation stabilizer unit 3210 in association with the substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • the substantially thermally sealed container 100 and the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 are positioned so that the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 assumes a substantial proportion of the force exerted on the flexible connector 115 by the mass and motion of the inner wall 110 and any contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, including the mass of the storage structure 200.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250 of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in the outer wall 105 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • the lid 3250 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the outer wall 105 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 adjacent to an external opening in the outer wall 105.
  • the lid 3250 may be fabricated of a material with sufficient strength to maintain the flexible connector in a compressed position when the reversible fastening unit is attached to the positioning shaft.
  • the lid 3250 may be fabricated from stainless steel.
  • the lid 3250 includes one or more apertures configured to attach a fastener 3255 to the exterior surface of the container 100.
  • the lid includes a central aperture, the aperture configured in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the plane of the lid 3250.
  • a reversible fastening unit 3225 is attached to the lid 3250 at a position adjacent to the central aperture in the lid 3250.
  • the reversible fastening unit 3225 is positioned to fasten a positioning shaft 3220 within the central aperture in the lid.
  • the reversible fastening unit 3225 is positioned to fasten a positioning shaft 3220 in a fixed position relative to the lid 3250.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector 115 of the
  • substantially defining the tubular structure is operably attached to the lid 3250.
  • the wall 3280 is attached to the lid 3250 at a substantially right angle, or perpendicularly.
  • the wall 3280 includes at least one aperture 3270.
  • the wall 3280 includes two apertures on opposing faces of the wall 3280. The two apertures illustrated are substantially equivalent in the depicted embodiments.
  • the aperture 3270 has an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 32.
  • the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 is positioned on the tubular structure at a location less than a maximum length of the flexible connector 115 from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid 3250.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220.
  • the positioning shaft 3220 has a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid 3250.
  • the positioning shaft 3220 is of a length greater than the thickness of the lid 3250 in combination with the length of the wall 3280 between the surface of the lid 3250 and the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280.
  • the wall 3280 has an interior surface, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region 3285 of the tubular region.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a pivot unit 3230, the pivot unit 3230 operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft 3220 and positioned within the interior region 3285.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a support unit 3260.
  • the support unit 3260 is operably attached to the pivot unit 3230.
  • the support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit within the interior region 3285 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the other direction (substantially horizontally as depicted in Figure 32).
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290.
  • the end region is of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of an aperture 210 in a storage structure 200 within the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290. As illustrated in Figure 32, the base grip 3245 is configured to reversibly mate with an interior surface of the inner wall 110 of the container 100 when the transport stabilizer 3210 is in use.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a tensioning unit for the base grip 3245. The tensioning unit is configured to maintain pressure on the base grip 3245 against an interior wall 110 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the lid 3250, or
  • the tensioning unit may include a tensioning shaft 3240 and a tensioning spring 3295 configured to maintain force along the long axis of the transport stabilizer 3210 to the end of the base grip 3245.
  • the parts of the transport stabilizer 3210 may be fabricated from a variety of materials as suitable for the embodiment. Materials may be selected for cost, density, strength, thermal conduction properties and other attributes as suitable for the
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 is substantially fabricated from metal parts, such as stainless steel, brass or aluminum parts. In some embodiments, part of the transport stabilizer 3210 is fabricated from durable plastic materials, including glass-reinforced plastics. In some embodiments, the positioning shaft 3220 is fabricated from a plastic material of suitable durability. In some embodiments, the base grip 3245 is fabricated from a plastic material with suitable coefficient of friction. For example, the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 0.5 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade. For example, the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 0.7 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees
  • the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than one with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade.
  • the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 1.2 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade.
  • the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 1.5 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade.
  • Figure 33 illustrates aspects of a transport stabilizer 3210 such as shown in Figure 32.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 is in a configuration as it would be implemented within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100, although the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is not illustrated in Figure 33.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 is in a configuration as shown in Figure 32, without the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 illustrated in Figure 32.
  • a transport stabilizer 3210 is of a size and shape to fit a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 of specific dimensions.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250 of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in the outer wall 105 of a
  • the lid 3250 includes one or more apertures 3300 configured to attach a fastener to the exterior surface of the container 100.
  • the lid includes a central aperture, the aperture configured in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the plane of the lid 3250.
  • a reversible fastening unit 3225 is attached to the lid 3250 at a position adjacent to the central aperture in the lid 3250.
  • the reversible fastening unit 3225 is positioned to fasten a positioning shaft 3220 within the central aperture in the lid.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector 115 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • the wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115.
  • the region 3310 is shorter than the minimum length of the flexible connector 115.
  • the end of the region 3310 in the wall 3280 is fixed to the lid 3250.
  • the wall 3280 is attached to the lid 3250 at a substantially right angle, or perpendicularly.
  • the wall 3280 includes at least one aperture 3270.
  • the wall 3280 includes two apertures on opposing faces of the wall 3280. The two apertures illustrated are substantially equivalent in the depicted embodiments.
  • the aperture 3270 has an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 32.
  • the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 is positioned on the tubular structure at a location less than a maximum length of the flexible connector 115 from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid 3250.
  • the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 defines the length of the region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115.
  • the length of the region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115 is defined by the edge of the lid 3250 on one end and the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 at the opposing end.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220.
  • the wall 3280 has an interior surface, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region 3285 of the tubular region.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a pivot unit 3230, the pivot unit 3230 operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft 3220 and positioned within the interior region 3285.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a support unit 3260.
  • the support unit 3260 is operably attached to the pivot unit 3230.
  • the support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit within the interior region 3285 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the other direction (substantially horizontally as depicted in Figures 32 and 33).
  • the support unit 3260 is rotated by the pivot unit 3230 in a position substantially parallel to the plane of the lid 3250.
  • the support unit 3260 is rotated by the pivot unit 3230 in a position substantially parallel to the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270, and fixed in a position against the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 by the positioning shaft 3220 fixed to the fastener 3225 at a suitable location.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290.
  • the end region is of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of an aperture 210 in a storage structure 200 within the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a tensioning unit for the base grip 3245.
  • the tensioning unit may include a tensioning shaft 3240 and a tensioning spring 3295 configured to maintain force along the long axis of the transport stabilizer 3210 to the end of the base grip 3245.
  • Figure 34 depicts an external view of a transport stabilizer 3210 such as illustrated in Figures 32 and 33 in cross-section.
  • Figure 34 illustrates that the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220 and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250.
  • the lid 3250 illustrated includes a plurality of apertures 3300 configured to allow fasteners to attach the lid 3250 to an exterior wall 105 in a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure.
  • the interior surface of the wall 3280 substantially defines an interior region 3285 in the tubular structure.
  • the wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 illustrated includes two apertures 3270 in the wall 3280.
  • the ends of a single support unit 3260 are visible projecting away from the outer edge of the wall 3280 through the two apertures 3270.
  • the center portion of the support unit 3260 (not shown) is within the interior region 3285 in the tubular structure.
  • the aperture 3270 shown includes an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 34.
  • the upper surface of the support unit 3260 is in a fixed position against the upper edge 3273.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
  • Figure 35 illustrates aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit 3210.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 shown in Figure 35 is similar to that depicted in Figure 34.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 is shown in a substantially horizontal exterior view.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220 and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure.
  • the wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 illustrated includes two apertures 3270 in the wall 3280.
  • the ends of a single support unit 3260 are visible projecting away from the outer edge of the wall 3280 through the two apertures 3270.
  • the apertures 3270 depicted include upper edges 3273 and lower edges 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 35.
  • the upper surface of the support unit 3260 is in a fixed position against the upper edges 3273.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
  • Figure 36 illustrates aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit 3210.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 shown in Figure 36 is similar to that depicted in Figure 35.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 is shown in a substantially horizontal exterior view, but facing the side of the view illustrated in Figure 35.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220 and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure.
  • the wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115.
  • the view of the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 shown in Figure 36 includes an aperture 3270 in the wall 3280.
  • the end of a single support unit 3260 is visible projecting away from the outer edge of the wall 3280 through the aperture 3270.
  • the center portion of the support unit 3260 is within the interior region 3285 in the tubular structure.
  • the aperture 3270 depicted includes an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 36.
  • the upper surface of the support unit 3260 is in a fixed position against the upper edge 3273.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
  • FIG. 37 depicts a transportation stabilizer unit 3210 in a vertical cross-section view.
  • a transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250.
  • the lid 3250 includes one or more apertures 3300 configured to accommodate fasteners to attach the lid 3250 to the exterior of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 (not shown in Figure 37).
  • the lid 3250 has an attached fastener 3225 positioned adjacent to a central aperture in the lid 3250.
  • the fastener 3225 is configured to reversibly attach to a positioning shaft 3220.
  • the positioning shaft 3220 has the potential to move through the central aperture in the lid 3250 when not fixed in position by the fastener 3225.
  • the positioning shaft 3220 is connected to a pivot 3230 within the interior 3285 of the transportation stabilizer unit
  • the pivot 3230 is attached to a support unit 3260.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure.
  • the wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115 (not shown in Figure 37).
  • the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 depicted in Figure 37 includes two apertures 3270 in the wall 3280 on opposing faces of the tubular structure.
  • the apertures 3270 each include an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the position illustrated (i.e. a substantially vertical transport stabilizer unit 3210).
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
  • the support unit 3260 is rotated by the pivot 3230 so that the support unit 3260 is positioned substantially parallel to the surface of the wall 3280.
  • the pivot unit 3230 is configured to allow movement of the support unit 3260 approximately 90 degrees along a single axis.
  • the support unit 3260 is in a substantially vertical position corresponding to the vertical position of the main axis of the transport stabilizer 3210.
  • the support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit substantially within one of the apertures 3270.
  • the support unit 3260 and the pivot unit 3230 are configured to position the support unit 3260 substantially within the outer diameter of the tubular structure defined by the wall 3280. In this position, the transport stabilizer unit 3210 is configured to fit within a conduit 125 of a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • the positioning shaft 3220 may be moved by an user of the apparatus to rotate the pivot unit 3230 and thus to move the support unit 3260 in a substantially horizontal position relative to the transport stabilizer 3210 (e.g. as shown in Figure 33).
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 may then be positioned to provide support to a flexible connector 1 15 by a user pulling the positioning shaft 3220 through the central aperture in the lid 3250 to a degree required to for the surface of the support unit 3260 to come into contact with the edge of the flexible connector 1 15 at the inner wall 1 10 of the container 100 (e.g. as illustrated in Figure 32).
  • the positioning shaft 3220 may then be fixed in place with the fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250.
  • FIG 38 illustrates a transport stabilizer unit 3210 with a support unit 3260 rotated to fit within an aperture 3270 in the wall 3280.
  • the transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250.
  • the lid 3250 includes a plurality of apertures 3300 configured to reversibly attach fasteners to the exterior surface of a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • the lid 3250 includes a central aperture and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250.
  • the central aperture provides a space for a positioning rod 3220 to traverse the lid 3250.
  • the positioning rod 3220 is connected to a pivot unit 3230 (not shown) in the interior 3285 of the wall 3280 of the transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • the support unit 3260 is shown in a substantially vertical position corresponding to the vertical position of the main axis of the transport stabilizer 3210.
  • the support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit substantially within the aperture 3270.
  • the aperture 3270 includes an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275.
  • the transport stabilizer unit 3210 is configured to fit within a conduit 125 of a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • the edge of the support unit 3260 is braced against the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the illustration. This position may minimize potential rotation of the support unit 3260 when the transport stabilizer unit 3210 is lowered into a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290.
  • the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
  • Figure 39 illustrates a transport stabilizer unit 3210 like that depicted in Figure 37, in an external view.
  • the view shown in Figure 39 is of a transport stabilizer unit 3210 at a substantially perpendicular view from that depicted in Figure 37.
  • the transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250 attached at a substantially perpendicular angle to the wall 3280 of the transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • the wall 3280 defines a substantially tubular structure of the transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • the lid 3250 includes a central aperture and a fastener 3225 attached to the exterior surface of the lid adjacent to the central aperture.
  • the central aperture is of a size and shape to allow a positioning shaft 3220 to traverse through the lid 3250.
  • the transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115 (not depicted in Figure 39).
  • the wall 3280 includes two apertures 3270 of substantially similar size and shape on opposing faces of the wall 3280. In the view shown in Figure 39, the apertures 3270 are aligned to appear substantially overlapping. The apertures 3270 each have an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275. As shown in Figure 39, the lower end of the positioning rod 3220 is attached to a pivot unit 3230. The pivot unit 3230 is attached to a surface of a support unit 3260. The view of Figure 39 shows the pivot unit 3230 and the support unit 3260 through the overlapping apertures 3270 and the interior region 3285. The face of the support unit 3260 is the opposite face to that shown in Figure 38.
  • one or more sensors may be attached to the transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • a sensor may be positioned, for example, within the interior 3285 of the transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • a transport stabilizer unit 3210 may include an indicator, such as a visual indicator like an LED light emitter.
  • An electronic system may be operably connected to a transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • An electronic system may be operably connected to a sensor and an indicator attached to the transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • a temperature sensor may be attached to the interior surface of transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • a LED light emitting indicator may be attached to the outer surface of the lid 3250.
  • An electronic system, including a controller and wire connections, may be attached to the temperature sensor and the indicator.
  • the electronic system may be configured, for example, to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature within the transport stabilizer unit 3210 which is out of a predetermined temperature range.
  • electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade.
  • electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade.
  • electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 5 degrees Centigrade and 15 degrees Centigrade.
  • electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 20 degrees Centigrade and 30 degrees Centigrade.
  • electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature below approximately 0 degrees Centigrade.
  • electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature above approximately 30 degrees Centigrade.
  • Figure 40 A depicts an external view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • Figure 40 A depicts an angled top down view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • the transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250.
  • a plurality of fasteners 3255 secure the lid 3250 to the exterior wall 105 of the container 100.
  • the lid 3250 includes a central aperture which includes a positioning shaft 3220.
  • the positioning shaft 3220 is fixed in a stable position relative to the lid 3250 by a fastener 3225 attached to the surface of the lid 3250.
  • Figure 40 B depicts an external view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • Figure 40 B depicts vertical side view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210.
  • the transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250. Fasteners 3255 secure the lid 3250 to the exterior wall 105 of the container 100.
  • the lid 3250 includes a central aperture which includes a positioning shaft 3220. The positioning shaft 3220 is fixed in a stable position relative to the lid 3250 by a fastener 3225 attached to the surface of the lid 3250.
  • Figure 41 shown is an example of an apparatus that may serve as a context for the subject matter described herein.
  • Figure 41 illustrates a schematic of an apparatus 4185.
  • the apparatus 4185 includes a structural region 4180, an activation region 4100, a connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100, and a vacuum pump 4130.
  • Each of the structural region 4180, the activation region 4100, the connector 4120, and the vacuum pump 4130 includes an internal, gas- sealed region.
  • the structural region 4180 includes a gas-sealed gap 120 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 110.
  • the entire apparatus 4185 includes an internal, gas-sealed region that is contiguous throughout the regions (e.g. 4100, 4120, 120) of the apparatus 4185.
  • the structural region 4180 is fabricated from a heat-sensitive material.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated entirely or in part from a heat-sensitive material.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated from a combination of materials. Wherein the structural region includes components fabricated from different materials, the material with the lowest heat tolerance will govern the heat-sensitivity of the entire structural region 4180.
  • the structural region 4180 includes an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 110, with a gas-sealed gap 120 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 110.
  • the activation region 4100 is fabricated from a heat-resistant material.
  • the activation region 4100 is entirely fabricated from a heat-resistant material utilizing methods that are also heat-resistant.
  • any epoxy, seals, coatings or similar components within the activation region 4100 structure will be heat-resistant.
  • the activation region includes components fabricated from different materials, the material with the lowest heat tolerance will govern the heat-resistance of the entire activation region 4100.
  • the activation region 4100 includes one or more getters 41 10.
  • the connector 4120 is attached to both the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100.
  • the connector 4120 is operably connected to both the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100 with gas-impermeable connections to form a gas-sealed interior.
  • the connector 4120 may be attached to the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100 using gas-impermeable seals on the respective ends of the connector 4120.
  • the connector 4120 may be welded on to the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100 on the respective ends of the connector 4120 to form a gas-impermeable welding joint.
  • the connector 4120 includes a flexible region 4125.
  • the connector includes a region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 is operably attached to the connector 4120.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 is operably attached to the connector 4120 to allow the vacuum pump 4130 to substantially evacuate the gas within the gas-sealed interior of the apparatus 4185 during utilization of the methods described herein.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 through a tube, duct, conduit or other structure that creates a gas-impermeable seal between the vacuum pump 4130 and the connector 4120.
  • Figure 41 for example, illustrates the vacuum pump 4130 as operably attached to the connector 4120 through a conduit 4170.
  • the apparatus 4185 includes a gas-sealed interior region throughout the structural region 4180, the activation region 4100, and the connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100. Gas-impermeable seals are located in each of the junctions between regions 4180, 4100 of the apparatus 4185 and the connector.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 is also operably attached to the connector 4120 with a gas- impermeable seal. See: Ishimaru , "Bakable aluminum vacuum chamber and bellows with an aluminum flange and metal seal for ultrahigh vacuum," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A15, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1978, pages 1853-1854; and Jhung et al.,
  • the vacuum pump 4130 may be attached to the connector 4120 through a through a structure, such as conduit 4170, that includes a gas-impermeable seal between the vacuum pump 4130 and the connector 4120.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 included in a specific embodiment should have sufficient pumping capacity to substantially evacuate the entirety of the gas-sealed interior region throughout the structural region 4180, the activation region 4100, and the connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100.
  • a valve 4135 may be operably attached to the connector 4120, for example in the region of the connector 4120 between the attached vacuum pump 4130 and conduit 4170 and the attached structural region 4180.
  • a valve 4135 operably attached to the connector 4120 may be configured to inhibit the flow of gas through the connector 4120.
  • a valve 4135 operably attached to the connector 4120 may be configured to block the flow of gas through the connector 4120.
  • a valve 4135 operably attached to the connector 4120 is configured to restrict gas flow through the interior of the connector 4120 at a location along the length of the connector 4120.
  • a valve 4135 may be configured to prevent gas flow between the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180 from the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120, and the interior of the activation region 4100.
  • a valve 4135 may be integrated into the connector 4120 and configured to reversibly prevent the flow of gas within the interior of the connector 4120.
  • a valve 4135 may be configured to isolate gas present in one region of the interior of the apparatus 4185 from another region of the interior of the apparatus 4185.
  • a valve 4135 may be of a number of types, as appropriate to the embodiment and relative to factors such as cost, size, durability, structural strength, outgassing of fabrication materials, and sealing strength.
  • a valve 4135 may be a quarter-turn valve, such as a butterfly style valve.
  • a valve 4135 may be a ball valve. In some embodiments, there may be a plurality of valves. If a valve 4135 includes organic materials, such as nitrile, in "O" rings or other components, the expected outgassing rate of the value components should be understood to effect the time required to achieve a target minimal gas pressure within the apparatus. See: L. de Csernatony, "The properties of Viton "A” elastomers II: the influence of permeation, diffusion and solubility of gases on the gas emission rate from an O-ring used as an atmospheric seal or high vacuum immersed," Vacuum, vol. 16, no.
  • baking the value under vacuum conditions prior to assembly of the apparatus may reduce outgassing from organic materials within the valve. See: D. J. Crawley and L. de Csernatony, "Degassing characteristics of some ⁇ ' ring materials,” Vacuum, vol. 14, 1964, pages 7-9; and S. Rutherford, "The benefits of Viton outgassing," Duniway
  • the structural region 4180 fabricated from a heat- sensitive material includes a device configured for use independently from the remainder of the apparatus.
  • the structural region 4180 may include a storage device (see, e.g. Figure 63) configured for use independently from the remainder of the apparatus.
  • the structural region 4180 may include a storage device (see, e.g. Figure 63) configured for use independently from the connector 4120, the vacuum pump 4130 and the activation region 4100.
  • the structural region 4180 may include a substantially thermally sealed container configured for use independently from the connector 4120, the vacuum pump 4130 and the activation region 4100.
  • the structural region 4180 includes a device configured for detachment from the remainder of the apparatus.
  • the structural region 4180 includes a storage device. In some embodiments, the structural region 4180 includes a storage device configured for temperature-stabilized storage. In some embodiments, the structural region 4180 includes a thermally-insulated device.
  • the structural region 4180 may include a storage device with an interior storage region 130 and an opening 4160 in the structural region 4180 of a suitable size and shape to maintain the thermal storage properties of the interior storage region 130 and to allow for the addition and removal of any stored material within the interior storage region 130.
  • the interior storage region 130 is a substantially thermally sealed storage region containing an access opening 4160 of minimal size and shape to allow insertion and removal of stored material from the interior storage region 130.
  • the storage device may include a container, such as a thermally-stabilized container (see, e.g. Figure 63) designed for storage of medicinal agents within the cold chain.
  • a container such as a thermally-stabilized container (see, e.g. Figure 63) designed for storage of medicinal agents within the cold chain.
  • the structural region 4180 may have an attached gas pressure gauge 4140, configured to detect and signal the gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120. See:
  • the gas pressure gauge 4140 may be operably attached to the gas-sealed gap 120 through a tube or duct 4175. Although not illustrated in Figure 41, in some embodiments a valve may be included in or on the duct 4175 to inhibit the flow of gas through the duct 4175 and to isolate the gas-sealed gap 120 from the gas pressure gauge 4140.
  • the structural region 4180 fabricated from a heat-sensitive material may be fabricated from a variety of heat-sensitive materials, depending on the embodiment.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated to include a single heat-sensitive material.
  • the structural region 4180 fabricated from a heat-sensitive material may be fabricated from a plurality of materials, one or more of which may be heat-sensitive, depending on the embodiment.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from aluminum.
  • the structural region 4180 may include a plurality of materials in a particular embodiment.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated from composite materials.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from metalized plastic, such as polypropylene, PET, nylon or polyethylene completely covered with a layer of metal, such as aluminum, on the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from plastic with a metal coating, or from plastic with a metal liner, on the interior surface of the gas-sealed gap 120 (e.g. as illustrated as surfaces 4190 in Figure 41).
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from a composite material forming a plastic interior and a metal coating covering the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from a composite material forming a plastic interior and a metal liner covering the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas- sealed gap 120.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from materials including carbon fibers.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated from different materials in layers or areas of the structural region 4180, as suitable for a given embodiment.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from a plastic exterior region with a gas-impermeable metal liner covering the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 150 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the structural region 4180 is fabricated entirely or partially from low vapor emitting materials.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated from low vapor-emitting materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, or other metals.
  • the structural region 4180 may be fabricated from low vapor-emitting materials such as glass or appropriate ceramics.
  • the structural region 4180 is fabricated with a layer of low vapor emitting materials on the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the surfaces 4190 may be covered with a layer of stainless steel, aluminum, or other low vapor emitting material.
  • the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120 is cleaned and treated prior to assembly to reduce the sublimation of contaminants (e.g. water, oils, or plastics) from the surfaces 4190 into the gas-sealed gap 120 (see Figure 45 and associated text herein).
  • the specific type of low vapor emitting material used in the fabrication may be selected based on factors such as cost, weight, durability, hardness, strength, and anticipated sublimation from the surface of the particular material at the gas pressures required within the gas-sealed gap 120 and at the expected temperatures of use in a given embodiment.
  • a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 1x10 " torr.
  • a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 5x10 " * torr.
  • a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 1x10 " torr.
  • a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 5x10 ⁇ * torr.
  • a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than 1x10 " 2 torr, for example, less than 5x10 " 3 torr, less than 5x10 -4 torr, less than 5xl0 "5 torr, 5x1 ⁇ "6 torr or 5xl0 "7 torr.
  • materials may sublimate to the extent that their structural integrity is reduced at the low gas pressures required in a specific embodiment, and such factors should be taken into account in the design of the apparatus 4185 and the structural region 4180.
  • R.D. Brown "Outgassing of epoxy resins in vacuum,” Vacuum, vol. 17, no. 9, 1967, pages 505-509
  • J. Santhanam and P. Vijendran "Outgassing rate of reinforced epoxy and its control by different pretreatment methods” Vacuum, vol. 28, no. 8/9, 1978, pages 365-366
  • Gupta et al. "Outgassing from epoxy resins and methods for its reduction," Vacuum, vol. 27, no. 2, 1977, pages 61-63, which are each incorporated by reference.
  • heat-sensitive refers to materials that lose their structural integrity at temperatures below the activation temperature(s) and under the activation condition(s) for the types of getter(s) 4110 used in the apparatus 4185.
  • heat-sensitive is relative to the activation temperature(s) and the pressure conditions used for the specific getters 4110 included in a given embodiment.
  • the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include zirconium- vanadium-iron getters (see US Patent No.
  • the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include St707TM getters with 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron (for example, available from Getter Technologies International Ltd., China). See also Hobson and Chapman, "Pumping of methane by St707 at low temperatures," Journal of Vacuum and Science Technology," vol. A4, no. 3, May/June 1986, pages 300-302, which is incorporated by reference.
  • a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature of
  • a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10 ⁇ 2 torr.
  • a "heat-sensitive material,” as used herein, for use with an embodiment incorporating getters fabricated from a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material, would be a heat-sensitive material that is predicted to lose its structural integrity in a temperature of approximately 700 degrees Centigrade lasting for at least 20 seconds.
  • a "heat-sensitive material,” as used herein, for use with an embodiment incorporating getters fabricated from a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material would lose its structural integrity at a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees
  • the structural region 180 is fabricated from a heat-sensitive material that includes aluminum, or aluminum alloy that loses its structural integrity at temperatures above 250 degrees Centigrade. See: Ishimaru et al., "New all aluminum alloy vacuum system for the TRISTAN e+e- storage accelerator," IEEE
  • structural integrity refers to a structure maintaining its fabricated form in a set of given conditions. Loss of structural integrity, correspondingly, refers to the failure of a structure to maintain its fabricated form in a set of conditions.
  • Heat-sensitive materials refers to materials that lose their structural integrity at temperatures below the activation temperature(s) and under the activation condition(s) for the types of getter(s) 4110 used in an embodiment of an apparatus 4185. Conditions affecting loss of structural integrity may include temperature ranges, such as excessively hot or cold temperatures, and gas pressures, such as minimal gas pressure within an interior region.
  • Conditions affecting loss of structural integrity may include conditions of intended use, such as weight-bearing, erosion, compressive strength, or tensile strength.
  • Loss of structural integrity may be overt or gross, such as when a structure in whole or part melts, deforms, distorts, implodes, or combusts.
  • Loss of structural integrity may include a change the outgassing properties of a material used in fabrication of a structure, for example a plastic material with low outgassing properties may exhibit increased outgassing properties in a set of given conditions, such as temperature or gas pressure.
  • Loss of structural integrity may also be inconspicuous or undetectable to a cursory inspection, such as in the formation of a small hole, surface thinning, alteration of a crystalline or other non-overt structure of a fabricated material, or loss of cohesion at a weld or joint.
  • aluminum and aluminum alloys are "heat-sensitive," as used herein, and may lose their structural integrity in some conditions required to activate some types of getters employed in the specific embodiment.
  • aluminum and aluminum alloys may not completely melt into a liquid form at temperatures above 250 degrees Centigrade, in some instances they will begin to soften and, as such, lose their structural integrity.
  • copper and copper alloys may be considered heat-sensitive materials in some
  • the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180 together substantially define the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 may be primarily defined by the boundaries of the inner wall 10 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180.
  • the gas- sealed gap 120 may be substantially established by the boundaries of the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180. Junctions between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 may be, for example, welds, bonds or seals that substantially isolate the gas-sealed gap 120 from the gas environment external to the structural region 4180.
  • the junctions between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 may include additional material, such as welding agents, solder, brazing material or other sealing materials to establish and maintain the isolation of the gas-sealed gap 120 from the gas environment external to the structural region 4180.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 includes additional material. In some embodiments, the gas-sealed gap 120 includes additional material designed to improve the durability and stability of the structural region 4180.
  • the gas- sealed gap 120 may include structural features, such as one or more flanges, struts, braces, crossbars, or posts that may be configured to maintain the stability of the structural region 180.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 may include internal support structure, such as reinforced regions of the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 includes additional insulating material that improves the thermal properties of the structural region 4180.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 may include multilayer insulation material (MLI).
  • MMI multilayer insulation material
  • MLI multilayer insulation material within the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the layers may not be homogeneous.
  • the plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material may include layers of differing thicknesses, or layers with and without associated spacing elements.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180 is open to the interior of the connector 4120.
  • the structural region 4180 is joined to the connector 4120 in a manner to form a substantially gas sealed space with the interior of the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the structural region 4180 is operably attached to the connector 4120 with a seal sufficient to maintain low gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120, such as through action of the vacuum pump 4130.
  • the structural region 4180 is operably attached to the connector 4120 with a seal sufficient to maintain minimal gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120, such as through action of the vacuum pump 4130.
  • the structural region 4180 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 with a seal sufficient to maintain gas pressure less than or equal to lxl 0 "2 torr within the gas-sealed gap 120 through action of the vacuum pump 4130.
  • some embodiments may include a valve 4135 integral to the connector 4120 and adjacent to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180, wherein the valve 4135 is operably attached in an orientation to isolate the interior of the connector 4120 on the opposing ends of the valve 4135.
  • the apparatus 4185 includes an activation region 4100 fabricated from a heat- resistant material, the activation region 4100 including one or more getters 4110.
  • each region may be independently operably attached to a connector.
  • the term "heat-resistant material” refers to materials that maintain their structural integrity at temperatures and conditions above the activation temperature(s) and within the condition(s) for the types of getter(s) 4110 used in the apparatus 4185.
  • the term “heat-resistant,” as used herein, is relative to the activation temperature(s) and gas pressure conditions used for the specific getters 4110 included in a given embodiment.
  • the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include zirconium-vanadium-iron getters (see US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein).
  • the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include St707TM getters with 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron (for example, available from Getter Technologies International Ltd., China). See: Gunter et al., "Microstructure and bulk reactivity of the nonevaporable getter
  • a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature of approximately 700 degrees Centigrade for at least 20 seconds and then reducing the temperature to between approximately 400 degrees Centigrade and approximately 25 degrees Centigrade. Also as noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between
  • the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include getters fabricated from a titanium-zirconium- vanadium getter material.
  • the structural region 4180 is fabricated from a heat-resistant material that includes stainless steel, or stainless steel alloys.
  • the structural region 4180 is fabricated from a heat-resistant material that includes titanium alloy.
  • Getters of a variety of types may be used in different embodiments.
  • the getters may be fabricated from a variety of getter materials.
  • the getters may be fabricated from non-evaporatable getter material.
  • the selection of getters may depend, for example, on the availability, cost, mass, chemical composition, toxicity and durability of the getter material employed in a given embodiment.
  • the selection of getters may depend, for example, on the activation temperature and conditions for a particular getter material. Some types of getters are activatable at different temperatures and gas pressure conditions for different lengths of time (see, e.g. US Patent No.
  • getters may require gas pressure conditions less than atmospheric pressures, such as near- vacuum conditions, during activation at particular temperatures (see Matolin and Johanek, ibid, and US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., which are each incorporated by reference).
  • the selection of getters may depend, for example, on the operational temperature of a given getter material, such as within ambient temperatures (i.e. substantially between 20 degrees Centigrade and 30 degrees Centigrade), within refrigeration temperatures (i.e. substantially between 2 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade) or within freezing temperatures (for example, substantially between 0 degrees Centigrade and -10 degrees Centigrade, or substantially between -15 degrees Centigrade and -25 degrees Centigrade).
  • Some embodiments may include a single type of getters, for example getters fabricated from substantially the same active getter material. Some embodiments may include a plurality of types of getters fabricated from substantially distinct getter materials. More information regarding types of getters and getter materials suitable for various
  • the activation region 4100 includes walls forming a gas-sealed interior.
  • the gas-sealed interior of the activation region 4100 encloses one or more getters 4110. Also as illustrated in Figure 41, the activation region 4100 includes a gas-sealed interior enclosing one or more getters 4110, wherein the gas-sealed interior of the activation region 4100 is open to the interior of the connector 4120.
  • the gas-sealed interior of the activation region 4100 is configured to maintain a reduced gas pressure as established by the vacuum pump 4130.
  • some embodiments may include a valve (e.g. as valve 4135) located integral to the connector 4120 at a location adjacent to the activation region 4100, the valve configured to isolate the gas pressure within the connector 4120 at the opposite sides of the valve.
  • the apparatus 4185 is configured to establish and maintain a reduced gas pressure environment within the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180.
  • the one or more getters 4110 may include non-evaporatable getter material.
  • the one or more getters 4110 may include zirconium, vanadium and iron.
  • the one or more getters 4110 may include 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron.
  • the one or more getters 4110 may include St707 getters
  • the apparatus 4185 includes a connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100, the connector 4120 including a flexible region 4125 and a region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100.
  • the connector 4120 may be fabricated, for example, from stainless steel or stainless steel alloy.
  • the connector 4120 may be fabricated, for example, from different materials in different regions, as appropriate to the embodiment.
  • the connector 4120 is fabricated from material(s) with low vapor emission on the surface within the connector 4120 as well as sufficient strength, durability, and heat tolerance for a specific embodiment and associated methods (as described further in the section below).
  • Cost, weight, and flexibility may also be factors in the selection of material(s) for fabrication of the connector 4120. See, for example, Nemanic and Setina, "A study of thermal treatment procedures to reduce hydrogen outgassing rate in thin wall stainless steel cells,” Vacuum, vol. 53, 1999, pages 277-280; and Koyatsu et al., “Measurements of outgassing rate from copper and copper alloy chambers,” Vacuum, vol. 47, no. 6-8, 1996, pages 709-711, which are each incorporated by reference.
  • the connector may include a valve 4135 configured to inhibit the flow of gas within the connector 4120. Some embodiments may include more than one valve. As illustrated in Figure 41, a valve 4135 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 at a location between the vacuum pump 4130 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region. The valve 4135 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 at a location between the vacuum pump 4130 and the region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100.
  • the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is adjacent to the activation region 4100 of the apparatus 4185.
  • the flexible region 4125 is configured to allow the activation region 4100 to shift orientation relative to the remainder of the apparatus 4185 (see also Figures 42-44) while retaining the low gas pressure within the connector as established and maintained by the vacuum pump 4130.
  • the flexible region 4125 is configured in an arc forming approximately a right angle, with the result that the activation region 4100 and the structural region 4180 are not in a horizontally linear alignment.
  • the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is configured to flex along the long axis of the connector 4120 (i.e.
  • the change in configuration of the flexible region 4125 results in the change in relative orientation of the activation region 4100 and the structural region 4180, as illustrated in Figures 41-44.
  • the flexible region 4125 may be flexible due to the combination of the material from which it is fabricated as well as the configuration of that material.
  • the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 may be fabricated from stainless steel in a bellows-type configuration.
  • a bellows-type configuration would be fabricated from suitable material and configured to allow for flexibility in the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120.
  • the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 may be fabricated from stainless steel and configured in a corrugated, channeled, grooved or ridged shape to allow for flexibility of the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120.
  • the apparatus 4185 includes a vacuum pump 4130 operably attached to the connector 4120.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to establish a gas pressure within the apparatus 4185 less than the gas pressure in the environment adjacent to the apparatus 4185.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to establish a gas pressure that is substantially evacuated.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to establish a gas pressure that is near vacuum.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to evacuate the gas-sealed gap 120 in the interior of the structural region 4180, the interior of the activation region 4100 and the interior of the connector 4120 to a gas pressure less than or equal to 1 10 " torr.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to evacuate the gas-sealed gap 120 in the interior of the structural region 4180, the interior of the activation region 4100 and the interior of the connector 4120 to a gas pressure less than or equal to 5xl0 "3 torr, 5x10 " torr, 5xl0 ⁇ 5 torr, 5xl0 "6 torr or 5xl0 "7 torr.
  • the vacuum pump 4130 may be a rotary vane style vacuum pump. Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by Pfeiffer Balzers Company, (Pfeiffer Vacuum GmbH, Germany). Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by the Edwards Vacuum Company (US Headquarters
  • Vacuum pumps suitable in some embodiments include Pfeiffer Balzers model TSH060 and Edwards model RV12.
  • the apparatus 4185 includes a region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100.
  • the apparatus 4185 includes a region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the connector 4120 adjacent to the structural region 4180 along the length of the connector 4120.
  • the region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the remainder of the apparatus 4185 may be located in a region of the connector 4120 adjacent to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180.
  • the apparatus 4185 includes a region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment configured to allow for the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180 to maintain its low gas pressure (e.g. less than or equal to lxlO "2 torr) during detachment of the structural region 4180 from the remainder of the apparatus 4185.
  • the region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100 may be, for example, a section of aluminum tubing.
  • the aluminum tube may be, for example, one half inch in diameter and 0.035 inches thick tubing, such as model 3003-O available from Aircraft Spruce and Specialty Company (Corona, CA).
  • the aluminum tube may be, for example, collapsed on itself (i.e. "pinched off') and the edges sealed together using a pinch and crimp
  • an ultrasonic welder may be used to seal and detach the sections of aluminum tubing.
  • the apparatus 4185 is designed and fabricated to allow activated getters 41 10 to be moved within the apparatus 4185 from the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 into the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180.
  • the activated getters 4110 are moved within the apparatus 4185 while the interior spaces of the activation region 4100, the connector 4120 and the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180 include gas pressure lower than that in the environment surrounding the apparatus 4185.
  • the activated getters 41 10 are moved within the apparatus 4185 while the interior spaces of the activation region 4100, the connector 4120 and the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180 are being actively evacuated by the vacuum pump 4130.
  • Figures 42-44 illustrate additional aspects of the apparatus 4185 shown in Figure 41, particularly in relation to the design and fabrication of the apparatus 4185 to allow the activated getters 4110 to move within the interior of the connector 4120 between the activation region 4100 and the gas- sealed gap 120.
  • Figure 42 depicts the apparatus 4185 with the flexible region 4125 of the connector
  • the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is fabricated and configured to allow it to bend into a substantially straight configuration.
  • the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is fabricated and configured to allow it to bend from a substantially right angle (as shown in Figure 41) to a substantially linear configuration (as shown in Figure 42). This motion is depicted by the double-headed arrow in Figure 42.
  • the apparatus 4185 depicted in Figure 42 is oriented with the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 so that the activation region 4100 is directly above the structural region 4180 to allow for the getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C, to fall with the force of gravity (depicted by the single headed arrows) through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • Figure 42 also depicts the motion of the activated getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 4110 C, from the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 (e.g. illustrated with single-headed arrows).
  • the getters 41 10 as shown in Figure 41 are given individual identifiers A, B and C in Figure 42; however, the individual getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C are intended to be equivalent to the group of getters 41 10 shown in Figures 41 , 43, 44 and 45.
  • three individual getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C in a substantially oval shape are shown, the specific number and shape of the getters 41 10 would depend on the specific embodiment.
  • the apparatus 4185 is fabricated from material configured to allow the getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C to move from the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120.
  • the getters 41 10 selected for a particular embodiment should be of a size and shape to move out of the activation region 4100, through the connector 4120, and into the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180. Getters in a form with rounded edges are well-suited for this purpose, but getters of varying shapes may be used in different embodiments. Getters formed as granules may be utilized in some embodiments, however getters formed as granular shapes may become stuck within the connector 4120 and not move easily into the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the entirety of the getters 41 10 should be located within the gas-sealed gap 120 at the end of the method steps. Preferably, no getters 41 10 should remain in the connector 4120 during sealing of the connector 4120.
  • the getter material may reduce the integrity of the sealed region of the connector 4120.
  • the activation region 4100 should be operably attached to the connector 4120 in a manner to minimally impede the movement of the getters 41 10 out of the activation region 4100 and into the internal region within the connector 4120.
  • the attachment should provide a sufficient seal to allow for the establishment and maintenance of a reduced gas pressure (e.g. less than or equal to lxl O "2 torr) within the interior of the apparatus 4185 by the vacuum pump 4130.
  • the activation region 4100 may be attached to the connector 4120 by weld junctions. These weld junctions should be sufficiently smooth and minimally facing on the interior of the apparatus 4185 to provide minimal impedance of the getters 41 10 through the connector 4120.
  • the structural region 4180 should be operably attached to the connector 4120 in a manner to minimally impede the movement of the getters 41 10 out of the interior of the connector 4120 and into the gas- sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180.
  • the interior diameter of the connector 4120 including within its own regions 4125 and 4127, as well as the interior diameter of any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) opening(s) should be suitable for the passage of the getters 4110 through the apparatus 4185 between the activation region 4100 and the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180.
  • the size and shape of any particular getters 4110 used should be less than the interior diameter of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) utilized within the apparatus 4185.
  • the interior of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) incorporated into the apparatus 4185 should include minimal surfaces which may impede the movement of the getters 4110 through the apparatus 4185.
  • the interior of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) should be substantially smooth, without sharp, jutting, or rough edges that may impede the getters 4110.
  • the interior of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) should be substantially free of internal elements, such as struts or braces, which may inhibit getters 4110 travelling through the interior.
  • the interior of the apparatus 4185 should be designed and fabricated to allow for the direct movement of the getters 4110 from the interior of the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180 when the activation region 4100, connector 4120 and the structural region 4180 are appropriately oriented (i.e.
  • the interior of the apparatus 4185 should be designed and fabricated to allow for the direct movement of the getters 4110 from the interior of the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180, such as through the force of gravity, when the activation region 4100, connector 4120 and the structural region 4180 are appropriately positioned (i.e. as depicted in Figure 42).
  • the interior of the apparatus 4185 should be designed and fabricated to allow for the direct movement of the getters 4110 through mechanical transfer from the interior of the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180.
  • Figure 42 depicts the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 in a substantially straight configuration, and with the activation region 4100 of the apparatus 4185 positioned above the structural region 4180.
  • the apparatus is fabricated to allow the flexible region 4125 of the connector to move the relative positioning of the apparatus 4185, as illustrated in the double-headed arrow, between the position shown in Figure 41 and that shown in Figure 42.
  • Figure 42 depicts getter 41 10 A in a position to soon fall through the force of gravity (depicted by downward facing arrows) through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180.
  • Figure 42 also depicts getter 41 10 B positioned within the connector 4120 and moving through the force of gravity through the connector 4120 towards the structural region 4180.
  • Figure 42 depicts getter 4110 C in the junction between the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180 and the connector 4120 adjacent to the outer wall 105.
  • Figure 43 illustrates the apparatus 4185 positioned similarly to that shown in
  • the activated getters 4110 are all positioned within the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180. Although the activated getters 4110 are illustrated in a cluster in Figure 43, they may also be distributed within the gas-sealed gap 120. In some embodiments, structural elements within the gas-sealed gap 120 confine some or all of the activated getters 41 10 into a defined region of the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 may include internal braces or struts that restrict the mobility of the getters 4110 within the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the gas-sealed gap 120 may include wire netting material configured to restrict the movement of the getters 41 10 within the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • Figure 43 depicts that the connector 4120 includes a crimped area 4300 with the opposing faces of the connector brought together to form a gas-impermeable seal.
  • the crimped area 4300 is within the region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the connector 4120.
  • the crimped area 4300 may be positioned adjacent to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180, but with a length 4320 of the connector 4120 between the crimped area 4300 and the surface of the outer wall 105.
  • the structural region 4180 is detached from the remainder of the apparatus 4185.
  • the connector 4120 is separated at the crimped area while maintaining the reduced gas pressure (e.g. less than or equal to l lO "2 torr) within the gas- sealed gap 120.
  • a gas-impermeable seal may be formed in the connector 4120 substantially simultaneously as the separation at the sealed site.
  • the connector 4120 may be sealed and separated with an ultrasonic welding device.
  • Figure 44 shows the apparatus 4185 positioned similarly to that shown in Figure 43, at a later stage (see methods described herein).
  • the activated getters 4110 are within the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the connector 4120 has been separated at the crimped area 4300. The separation of the connector 4120 at the crimped area 4300 results in the detachment of the structural region 4180 from the remainder of the apparatus 4185 (double headed arrows).
  • Figure 44 also shows a sealing agent 4400 applied to the surface of the crimped area 4300 adjacent to the structural region 4180.
  • the sealing agent 4400 is positioned and applied to ensure that the crimped area 4300 adjacent to the structural region 4180 maintains its structural integrity and does not include any holes or spaces that would permit gas from the environment external to the outer wall 105 to enter the gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the sealing agent 4400 if included in a particular embodiment, adheres to the surface of the separated crimped area 4300 to form a gas-tight seal on the interior of the connector length 4310 adjacent to the outer wall 105.
  • the sealing agent may include epoxy material.
  • Figure 45 illustrates an optional method of preparation of the metallic system components of the apparatus prior to assembly of the apparatus.
  • a substantially reduced gas pressure e.g. less than or equal to 1x10 " torr
  • the metallic surfaces of the components of the apparatus may optionally be cleaned and prepared to minimize outgassing from surface contaminants on the metallic surfaces.
  • Figure 45 depicts, as an example, a flowchart of a method that may be used in some embodiments to prepare the metallic system components of the apparatus as described herein prior to assembly of the apparatus. See also Y.T.
  • Figure 45 illustrates a flowchart of a method to prepare metallic system
  • Block 4510 depicts cleaning components with denatured alcohol. This step may reduce grease, oil and similar contaminants on the surfaces of the components.
  • the flowchart also includes optional
  • Block 4530 illustrates washing the components with detergents and water.
  • a detergent washing step may reduce the presence of fine contaminants such as hydrocarbon oils and solvents, which may contribute to undesirable outgassing within the finished apparatus. See: R. Elsey, "Outgassing of vacuum materials-II," Vacuum, vol. 25, 1975, pp. 347-361, which is incorporated by reference.
  • hand dishwashing detergent ⁇ i.e. Dawn Advanced Power Dish Soap, manufactured by the Procter & Gamble Company
  • the detergent Alconox® may be used to clean the components in tap water (available from Alconox Inc., White Plains NY).
  • Optional block 4540 depicts rinsing the washed components with deionized water (DI water).
  • Optional block 4550 illustrates blowing the components dry with dehumidified nitrogen gas, or a comparable inert gas. This step may reduce non-visible water molecules adhering to the surface of the components. See, for example: A. Berman, "Water vapor in vacuum systems,” Vacuum, vol. 47, no. 4, 1996, pages 327-332; J.-R. Chen et al., "Outgassing behavior of A6063-EX aluminum alloy and SUS 304 stainless steel," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A5, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1987, pages 3422-3424; Y. C.
  • Block 560 depicts baking the components under vacuum conditions. See, for example: H. Ishimaru, “Fast pump-down aluminum ultrahigh vacuum system,” Journal of Vacuum Science & Technology A: Vacuum, Surfaces, and Films, vol. 10, May 1992, p. 547, which is incorporated by reference.
  • aluminum components or composite components may be baked at 150 degrees Centigrade for 60-70 hours in a chamber with a gas pressure of approximately lxlO "2 torr. See also: Chen et al., "An aluminum vacuum chamber for the bending magnet of the SRRC synchrotron light source," Vacuum, vol. 41, nos. 7-9, 1990, pages 2079-2081; Burns et al., "Outgassing test for non-metallic materials associated with sensitive optical surfaces in a space environment," Materials and Processes Laboaratory, George C. Marshall Space Flight Center, 1987; and Chen et al., "Thermal outgassing from aluminum alloy vacuum chambers," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A3, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1985, pages 2188-2191, which are each incorporated by reference. In addition or alternately, baking components in the presence of inert gas has been
  • the components are baked in the presence of inert gas, such as nitrogen.
  • the components of the apparatus are assembled.
  • a helium leak check may be performed to ensure that seals and/or junctions are sufficient to maintain reduced gas pressure conditions within the interior of the apparatus.
  • the apparatus may be purged with dehydrated nitrogen gas during the check of the final assembly. See: K. Yamazaki, et al., "High-speed pumping to UHV,” Vacuum, vol. 84, Dec. 2009, pp. 756-759; and Chun et al., "outgassing rate characteristic of a stainless-steel extreme high vacuum system," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A14, no. 4, July/August 1996, pages 2636-2640; which are incorporated by reference.
  • Figure 46 illustrates a flowchart of a method utilizing an apparatus such as those described herein (as above).
  • Figure 46 depicts a method 4600, including steps depicted as blocks 4610, 4620, 4630, 4640 and 4650.
  • Block 4610 illustrates establishing vacuum within a gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions.
  • vacuum refers to the gas pressure in substantially evacuated space.
  • vacuum refers to a low gas pressure relative to the gas pressure in the environment external to the apparatus. Different levels of vacuum may be suitable in different embodiments.
  • vacuum refers to substantially evacuated space that may have a gas pressure less than lxlO "2 torr, less than 5xl0 "3 torr, less than 5x10 ⁇ torr, less than 5xl0 "5 torr, less than 5xl0 “6 torr or less than 5x10 ⁇ 7 torr.
  • gas pressures may be desirable depending on the specific embodiment, including factors such as durability, cost, components, fabrication, structure and expected duration of use.
  • the vacuum may be established within an interior of the at least one activation region, within an interior of the at least one structural region, and within an interior of the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • the vacuum may be established utilizing a vacuum pump operably connected to the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by Pfeiffer Balzers Company, (Pfeiffer Vacuum GmbH, Germany).
  • Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by the Edwards Vacuum Company (US Headquarters Tewksbury MA; Global Headquarters United Kingdom).
  • Vacuum pumps suitable in some embodiments include Pfeiffer Balzers model TSH060 and Edwards model RV12. See also Ishimaru and Hismatsu, "Turbomolecular pump with an ultimate pressure of 10 " Torr," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A 12, no.
  • heating the apparatus components while establishing the vacuum may reduce the time required to establish vacuum, for example by increasing the rate of evaporation of traces of water on the surfaces of the interior of the apparatus.
  • the apparatus may be placed within an oven of suitable size and operating conditions.
  • Suitable heat tape for some embodiments includes, for example, insulated heat tapes and may include fiberglass heavy insulated heat tapes (e.g. model AIH-0510100 from HTS/Amptek Corporation, Stafford Texas).
  • the gas-sealed apparatus may be heated, for example, in temperature increments to ensure even heating, to allow time to monitor the apparatus, to allow for maintenance of the low gas pressure within the interior, and to ensure that the apparatus does not over-heat.
  • the apparatus may be heated, as an example, to approximately 130-150 degrees Centigrade in approximately 50 degree increments during establishment of vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • the apparatus may be heated, as an example, to approximately 180-220 degrees Centigrade in approximately 20 degree increments during establishment of vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • establishing the vacuum may take several days, even with heating of the apparatus components assisting in a reduction of the time required. For example, establishing the vacuum may take a time on the order of 5-7 days of continual action by the vacuum pump and heating of the apparatus components. Even after suitable cleaning and other preparation, outgassing of volatile materials from the internal surfaces of the gas-sealed apparatus is expected, and will increase the time required to reach a suitably low gas pressure for a given
  • heating the gas-sealed apparatus will increase outgassing of material from the internal surfaces of the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • Suitable gas pressure within the interior of the apparatus is established when a gas pressure gauge operably attached to the apparatus displays a reading in the range appropriate for the embodiment (e.g. a gas pressure less than 1x10 2 torr, less than 5xl0 "3 torr, less than 5x10 ⁇ * torr, less than 5xl 0 "5 torr, less than 5xl0 "6 torr or less than 5xl0 "7 torr).
  • the method flowchart depicted in Figure 46 also includes block 4620, showing heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus.
  • the activation temperature for a particular embodiment is dependent on the specific getters included in that embodiment.
  • Heating of an activation region includes heating the getters within the activation region to a suitable temperature.
  • Getters suitable for some embodiments include zirconium- vanadium-iron getters, as described in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein. As noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid.,
  • a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature of approximately 700 degrees Centigrade for at least 20 seconds and then reducing the temperature to between approximately 400 degrees Centigrade and approximately 25 degrees Centigrade.
  • a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10 "2 torr.
  • the activation region may be heated to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes.
  • the activation region may be heated in intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade.
  • Heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus may include heating the activation region independently from the remainder of the apparatus while the vacuum pump attached to the apparatus is operating.
  • the activation region may be heated with a heat source external to the apparatus.
  • the activation region exclusively to the remainder of the apparatus may be placed within an oven of suitable size, shape and properties.
  • the exterior surfaces of the activation region may be wrapped with heat tape.
  • Suitable heat tape for some embodiments includes, for example, insulated heat tapes and may include fiberglass heavy insulated heat tapes ⁇ e.g. model ⁇ -0510100 from HTS/Amptek Corporation, Stafford Texas).
  • Heating the activation region may include heating with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • a specific section of heat tape may be wrapped around the outer surface of the activation region and set to a temperature higher than any temperature setting for the remainder of the apparatus.
  • the method flowchart depicted in Figure 46 also includes block 4630, illustrating allowing the at least one activation region and the getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material.
  • the activation region may be cooled through radiative heat loss.
  • the heat tape may be removed and the activation region allowed to cool by heat radiation into the external environment.
  • the activation region may be allowed to cool to a specific temperature, or temperature range, such as approximately 100 degrees Centigrade, approximately 150 degrees Centigrade, approximately 200 degrees Centigrade, approximately 250 degrees Centigrade, approximately 300 degrees Centigrade, or approximately 350 degrees Centigrade.
  • the method flowchart also includes block 4640, depicting transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • the cooled getters may be transferred through the gas-sealed apparatus by gravitational transfer, such as through reorienting the relative positions of the activation region and the structural region and allowing the getters to move through gravity through the apparatus (see Figures 41-44 and associated text, above).
  • the cooled getters may be transferred through the apparatus through a mechanical transfer, such as with an internal trowel, scoop, ladle, or fork configured to transfer the cooled getters within the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • the flowchart depicted in Figure 46 also includes block 4650, illustrating separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
  • the connector may be separated at a region adjacent to the surface of the outer wall of the structural region by crimping the connector sufficiently to establish a gas-tight seal, and separating the connector into two parts at the crimped region.
  • An ultrasonic welder may be utilized to separate the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
  • a specialized crimping device may be used to separate the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
  • Figure 47 illustrates additional aspects of the method illustrated in the flowchart of Figure 46.
  • Figure 47 shows block 4610, which illustrates establishing vacuum within a gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat- resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions.
  • Optional blocks 4700, 4710 and 4720 illustrate optional aspects of the method.
  • Block 4700 illustrates establishing vacuum within an interior of the at least one activation region, within an interior of the at least one structural region, and within an interior of the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • vacuum may be established using a vacuum pump operably attached to the apparatus and the methods described herein.
  • Block 4710 depicts utilizing a vacuum pump operably connected to the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • a vacuum pump operably connected to the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • some embodiments may utilize a rotary vane style vacuum pump.
  • Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by Pfeiffer Balzers Company, (Pfeiffer Vacuum GmbH, Germany).
  • Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by the Edwards Vacuum Company (US Headquarters Tewksbury MA; Global Headquarters United Kingdom).
  • Vacuum pumps suitable in some embodiments include Pfeiffer Balzers model TSH060 and Edwards model RV12.
  • Figure 7 includes block 4720, depicting establishing gas pressure less than or equal to lxlO "2 torr within the gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat- sensitive material, and a connector between the regions.
  • the gas pressure established within the gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat- sensitive material, and a connector between the regions may be less than 5x10 "3 torr, less than 5X10 "4 torr, less than 5xl0 "5 torr, less than 5x1 ⁇ "6 torr or less than 5xl0 "7 torr.
  • FIG. 48 illustrates additional aspects of the method flowchart depicted in Figure 47.
  • Flowchart block 4620 depicts heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus.
  • Flowchart block 4620 may include one or more of optional blocks 4800 and 4810.
  • Block 4800 depicts heating the activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes.
  • the activation region should be heated to a temperature and for a duration sufficient to activate the particular type of getters within the activation region given the conditions of a particular embodiment, such as the size, shape and position of the getters as well as the gas pressure within the activation region.
  • the activation temperature and activation conditions (e.g. time and gas pressure) of the particular type of getters used in a particular embodiment is the basis for determining the heating temperature and time of the activation region.
  • Block 4810 illustrates heating the activation region with a heat source external to the apparatus.
  • the activation region may be placed within an oven of suitable size, shape and operating parameters.
  • the outer surface of the activation region may be heated with a heat tape wrapped around the activation region of the apparatus.
  • Suitable heat tape for some embodiments includes, for example, insulated heat tapes and may include fiberglass heavy insulated heat tapes (e.g. model AIH-0510100 from HTS/Amptek Corporation, Stafford Texas).
  • Heating the activation region may include heating with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • FIG. 49 illustrates aspects of the method flowchart as illustrated in Figure 46.
  • Flowchart block 4620 depicts heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus.
  • Flowchart block 4620 may include one or more of optional blocks 4900 and 4910.
  • Block 4900 depicts heating the activation region with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus.
  • heat tape may be wrapped around the exterior surface of the activation region and not other regions of the apparatus, and the heat tape specifically controlled independently of any other controls.
  • Block 4910 illustrates heating the at least one activation region in intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. For example, if the at least one activation region is initially at a temperature of approximately 25 degrees Centigrade, the at least one activation region may be heated to approximately 75 degrees Centigrade, then 125 degrees Centigrade, then 175 degrees Centigrade, and so on until the final desired activation temperature is reached.
  • Block 4630 shows allowing the at least one activation region and the getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material.
  • Flowchart block 4630 may include one or more of optional blocks 5000 and 5010.
  • Block 5000 illustrates allowing the at least one activation region to cool to an ambient temperature through radiative heat loss. For example, any heat tape may be turned off, allowed to cool, and then removed from the exterior surface of an activation region. The activation region then is allowed to cool to either a predetermined temperature or an ambient temperature through radiative heat loss.
  • Block 5010 depicts allowing the at least one activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade. For example, approximately 250 degrees Centigrade may be a temperature compatible with structural stability of a heat-sensitive material such as aluminum.
  • Figure 51 shows aspects of the method flowchart illustrated in Figure 46.
  • Block 4640 shows transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus.
  • Block 4640 may include one or more of optional blocks 5100 and 5110.
  • Block 5100 depicts bending the connector to allow the cooled one or more getters to move from the cooled at least one activation region to the at least one structural region through the connector.
  • the method may include bending a flexible region of the connector to place the activation region in a position substantially above the structural region, allowing the getters to fall through the force of gravity from the one activation region to the structural region through the connector.
  • the vacuum pump may be operational during the getter transfer to maintain the established vacuum within the apparatus.
  • Block 5110 illustrates bending the connector to alter the relative positioning of the cooled at least one activation region to the at least one structural region in relation to the connector.
  • the method may include bending the connector to alter the relative position of the at least one activation region relative to the structural region.
  • Block 4640 shows transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus.
  • Block 4640 may include optional block 5200.
  • Block 5200 shows transferring the cooled one or more getters into a gas-sealed gap between an inner wall and an outer wall of the structural region.
  • the activation region may be positioned so that the connector is in a substantially linear configuration, and oriented so that the opening of the activation region attached to the connector is approximately directly above an opening into the gas-sealed gap that is operably attached to the connector.
  • Block 650 shows separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
  • the connector may be crimped and separated at a region adjacent to the outer surface of the structural region.
  • Block 4650 may include optional block 5210.
  • Block 5210 depicts sealing the connector at a position adjacent to the structural region.
  • the connector may include a region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region in a location adjacent to the structural region.
  • the region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region need not be directly next to the exterior surface of the structural region; as shown in Figures 41-44, there may be a section of the connector between the exterior surface of the structural region and the position where the connector is sealed and detached.
  • Block 4650 shows separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
  • the connector may be welded together and then disconnected using an ultrasonic welding device.
  • Block 4650 may include optional block 5300.
  • Block 5300 depicts crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the crimp location.
  • an ultrasonic welder may be used to weld to opposite faces of the connector together, and then to break the connector at the weld joint.
  • a crimping device specialized to crimp the connector sufficiently to form a gas-impermeable seal may be used, and the connector then broken at the seal location.
  • Block 5310 depicts adding sealing material to a surface of the separated connector adjacent to the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. Sealing material, such as epoxy material, may be added to the surface of the separated connector, such as over the crimp or weld site. See also Figure 44 and associated text.
  • Figure 54 depicts aspects of the method flowchart shown in Figure 46. Figure 54 illustrates that the flowchart may include one or more of optional blocks 5400 and 5410.
  • Block 5400 may include block 5410.
  • Block 5400 shows heating the structural region to a preset temperature for a predetermined time after establishing vacuum within the structural region and before heating the activation region.
  • the structural region may be heated to approximately 150 degrees to facilitate establishment of a durable vacuum within the apparatus.
  • the structural region may be heated with heat tape placed on the external surface of the structural region.
  • the structural region may be placed on a heat plate.
  • Block 5410 depicts heating the structural region to the preset temperature by intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. For example, if starting at an ambient temperature of approximately 25 degrees Centigrade, the structural region may be heated to approximately 75 degrees Centigrade, then to approximately 125 degrees Centigrade, then to approximately 175 degrees Centigrade, then to approximately 225 degrees Centigrade, and so on until the desired temperature is reached.
  • the heating series may be held at any or all of the series of temperatures for a given time period, for example for 10 minutes, 1 hour, 5 hours, or 1 day.
  • Figure 55 illustrates aspects of the method flowchart shown in Figure 46.
  • Figure 55 illustrates that the flowchart may include optional block 5500.
  • Block 5500 depicts heating the structural region to a preset temperature prior to transferring the cooled one or more getters; and maintaining the preset temperature while separating the connector.
  • the structural region may be placed on a hot plate heated to a preset temperature before the transfer of the cooled one or more getters, and the structural region maintained on the hot plate set to a constant temperature during transfer of the getters.
  • the structural region may be wrapped with heat tape and heated to a preset temperature prior to the transfer of the getters, and the temperature maintained during the transfer.
  • the structural region may be heated to a predetermined temperature between approximately 125 degrees Centigrade and approximately 175 degrees Centigrade, and this temperature maintained during the getter transfer.
  • the structural region may be heated to a predetermined temperature between approximately 175 degrees Centigrade and approximately 225 degrees Centigrade, and this temperature maintained during the getter transfer.
  • the structural region may be heated to a predetermined temperature between approximately 200 degrees Centigrade and approximately 250 degrees Centigrade, and this temperature maintained during the getter transfer.
  • Block 5600 of the flowchart illustrates that the method is of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device.
  • Block 5600 includes blocks 5610, 5620, 5630, 5640, 5650, 5660, 5670, 5680 and 5690.
  • Block 5610 illustrates assembling the components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap.
  • Block 5620 depicts attaching the storage device to an apparatus, the apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the apparatus.
  • Block 5630 shows activating the vacuum pump to establish gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Block 5640 illustrates heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time.
  • Block 5650 shows heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Block 5660 illustrates allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature.
  • Block 5670 shows flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear.
  • Block 5680 depicts allowing the getters to fall along the connector interior into the gas-sealed gap in the storage device, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Block 5690 shows separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas- sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Block 5620 depicts attaching the storage device to an apparatus, the apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the apparatus.
  • the assembled device may be attached to an apparatus with a substantially gas-impermeable junction to form an apparatus such as illustrated in Figures 41-44.
  • the interior of the apparatus includes a gas-sealed space within the getter activation region, the connector and the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • the gas-sealed gasp within a storage device may be connected to an apparatus through a conduit, for example with one or more ducts as illustrated as 4175 in Figure 63.
  • Figure 57 illustrates aspects of the flowchart depicted in Figure 56.
  • Figure 57 illustrates that block 5610 may include optional block 5700.
  • Block 5610 illustrates assembling the components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap.
  • the components of a storage device may be assembled into a device as illustrated in Figures 41-44 and in Figure 63.
  • block 5610 may include optional block 5700.
  • Block 5700 depicts assembling the components of the storage device to form a gas-sealed gap within the storage device.
  • Figure 57 shows further aspects of the flowchart depicted in Figure 56.
  • Figure 17 illustrates that block 5630 may include optional block 5710.
  • Block 5630 depicts activating the vacuum pump to establish gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • one or more vacuum pumps may be utilized to establish substantially evacuated space within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • one or more vacuum pumps may be utilized to establish an extremely low gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Block 5710 illustrates establishing a gas pressure of less than or equal to 1x10 " torr.
  • one or more vacuum pumps may be utilized to establish a gas pressure less than 5 10 " torr, less than SxlO ⁇ torr, less than 5xl0 "5 torr, less than S lO ⁇ torr or less than 5xlO "7 torr within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Figure 58 illustrates additional aspects of the flowchart shown in Figure 56.
  • Block 5640 illustrates heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a
  • the storage device may be heated with an external heat source to a predetermined temperature for a length of time estimated to be required to evaporate any surface contaminants on the interior surface of the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • the storage device may be heated with an external heat source to a predetermined temperature for a length of time estimated to be required to dehydrate the interior surface of the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • the heating temperature and time will depend on the specific embodiment, for example the type of material used to fabricate the storage device, the prior surface treatment of the material (for example as described in relation to Figure 45, text above), and the desired final gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Block 5640 may include one or more of optional blocks 5800 and 5810.
  • Block 5800 illustrates heating the storage device in increments of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade.
  • the controller for the heat tape may be set to warm the heat tape in approximately 50 degree Centigrade increments. Warming the storage device in increments may be desirable, for example, to avoid overheating, or to ensure that the storage device is heated evenly throughout the surface, or to confirm that the junctions between the storage device and the connector are retaining a gas seal during the process. Warming the storage device in increments may be desirable, for example, to allow for time to check the gas pressure internal to the apparatus during the process.
  • Block 5810 illustrates heating the storage device to between approximately 130 degrees Centigrade and approximately 150 degrees Centigrade for at least 100 hours.
  • the specific time and temperature will depend on the embodiment, and the time required to reduce the internal gas pressure of the apparatus to a target gas pressure. For example, the specific time and temperature will depend on factors including the material used to fabricate the storage device, any pretreatment of the components, the size and shape of the gas-sealed gap, the size and shape of the interior of the apparatus, and the pumping capacity of the vacuum pump in a given embodiment.
  • the storage device may be heated to between approximately 150 degrees Centigrade and approximately 200 degrees Centigrade. In some embodiments, the storage device may be heated for approximately 75 hours. In some embodiments, the storage device may be heated for approximately 100 hours, or approximately 125 hours.
  • Figure 59 shows additional aspects of the flowchart shown in Figure 56.
  • the 5650 illustrates heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • the activation temperature and time required in a specific embodiment depends on the getters used. For example, as noted in US Patent No.
  • a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10 "2 torr. Also relevant is the material used in the fabrication of the activation region including the getters, clearly a user of the apparatus and method would not heat the getter activation region to a temperature predicted to compromise the structural integrity of the activation region.
  • a user of the apparatus and method would not heat the getter activation region to a temperature wherein the getter activation region could not maintain its shape and structure in response to the internal force of the low gas pressure.
  • a user of the apparatus and method would not heat the getter activation region to a temperature wherein the getter activation region would be predicted to melt, implode or deform based on the material and fabrication of the structure.
  • Block 59 illustrates that the flowchart of Figure 56 may also include one or more of optional blocks 5900 and 5910 within block 5650.
  • Block 5900 depicts heating the activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes.
  • the getter material may be activated at approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for a duration of at least 45 minutes (see US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein).
  • Block 5910 illustrates heating the getter activation region with a heat source external to the getter activation region.
  • the getter activation region may be wrapped with heat tape on the external surface of the getter activation region as a heat source.
  • the getter activation region may be placed in direct contact with a hot plate or similar heating surface as a heat source.
  • Figure 60 depicts aspects of the method flowchart shown in Figure 56.
  • the flowchart shown in Figure 60 depicts the method of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device 5600 as illustrated in Figure 56, as well as flowchart blocks 5610, 5620, 5630, 5640, 5650, 5660, 5670, 5680, 5690 and optional blocks 6000 and 6010.
  • the flowchart shown in Figure 60 includes block 5660, showing allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature. For example, after heating (as illustrated in block 5650), the getter activation region and the one or more getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with further steps of the method.
  • the getter activation region and the one or more getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with allowing the getters to fall along the connector interior into the gap in the storage device (as shown in block 5680).
  • the getter activation region and the getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with the structural integrity of the connector).
  • the getter activation region and the getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with the structural integrity of the storage device.
  • the predetermined temperature(s) will depend on factors including the material used to fabricate the regions of the apparatus, as well as safe and desirable handling temperatures for the apparatus in a given embodiment.
  • Temperatures of the activation region may be determined through means suitable to a given embodiment, such as estimates based on the external surface conditions of the activation region. In some embodiments, there may be an embedded temperature sensor within the activation region.
  • Figure 60 illustrates that the flowchart depicted in Figure 56 may include optional block 6000 within block 5660.
  • Block 6000 shows allowing the getter activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade through radiative heat loss.
  • the heat tape may be entirely or partially removed and the activation region allowed to cool through radiative heat loss from the external surface.
  • the activation region may be removed from the heat source and allowed to cool.
  • the temperature of the surface of the activation region may be used as an approximation for the temperature of the entire activation region and its contents (e.g. the one or more getters).
  • the flowchart includes block 5670, which depicts flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear.
  • the shape of the connector may be altered to allow the getter activation region to be moved to a position substantially above an opening in the gap in the storage device and for the connector to be substantially straight.
  • the connector may be flexed into a position that allows for the activated getters to fall from an opening in the getter activation region through the interior of the connector and into the gap in the storage device.
  • block 5 may include optional block 6010.
  • Block 6010 shows flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear by flexing a region of the connector adjacent to the getter activation region.
  • the connector may include a flexible region, such as a region in a corrugated or bellows-type configuration, adjacent to the activation region. The flexible portion of the connector adjacent to the activation region may be flexed to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is substantially above the storage device.
  • Figure 61 illustrates aspects of the flowchart depicted in Figure 56.
  • block 5690 depicting separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • the connector may be sealed at a location adjacent to the storage device and then two sections of the connector separated either at the seal site or adjacent to the seal site in a manner to maintain the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • Block 5690 of the flowchart may include one or more of optional blocks 6100 and 61 10.
  • Block 6100 depicts physically crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the crimp location.
  • the connector may be flattened at a location adjacent to the storage device by physically pressing together the sides of the connector with a crimping device sufficient to create a gas-sealed region in the connector at the crimp site. After the connector is sufficiently crimped to create a gas-tight seal in the connector, the connector may be physically broken into two pieces at the crimp location. If desired, an additional sealing or stabilization material (e.g. epoxy) may be added to the external surface of the connector to stabilize the sealed surface (see also item 4400 in Figure 44).
  • Block 61 10 depicts separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure utilizing an ultrasonic welding device.
  • Figure 62 depicts further aspects of the flowchart as shown in Figure 56.
  • Figure 62 shows that block 5600, the method of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device, may include one or more of optional blocks 6200, 6210, 6220 and 6230.
  • Block 6200 illustrates heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined time after establishing gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gap of the storage device. For example, it may be desirable in some embodiments to dehydrate the interior surfaces of the gas-sealed gap in the storage device (e.g. item 4190 in Figure 41) through heating prior to the connector being sealed.
  • Block 6210 illustrates monitoring gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
  • a gas pressure gauge for example, illustrates two ducts 4175 attached to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180 including a storage device. A gas pressure gauge could be attached to one of the ducts 4175 if desired in a specific embodiment.
  • Block 6220 shows monitoring gas pressure within the connector.
  • a gas pressure gauge may be operably attached to the connector through a duct or a similar structure and used to monitor gas pressure within the connector during one or more steps of the method.
  • Block 6230 shows adding sealing material to the surface of the separated connector adjacent to the storage device. For example, an epoxy compound may be added to the surface of the separated connector adjacent to the storage device (see also item 4400 in Figure 44).
  • Figure 63 depicts a cross-section view of a substantially thermally sealed storage container, such as may be included in a structural region 4180 of an apparatus (not depicted in Figure 63).
  • the cross-section view is presented to illustrate various aspects of the container that are not visible in an external view.
  • the cross-section presented is approximately half of the container, with the omitted region being substantially similar to the illustrated region.
  • Figure 63 is an example of an embodiment of a unit included in a structural region 4180 of an apparatus (not depicted in Figure 63), although other embodiments are within the scope of the disclosure herein.
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage container depicted in Figure 63 includes an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 1 10.
  • the inner wall 105 substantially defines a storage region 130 within the container.
  • the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 are separated by a gas-sealed gap 120.
  • the container depicted in Figure 63 also includes an access tube 6340 between the interior storage region 130 and the exterior of the container.
  • the access tube 6340 is attached to the inner wall 1 10 with a gas-impermeable seal 6320.
  • the access tube 6340 and the inner wall 1 10 may both be fabricated from stainless steel, and the gas- impermeable seal 6320 may be a suitable weld joint.
  • the interior of the access tube 6340 forms an opening 125 between the exterior of the container and the interior storage region 130.
  • the opening 125 is of a sufficient size and shape to allow stored material to be placed within and removed from the interior of the interior storage region 130, while substantially maintaining the storage and thermal properties of the interior storage region 130.
  • the container also includes a neck region 6330 in a substantially tubular structure surrounding the access tube 6340.
  • the neck region 6330 is attached to the outer wall 105 with a gas-impermeable seal 6360.
  • the neck region 6330 and the outer wall 105 may both be fabricated from stainless steel, and the gas-impermeable seal 6360 may be a suitable weld joint.
  • the end of the access tube 6340 distal to the inner wall 110 and the end of the neck region 6330 distal to the outer wall 105 are connected with an end seal 6310.
  • the end seal 6310 depicted is a discrete unit joining the gap between the surfaces of the access tube 6340 and the neck region 6330
  • the end seal 6310 may also include a crimp or other form of a gas-impermeable seal.
  • the gas- sealed gap 120 may be coextensive with the region 6350 between the neck region 6330 and the access tube 6340.
  • Figure 63 also depicts two ducts 4175 attached to the outer wall 105. These ducts 4175 may be suitable for the attachment of a gas pressure gauge (such as identified as 4140 in Figures 41-44) or other device as suitable to the embodiment. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 63, the ends of the ducts 4175 are closed with barrier units 6300 secured with a gas-impermeable seal, such as welds or rivets. As the ducts 4175 are coextensive with the gas-sealed gap 120, the ducts 4175 should be similarly gas-sealed to preserve the reduced gas pressure e.g. less than or equal to 1x10 " torr) within the gas- sealed gap 120.
  • a gas pressure gauge such as identified as 4140 in Figures 41-44
  • the ends of the ducts 4175 are closed with barrier units 6300 secured with a gas-impermeable seal, such as welds or rivets.
  • the ducts 4175 should be similarly gas-sealed
  • a storage container such as depicted in Figure 63 may include phase-change material within the interior storage region 130.
  • specific properties of the materials including durability, mass, corrosiveness, toxicity, and cost, should be taken into account in the selection of the materials used in fabricating a storage container. See, for example, Nemanic and Setina, "A study of thermal treatment procedures to reduce hydrogen outgassing rate in thin wall stainless steel cells," Vacuum, vol. 53, 1999, pages 277-280; and Koyatsu et al., “Measurements of outgassing rate from copper and copper alloy chambers," Vacuum, vol. 47, no. 6-8, 1996, pages 709-711, which are each incorporated by reference.
  • the specific properties of the phase change materials should be taken into account in the selection of the materials used in fabricating the storage container.
  • the inner wall 105 should be fabricated from a material that retains its structural stability in the presence of the specific phase change material utilized under the expected use conditions. See: Zalba et al., "Review on thermal energy storage with phase change: materials, heat transfer analysis and applications," Applied Thermal Engineering, vol. 23, 2003, pages 251-283; and Bo et al., "Tetradecane and hexadecane binary mixtures as phase change materials (PCMs) for cool storage in district cooling systems," Energy, vol. 24, 1000, pages 1015-1028; which are each incorporated by reference.
  • PCMs phase change materials
  • Systems described herein include an apparatus, comprising: a stored material module including a plurality of storage units configured for storage of one or more medicinal units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container and including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit; a storage stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the stored material module; a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one storage stabilizer unit; and a central stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit in the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • the plurality of storage units are fabricated from plastic. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store medicinal vials. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store less than 30 medicinal vials. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store prefilled medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store less than 25 prefilled medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least one tab on one edge and at least one corresponding indentation on an opposing edge.
  • the plurality of storage units comprise: a side wall; at least one tab on at least one edge of the side wall; and at least one indentation on at least one opposing edge of the side wall, wherein the at least one .tab on each of the storage units is reversibly mated with the at least one indentation on an adjacent storage unit.
  • at least one of the plurality of storage units comprises: at least one indentation configured to reversibly mate with an exterior surface of the at least one stabilizer unit.
  • the plurality of storage units are arranged in a vertical stack within the stored material module.
  • the plurality of storage units are configured to be interchangeable within the stored material module.
  • the plurality of storage units are of a substantially similar size and shape.
  • the plurality of storage units comprise: at least two storage units of a
  • the apparatus include a stored material module base operably attached to the stored material module at an end of the stored material module distal to the stored material module cap.
  • the stored material module base comprises: one or more apertures with edges configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the at least one stabilizer unit.
  • the storage stabilizer unit comprises: at least two tubes of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned one inside the other, the tubes sized to slide relative to each other.
  • each of the at least two tubes comprise: an aperture along a partial length of each of the tubes, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other, the conduit substantially perpendicular to the axis of the tubes.
  • the storage stabilizer unit comprises: an inner tube and at least one exterior tube of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned as at least one interior and at least one exterior tube relative to each other, the tubes sized to slide relative to each other; an aperture along a partial length of the inner tube and each of the at least one exterior tube, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other, the conduit substantially perpendicular to the axis of the tubes; and retaining units fixed to an internal surface of the inner tube at a region adjacent to the aperture in the inner tube, the retaining units including ends projecting through the apertures in each of the tubes.
  • the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from plastic. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from glass-reinforced plastic.
  • the storage stabilizer unit comprises: an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module, a surface of the exterior frame substantially conforming to a surface of the stored material module; a plurality of apertures in the exterior frame; one or more protrusions from the surface of the exterior frame at an edge facing the stored material module, the one or more protrusions corresponding to edge surfaces of apertures within a stored material module base.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a tab of a stored material unit.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: a connection region, including a base and a rim, with a surface of the connection region configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the central stabilizer unit.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: a connection region, including an aperture; and a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a surface of the central stabilizer unit.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture configured to attach a fastener between the stored material module and the stored material module cap.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to an interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; at least one aperture in the first tube and at least one aperture in the second tube, the apertures positioned to form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other; a shaft configured to move in response to pressure from a surface of the central stabilizer unit; a force transmission unit configured to transfer force from movement of the shaft to a rod; an end of the rod of a size and shape to substantially fill the conduit formed from the at least one aperture in the first tube and the at least one aperture in the second tube when the tubes are in the specific position relative to each other.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to the interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; at least one aperture in the stored material module cap configured to accommodate one or more wires joining circuitry within the second tube to circuitry located exterior to the second tube.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: a base including at least one surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: a fastener positioned to reversibly attach the central stabilizer unit to the stored material module cap; and a mechanical release operably attached to the fastener, the release positioned for access from an exterior surface of the central stabilizer unit.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: a core stabilizer; and low thermal density material surrounding the core stabilizer.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: at least one aperture forming a conduit for circuitry.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: an outer wall.
  • Some embodiments of the apparatus include one or more sensors positioned within the storage stabilizer unit. Some embodiments include a lid attached to the end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an exterior surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit. Some embodiments include a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit operably attached to the lid; at least one global positioning device operably attached to the lid; and an electronic system operably attached to the lid.
  • Some embodiments include a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit integral to the lid; an electronic system operably attached to the lid; and a user input device operably attached to the electronic system.
  • Some embodiments include a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; an electromechanical switch operably attached to the lid, the electromechanical switch positioned on a surface of the lid adjacent to the outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in the region adjacent to the exterior end of the conduit; an electronic system operably attached to the electromechanical switch; and an indicator operably attached to the lid.
  • Some embodiments include a substantially thermally sealed storage container including a storage structure.
  • Embodiments include a substantially thermally sealed storage container, comprising: an outer assembly, including: an outer wall substantially defining a substantially thermally sealed storage container, the outer wall substantially defining a single outer wall aperture; an inner wall substantially defining a substantially thermally sealed storage region, the inner wall substantially defining a single inner wall aperture; the inner wall and the outer wall separated by a distance and substantially defining a gap; at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material disposed within the gap; a connector forming a conduit connecting the single outer wall aperture with the single inner wall aperture; and a single access aperture to the substantially thermally sealed storage region, wherein the single access aperture is defined by an end of the connector; and an inner assembly within the substantially thermally sealed storage region, including: a storage structure configured for receiving and storing a plurality of modules, wherein the plurality of modules includes both at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module; a stored material module including a plurality of storage units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with the storage structure
  • the connector is a flexible connector.
  • the gap comprises: substantially evacuated space with a pressure less than or equal to 5x10 ⁇ torr.
  • the at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material includes multilayer insulation material ("MLI").
  • the substantially thermally sealed storage region is configured to be passively maintained at a temperature between 2 and 8 degrees Centigrade for at least 30 days.
  • the storage structure is affixed to an interior of the substantially thermally sealed storage region in a position substantially parallel to a diameter of the conduit.
  • the storage structure is affixed to an interior of the substantially thermally sealed storage region in a position substantially perpendicular to a central axis formed by the connector.
  • each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store medicinal vials.
  • each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store less than 30 medicinal vials.
  • each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store one or more prefiUed medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the container, each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store less than 25 prefiUed medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least one tab on at least one edge of the storage units; and at least one indentation on at least one opposing edge of the storage units, wherein the at least one tab on each of the storage units is reversibly mated with the at least one indentation on an adjacent storage unit.
  • the plurality of storage units comprise: at least one indentation configured to reversibly mate with an exterior surface of the at least one stabilizer unit. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units are arranged in a vertical stack within the stored material module. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units are configured to be interchangeable within the stored material module. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units are of a substantially similar size and shape. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least two storage units of a substantially similar diameter with distinct lengths.
  • the container include a stored material module base operably attached to the stored material module at an end of the stored material module distal to the stored material module cap.
  • the stored material module base comprises: one or more apertures with edges configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the storage stabilizer unit.
  • the at least one stabilizer unit comprises: at least two tubes of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned one inside the other, the tubes sized and positioned for their surfaces to slide relative to each other.
  • the at least two tubes each comprise: an aperture along a partial length of each of the tubes, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other:
  • the at least one stabilizer unit comprises: at least two tubes of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned as at least one interior tube and at least one exterior tube relative to each other, the tubes sized and positioned for their surfaces to slide relative to each other; an aperture along a partial length of each of the tubes, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other; and one or more retaining units fixed to an internal surface of the at least one inner tube at a region adjacent to the aperture in the inner tube, the retaining units including ends projecting through the apertures in each of the tubes.
  • the plurality of storage units are configured to slide along an axis substantially defined by the at least one storage stabilizer unit.
  • the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from stainless steel.
  • the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from glass-reinforced plastic.
  • the storage stabilizer unit comprises: an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module, an inner surface of the exterior frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module; a plurality of apertures in the exterior frame; and one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture within a stored material unit.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture with a surface configured to reversibly mate with the surface of a tab of a stored material unit.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: a connection region, including an aperture; and a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a surface of the central stabilizer unit.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture configured to attach a fastener between the stored material module and the stored material module cap.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to an interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; at least one aperture in the first tube and at least one aperture in the second tube, the apertures positioned to form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other; a shaft configured to move in response to pressure from a surface of the central stabilizer unit; a force transmission unit configured to transfer force from movement of the shaft to a rod; and an end of the rod of a size and shape to substantially fill the conduit formed from the at least one aperture in the first tube and the at least one aperture in the second tube when the tubes are in the specific position relative to each other.
  • the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to an interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; and at least one aperture in the stored material module cap configured to accommodate wires joining circuitry within the second tube to circuitry located exterior to the second tube.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: a base including at least one surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: a fastener positioned to reversibly attach the central stabilizer unit to the stored material module cap; and a mechanical release operably attached to the fastener, the release positioned for access from an exterior surface of the central stabilizer unit.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: a core stabilizer; and a low thermal density material surrounding the core stabilizer.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: at least one aperture forming a conduit for circuitry.
  • the central stabilizer unit comprises: an outer wall.
  • Some embodiments of the container comprise: one or more sensors positioned within the at least one storage stabilizer unit. Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit. Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit operably attached to the lid; at least one global positioning device operably attached to the lid; and an electronic system operably attached to the lid.
  • Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit integral to the lid; an electronic system operably attached to the lid; and a user input device operably attached to the electronic system.
  • Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; an electromechanical switch operably attached to the lid, the electromechanical switch positioned on a surface of the lid adjacent to an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in the region adjacent to the exterior end of the conduit; an electronic system operably attached to the electromechanical switch; and an indicator operably attached to the lid.
  • embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit; an
  • electromechanical switch operably attached to the lid, the electromechanical switch positioned on the surface of the lid adjacent to the outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in the region adjacent to the exterior end of the conduit; an electronic system operably attached to the electromechanical switch; and an indicator operably attached to the lid.
  • a transportation stabilizer unit with dimensions corresponding to a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible connector comprising: a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in an outer wall of a substantially thermally sealed storage container including a flexible connector, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container adjacent to the external opening in the outer wall; a central aperture in the lid; a reversible fastening unit adjacent to the central aperture in the lid, the reversible fastening unit positioned to fasten a shaft within the central aperture in the lid; a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible connector from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the
  • the lid of the transportation stabilizer unit comprises: at least one aperture configured for a fastener to reversibly attach the lid to the outer wall of the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit lid is fabricated with sufficient strength to maintain the flexible connector in a compressed position when the reversible fastening unit is attached to the positioning shaft.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit pivot unit is configured to allow movement of the support unit approximately 90 degrees along a single axis.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit positioning shaft is positioned within the aperture in the lid.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit reversible fastening unit attaches to the positioning shaft with sufficient tension to maintain the flexible connector in a compressed position.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit base grip comprises: a surface with a coefficient of friction greater than one with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit comprises: a handle attached to the lid on a surface opposite to the surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
  • the transportation stabilizer unit comprises: a sensor; an indicator; and an electronic system operably attached to the sensor and the indicator.
  • an apparatus comprises: a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible connector; and a stabilizer unit with dimensions corresponding to the substantially thermally sealed storage container, the stabilizer unit including: a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in an outer wall of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the outer wall adjacent to the external opening; a central aperture in the lid; a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible connector from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; a positioning shaft with a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid, the positioning shaft of a length greater than a thickness of the
  • Some embodiments include an apparatus, comprising: a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, the structural region including an outer wall and an inner wall with a gas-sealed gap between the outer wall and the inner wall; an activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, the activation region including one or more getters; a connector attached to the structural region and to the activation region, the connector including a flexible region and a region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region; and a vacuum pump operably attached to the connector.
  • the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a storage device.
  • the storage device is configured for temperature-stabilized storage in a temperature range.
  • the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a thermally-insulated device.
  • the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a device configured for detachment from a remainder of the apparatus.
  • the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a device configured for use independently from a remainder of the apparatus.
  • the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: aluminum. In some embodiments, the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: metalized plastic. In some embodiments, the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: plastic with metal coating all surfaces of the heat-sensitive material facing the gas-sealed gap. In some embodiments, the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: a low vapor emitting material.
  • the outer wall and the inner wall of the apparatus together substantially define the gas-sealed gap.
  • the gas-sealed gap comprises: multilayer insulation material.
  • the gas-sealed gap comprises: gas at a pressure less than or equal to lxlO "2 torr.
  • the gas-sealed gap is open to an interior of the connector.
  • the heat-resistant material of the apparatus comprises: stainless steel. In some embodiments, the heat-resistant material of the apparatus comprises: titanium alloy. In some embodiments, the activation region of the apparatus comprises: a gas-sealed interior, wherein the one or more getters are enclosed within the gas-sealed interior. In some embodiments, the gas-sealed interior is open to an interior of the connector. In some embodiments, the one or more getters comprise: non-evaporatable getter material. In some embodiments, the one or more getters comprise: zirconium, vanadium and iron. In some embodiments, the one or more getters comprise: 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron.
  • the connector of the apparatus comprises: stainless steel. In some embodiments, the connector of the apparatus comprises: a valve configured to inhibit the flow of gas within the connector. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the flexible region of the connector is adjacent to the activation region. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the flexible region of the connector has a bellows configuration.
  • the vacuum pump of the apparatus is sufficient to evacuate an interior of the structural region, the activation region and the connector to a gas pressure less than or equal to 1 10 " torr.
  • the region of the apparatus configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region is adjacent to the structural region along the connector.
  • the apparatus comprises: a gas-sealed, connected space interior to each of the structural region, the activation region and the connector. In some embodiments, the apparatus comprises: a pressure gauge operably connected to the gas- sealed gap. In some embodiments, the apparatus comprises: a pressure gauge operably connected to the connector. In some embodiments, the apparatus comprises: one or more seals between the structural region, the activation region and the connector, the seals sufficient to maintain a vacuum within the structural region, the activation region and the connector.
  • a method comprises: establishing vacuum within a gas- sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions; heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus; allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material;
  • the establishing vacuum of the method comprises:
  • the establishing vacuum of the method comprises: utilizing a vacuum pump operably connected to the gas-sealed apparatus. In some embodiments, the establishing vacuum of the method comprises: establishing gas pressure less than or equal to 1x10 " torr.
  • the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes. In some embodiments, the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region with a heat source external to the apparatus.
  • the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the at least one activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus. In some embodiments, the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region in intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade.
  • the allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat- sensitive material of the method comprises: allowing the at least one activation region to cool to an ambient temperature through radiative heat loss. In some embodiments, the allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material of the method comprises: allowing the at least one activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade.
  • the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus of the method comprises: bending the connector to allow the cooled one or more getters to move from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector. In some embodiments, the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus of the method comprises: bending the connector to alter the relative positioning of the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region in relation to the connector.
  • the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas- sealed apparatus of the method comprises: transferring the cooled one or more getters into a gas-sealed gap between an inner wall and an outer wall of the structural region.
  • the separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the established vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters of the method comprises: sealing the connector at a position adjacent to the structural region. In some embodiments, the separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the established vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters of the method comprises: crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the location of the crimping.
  • the method comprises: adding sealing material to a surface of the separated connector adjacent to the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. In some embodiments, the method comprises: heating the structural region to a preset temperature for a predetermined time after establishing vacuum within the structural region and before heating the at least one activation region. In some
  • the heating the structural region comprises: heating the structural region to the preset temperature by intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. In some embodiments, the method comprises: heating the structural region to a preset temperature prior to transferring the cooled one or more getters; and maintaining the preset temperature while separating the connector.
  • Some embodiments include a method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, comprising: assembling substantially all structural components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas- sealed gap; attaching the storage device to a gas-sealed apparatus, the gas-sealed apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the gas-sealed apparatus; activating the vacuum pump to establish a gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas- sealed gap of the storage device; heating the storage device to a predetermined
  • the assembling the substantially all structural components of the storage device including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap comprises: assembling the substantially all structural components of the storage device to form the gas-sealed gap within the storage device.
  • the activating the vacuum pump to establish a gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas- sealed gap of the storage device comprises: establishing a gas pressure of less than or equal to lxl 0 "2 torr.
  • the heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time comprises: heating the storage device in increments of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. In some embodiments of the method of
  • the heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time comprises: heating the storage device to between approximately 130 degrees Centigrade and approximately 150 degrees Centigrade for at least 100 hours.
  • the heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate the one or more getters comprises: heating the getter activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes.
  • the heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate the one or more getters comprises: heating the getter activation region with a heat source external to the getter activation region.
  • the allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature comprises: allowing the getter activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade through radiative heat loss.
  • the flexing the connector comprises: flexing a region of the connector adjacent to the getter activation region.
  • the separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device comprises: physically crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the location of the physical crimping.
  • the separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device comprises: utilizing an ultrasonic welding device.
  • Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time after establishing the gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: monitoring the gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: monitoring the gas pressure within the connector. Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: adding sealing material to a surface of the separated connector adjacent to the storage device.
  • electrical circuitry includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of memory (e.g., random access, flash, read only, etc.)), and/or electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g.,
  • a typical image processing system generally includes one or more of a system unit housing, a video display device, memory such as volatile or non-volatile memory, processors such as microprocessors or digital signal processors, computational entities such as operating systems, drivers, applications programs, one or more interaction devices (e.g., a touch pad, a touch screen, an antenna, etc.), control systems including feedback loops and control motors (e.g., feedback for sensing lens position and/or velocity; control motors for moving/distorting lenses to give desired focuses).
  • An image processing system may be implemented utilizing suitable commercially available components, such as those typically found in digital still systems and/or digital motion systems.
  • a data processing system generally includes one or more of a system unit housing, a video display device, memory such as volatile or non-volatile memory, processors such as microprocessors or digital signal processors, computational entities such as operating systems, drivers, graphical user interfaces, and applications programs, one or more interaction devices (e.g., a touch pad, a touch screen, an antenna, etc.), and/or control systems including feedback loops and control motors (e.g., feedback for sensing position and/or velocity; control motors for moving and/or adjusting components and/or quantities).
  • a data processing system may be implemented utilizing suitable commercially available components, such as those typically found in data computing/communication and/or network computing/communication systems.
  • any two components so associated can also be viewed as being “operably connected”, or “operably coupled,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being “operably couplable,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality.
  • operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Filling Or Discharging Of Gas Storage Vessels (AREA)
  • Packages (AREA)

Abstract

Apparatus for use with substantially thermally sealed storage containers are described herein. These include an apparatus comprising a stored material module, a stabilizer unit, a stored material module cap and a central stabilizer unit. The apparatus also include a transportation stabilizer unit with dimensions corresponding to a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible conduit. Methods and apparatus described herein relate to establishing and maintaining low gas pressure within a gas-sealed device fabricated from heat sensitive materials. Methods include transferring activated getters within the interior of an apparatus from regions fabricated from heat-resistant materials to interior regions of the gas-sealed device fabricated from heat-sensitive materials.

Description

Temperature-Stabilized Storage Systems
Inventors: Fong-Li Chou, Geoffrey F. Deane, Lawrence Morgan Fowler, William Gates, Jenny Ezu Hu, Roderick A. Hyde, Edward K.Y. Jung, Jordin T. Kare, Mark K. Kuiper, Nathan P. Myhrvold, Nathan Pegram, Nels R. Peterson, Clarence T. Tegreene, Mike Vilhauer, Charles Whitmer, Lowell L. Wood, Jr. and Ozgur Emek Yildirim
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
The present application is related to and claims the benefit of the earliest available effective filing date(s) from the following listed application(s) (the "Related
Applications") (e.g., claims earliest available priority dates for other than provisional patent applications or claims benefits under 35 USC § 119(e) for provisional patent applications, for any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Related Application(s)). All subject matter of the Related Applications and of any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Related Applications, including any priority claims, is incorporated herein by reference to the extent such subject matter is not inconsistent herewith.
Related Applications:
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application
No. 12/001,757, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
CONTAINERS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P.
Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William H. Gates, III; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 11 December 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/006,088, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
CONTAINERS WITH DIRECTED ACCESS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William H. Gates, ΠΙ; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed
December 27, 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/006,089, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
SYSTEMS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P.
Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William H. Gates, III; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 27 December 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/008,695, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
CONTAINERS FOR MEDICINALS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William H. Gates, III; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 10 January
2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently copending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/012,490, entitled METHODS OF MANUFACTURING
TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE CONTAINERS, naming
Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William H. Gates, III; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 31 January 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/077,322, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED MEDICINAL STORAGE SYSTEMS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung;
Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William Gates; Charles
Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 17 March 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/152,465, entitled STORAGE CONTAINER INCLUDING MULTILAYER INSULATION COMPOSITE MATERIAL HAVING BANDGAP MATERIAL AND RELATED METHODS, naming Jeffrey A. Bowers;
Roderick A. Hyde; Muriel Y. Ishikawa; Edward K.Y. Jung; Jordin T. Kare; Eric C. Leuthardt; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Thomas J. Nugent Jr.; Clarence T. Tegreene; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood Jr. as inventors, filed 13 May 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/152,467, entitled MULTI-LAYER INSULATION COMPOSITE MATERIAL INCLUDING BANDGAP MATERIAL, STORAGE
CONTAINER USING SAME, AND RELATED METHODS, naming Jeffrey A. Bowers; Roderick A. Hyde; Muriel Y. Ishikawa; Edward K.Y. Jung;
Jordin T. Kare; Eric C. Leuthardt; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Thomas J. Nugent Jr.; Clarence T. Tegreene; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood Jr. as inventors, filed 13 May 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/220,439, entitled MULTI-LAYER INSULATION COMPOSITE MATERIAL HAVING AT LEAST ONE THERMALLY-REFLECTIVE LAYER WITH THROUGH OPENINGS, STORAGE CONTAINER USING SAME, AND RELATED METHODS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Muriel Y. Ishikawa; Jordin T. Kare; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 23 July 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently copending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application
No. PCT/US2008/013642, entitled INSULATION COMPOSITE MATERIAL HAVING AT LEAST ONE THERMALLY-REFLECTIVE LAYER, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Muriel Y. Ishikawa; Jordin T. Kare; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 11 December 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. PCT/US2008/013643, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED
STORAGE SYSTEMS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K. Y. Jung;
William Gates; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; Charles
Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 11 December 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. PCT/US2008/013648, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED
STORAGE CONTAINERS WITH DIRECTED ACCESS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William Gates; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed
11 December 2008, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. PCT US2009/001715, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED
MEDICINAL STORAGE SYSTEMS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William Gates;
Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 16 March 2009, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/658,579, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
SYSTEMS, naming Geoffrey F. Deane; Lawrence Morgan Fowler; William Gates; Zihong Guo; Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Jordin T. Kare; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Nathan Pegram; Nels R. Peterson; Clarence T.
Tegreene; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 8 February 2010, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/927,981, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
SYSTEMS WITH FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS, naming Fong-Li Chou;
Geoffrey F. Deane; William Gates; Zihong Guo; Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Nels R. Peterson; Clarence T. Tegreene; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 29 November 2010, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently copending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 12/927,982, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
SYSTEMS INCLUDING STORAGE STRUCTURES CONFIGURED FOR INTERCHANGEABLE STORAGE OF MODULAR UNITS, naming Geoffrey F. Deane; Lawrence Morgan Fowler; William Gates; Jenny Ezu Hu; Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Jordin T. Kare; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Nathan Pegram; Nels R. Peterson; Clarence T. Tegreene; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 29 November 2010, which is currently copending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. PCT/US2011/000234, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED
STORAGE SYSTEMS, naming Fong-Li Chou, Geoffrey F. Deane; Lawrence Morgan Fowler; William Gates; Zihong Guo; Jenny Ezu Hu; Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Jordin T. Kare; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Nathan Pegram; Nels R. Peterson; Clarence T. Tegreene; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 08 February 2011, which is currently copending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 13/200,555, entitled ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF LOW GAS PRESSURE WITHIN INTERIOR SPACES OF TEMPERATURE- STABILIZED STORAGE SYSTEMS, naming Fong-Li Chou, William Gates, Roderick A. Hyde, Edward K.Y. Jung, Nathan P. Myhrvold, Clarence T. Tegreene, Charles Whitmer and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 23 September 2011, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 13/135,126, entitled TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE
SYSTEMS CONFIGURED FOR STORAGE AND STABILIZATION OF MODULAR UNITS, naming Geoffrey F. Deane; Lawrence Morgan Fowler; William Gates; Jenny Ezu Hu; Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Jordin T. Kare; Mark K. Kuiper; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Nathan Pegram; Nels R. Peterson; Clarence T. Tegreene; Mike Vilhauer; Charles Whitmer; Lowell L. Wood, Jr.; and Ozgur Emek Yildirim as inventors, filed 23 June 2011, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of United States Patent Application No. 13/199,439, entitled METHODS OF MANUFACTURING
TEMPERATURE-STABILIZED STORAGE CONTAINERS, naming
Roderick A. Hyde; Edward K.Y. Jung; Nathan P. Myhrvold; Clarence T. Tegreene; William Gates; Charles Whitmer; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 29 August 2011, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
The United States Patent Office (USPTO) has published a notice to the effect that the USPTO's computer programs require that patent applicants reference both a serial number and indicate whether an application is a continuation, continuation-in-part, or divisional of a parent application. Stephen G. Kunin, Benefit of Prior-Filed Application, USPTO Official Gazette March 18, 2003. The present Applicant Entity (hereinafter "Applicant") has provided above a specific reference to the application(s) from which priority is being claimed as recited by statute. Applicant understands that the statute is unambiguous in its specific reference language and does not require either a serial number or any characterization, such as "continuation" or "continuation-in-part," for claiming priority to U.S. patent applications. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Applicant understands that the USPTO's computer programs have certain data entry requirements, and hence Applicant has provided designation(s) of a relationship between the present application and its parent application(s) as set forth above, but expressly points out that such designation(s) are not to be construed in any way as any type of commentary and/or admission as to whether or not the present application contains any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application(s).
SUMMARY
Described herein is an apparatus for use with a substantially thermally sealed storage container, the apparatus including: a stored material module including a plurality of storage units configured for storage of medicinal units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container and including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit; a stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the stored material module; a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one stabilizer unit; and a central stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit in the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
Also described herein is transportation stabilizer unit with dimensions
corresponding to a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible conduit, the transportation stabilizer unit including: a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in an outer wall of a substantially thermally sealed storage container including a flexible conduit, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container adjacent to the external opening in the outer wall; an aperture in the lid; a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible conduit of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible conduit from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; a positioning shaft with a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid, the positioning shaft of a length greater than the thickness of the lid in combination with the length of the wall between the surface of the lid and the edge of the aperture in the wall; an interior surface of the wall, the interior surface substantially defining a substantially thermally sealed region; a pivot unit operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft and positioned within the substantially thermally sealed region; a support unit operably attached to the pivot unit, the support unit of a size and shape to fit within the substantially thermally sealed region when the pivot unit is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture in the wall when the pivot unit is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the other direction; an end region of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of an indentation in a storage structure within the substantially thermally sealed storage container; a base grip at the terminal end of the end region; and a tensioning unit for the base grip, configured to maintain pressure on the base grip against an interior wall in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the lid.
Apparatus described herein include, but are not limited to: a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, the structural region including an outer wall and an inner wall with a gas-sealed gap between the outer wall and the inner wall; an activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, the activation region including one or more getters; a connector attached to the structural region and to the activation region, the connector including a flexible region and a region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region; and a vacuum pump operably attached to the connector.
Methods described herein include, but are not limited to: establishing vacuum within a gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions; heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas- sealed apparatus; allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material; transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus; and separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. Methods of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device also include, but are not limited to: assembling substantially all structural components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap; attaching the storage device to a gas-sealed apparatus, the gas-sealed apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the gas-sealed apparatus; activating the vacuum pump to establish gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device; heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time; heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one getter activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device; allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature; flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear; allowing the getters to fall along the connector interior into the gas-sealed gap in the storage device, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device; separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.
The foregoing summary is illustrative only and is not intended to be in any way limiting. In addition to the illustrative aspects, embodiments, and features described above, further aspects, embodiments, and features will become apparent by reference to the drawings and the following detailed description.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
FIG. 1 depicts a substantially thermally sealed storage container in cross-section. FIG. 2 shows aspects of a substantially thermally sealed storage container in cross- section.
FIG. 3 depicts aspects of a storage structure and interchangeable modular units for use within a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
FIG. 4 illustrates, in cross-section, aspects of a storage structure and
interchangeable modular units for use within a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
FIG. 5 depicts a stored material module and a central stabilizer configured for use with a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
FIG. 6 illustrates a stored material module and central stabilizer as depicted in Fig. 5, with two of the storage units positioned to allow access to the interior of a third storage unit within the stored material module.
FIG. 7 shows a stored material module and a central stabilizer configured for use with a substantially thermally sealed storage container.
FIG. 8 illustrates a stored material module and central stabilizer as depicted in Fig. 7, with two of the storage units positioned to allow access to the interior of a third storage unit within the stored material module.
FIG. 9 depicts aspects of a storage unit.
FIG. 10 illustrates aspects of a storage unit such as that depicted in Fig. 9.
FIG. 11 shows aspects of a stored material module. FIG. 12 depicts a stored material module cap attached to two stabilizer units.
FIG. 13 illustrates aspects of a stored material module cap.
FIG. 14 depicts parts of a stored material module cap, such as illustrated in Fig.
13.
FIG. 15 shows a stored material module cap, such as illustrated in Fig. 13, in cross-section.
FIG. 16 illustrates an interior view of parts of a stored material module cap.
FIG. 17 depicts a partial cross-section of a stored material module cap attached to a stabilizer unit.
FIG. 18 shows a central stabilizer unit.
FIG. 19 illustrates a central stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 18.
FIG. 20 depicts, in cross-section, a central stabilizer unit.
FIG. 21 shows a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
FIG. 22 illustrates, in cross-section, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit such as those shown in Fig. 21.
FIG. 23 depicts, in cross-section, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit such as those illustrated in Fig.22, with two of the storage units positioned to allow access to the interior of a third storage unit within the stored material module.
FIG. 24 shows a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
FIG. 25 illustrates a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
FIG. 26 depicts an embodiment of a central stabilizer, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit.
FIG. 27 shows aspects of an embodiment of a central stabilizer, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit such as depicted in Fig. 26. .
FIG. 28 illustrates an embodiment of a central stabilizer, a stored material module, a stored material module cap and a stabilizer unit, with the central stabilizer and the stabilizer unit positioned to allow access to a storage unit.
FIG. 29 depicts aspects of the embodiment illustrated in Fig. 28.
FIG. 30 shows aspects of a storage unit. FIG. 31 illustrates aspects of a storage unit such as that shown in Fig. 30.
FIG. 32 depicts, in cross-section, a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible conduit and a stabilizer unit.
FIG. 33 shows, in cross-section, a transportation stabilizer unit.
FIG. 34 illustrates aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in
Fig. 33.
FIG. 35 depicts aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
FIG. 36 shows aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
FIG. 37 illustrates, in cross-section, aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
FIG. 38 depicts aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig. 33.
FIG. 39 shows aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit such as that shown in Fig.
33.
FIG. 40A illustrates a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a transportation stabilizer unit.
FIG. 40B depicts a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a transportation stabilizer unit such as illustrated in Fig. 40A. ~tr
FIG. 41 is a schematic of an apparatus.
FIG. 42 is a schematic of an apparatus such as that illustrated in Figure 41.
FIG. 43 is a schematic of an apparatus such as that depicted in Figures 41 and 42. FIG. 44 is a schematic of an apparatus such as that depicted in Figures 41, 42 and 43.
FIG. 45 depicts a flowchart of a method.
FIG. 46 illustrates a flowchart of a method.
FIG. 47 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 48 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 49 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 50 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 51 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 52 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46. FIG. 53 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 54 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 55 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 46.
FIG. 56 illustrates a flowchart of a method.
FIG. 57 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
FIG. 58 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
FIG. 59 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
FIG. 60 shows a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
FIG. 61 depicts a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
FIG. 62 illustrates a flowchart of a method such as illustrated in Figure 56.
FIG. 63 is a schematic of a storage container.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
In the following detailed description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, which form a part hereof. In the drawings, similar symbols typically identify similar components, unless context dictates otherwise. The use of the same symbols in different drawings typically indicates similar or identical items. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments may be utilized, and other changes may be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here.
Containers and apparatus such as those described herein have a variety of potential uses. In particular, containers and apparatus such as those described herein are useful for stable maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range without reliance on external power sources to maintain the temperature range within the storage area. For example, containers and apparatus such as those described herein are suitable for maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range in locations with minimal municipal power, or unreliable municipal power sources, such as remote locations or in emergency situations. Containers and apparatus such as those described herein may be useful for the transport and storage of materials that are sensitive to temperature changes that can occur during shipment and storage. For example, the storage systems described herein are useful for the shipment and storage of medicinal agents, including vaccines. Many medicinal agents, including vaccines, currently in regular use are highly sensitive to temperature variations, and must be maintained in a temperature range to preserve potency. For example, many vaccines must be stored within 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade to preserve efficacy. Storage and transport of medicinal agents, including vaccines, within a temperature range, such as within 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade, is often referred to as the "cold chain." Health care providers and clinics who use vaccines regularly must follow established protocols and procedures for maintenance of the cold chain, including during transport and in times of emergency and in power failures, to ensure vaccine potency. See: Rodgers et al.,
"Vaccine Cold Chain Part 1 Proper Handling and Storage of Vaccine," AAOHN Journal 58(8) 337-344 (2010); Rodgers et al., "Vaccine Cold Chain Part 2: Training Personnel and Program Management," AAOHN Journal 8(9): 391-402 (2010); Magennis et al.,
"Pharmaceutical Cold Chain" A Gap in the Last Mile," Pharmaceutical & Medical Packaging News, 44-50 (September 2010); and Kendal et al., "Validation of Cold Chain Procedures Suitable for Distribution of Vaccines by Public Health Programs in the USA," Vaccine 15 (12/13): 1459-1465 (1997) which are herein incorporated by reference.
However, failure to follow established protocols and procedures for maintenance of the cold chain, even during periods of normal use in developed countries, lead to significant levels of vaccine wastage due to exposure to both excessively high and excessively low temperatures. See: Thakker and Woods, "Storage of Vaccines in the Community: Weak Link in the Cold Chain?" British Medical Journal 304: 756-758 (1992); Matthias et al., "Freezing Temperatures in the Vaccine Cold Chain: A Systematic Literature Review," Vaccine 25: 3980-3986 (2007); Edsam et al., "Exposure of Hepatitis B Vaccine to
Freezing Temperatures During Transport to Rural Health Centers in Mongolia,"
Preventative Medicine 39: 384-388 (2004); Techathawat et al., "Exposure to Heat and Freezing in the Vaccine Cold Chain in Thailand," Vaccine 25: 1328-1333 (2007); and Setia et al., "Frequency and Causes of Vaccine Wastage," Vaccine 20: 1148-1156 (2002), which are herein incorporated by reference. Although some breaks in cold chain maintenance, such as frozen vaccine vials and vials containing precipitants due to improper temperature exposure may be readily apparent, vaccines with reduced potency due to breaks in cold chain maintenance may not be readily detectable. See: Chen et al., "Characterization of the Freeze Sensitivity of a Hepatitis B Vaccine," Human Vaccines 5(1): 26-32 (2009), which is herein incorporated by reference. Vaccine stocks with reduced potency due to exposure to excessively high temperatures may not be
immediately identifiable and sensitivity varies widely depending on the specific vaccine. The temperature sensitivity of any given medicinal agent varies widely depending on the specific agent, or example the specific vaccine formulation. In some circumstances, a few minutes outside of the appropriate temperature range can significantly impact the biological effectiveness of a particular container of a medicinal agent. See: Kristensen and Chen, "Stabilization of Vaccines: Lessons Learned," Human Vaccines 6(3): 229-230 (2010), which is herein incorporated by reference. Issues related to the maintenance of cold chain are even more significant in less well developed regions of the world. See: Wirkas et al., "A Vaccine Cold Chain Freezing Study in PNG Highlights Technology Needs for Hot Climate Countries," Vaccine 25: 691-697 (2007); and Nelson et al., "Hepatitis B Vaccine Freezing in the Indonesian Cold Chain: Evidence and Solutions," Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 82(2): 99-105 (2004), which are incorporated by reference. In addition, approaches to the cold chain that require less energy may be desirable for ongoing cost and climate considerations. See Halldorsson and Kovacs, "The Sustainable Agenda and Energy Efficiency: Logistics Solutions and Supply Chains in Times of Climate Change," International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management 40 (1/2): 5-13 (2010), which is incorporated by reference. Thermal stabilization of medicinal agents, such as vaccines, for use beyond the cold chain includes economic, logistical, regulatory, procurement and policy issues (see Kristensen and Chen, "Stabilization of vaccines: lessons learned," Human Vaccines, vol. 6, no. 3, March 2010, pages 229-231 , which is incorporated by reference).
Methods and apparatus described herein are useful to establish and maintain a stable and extremely low gas pressure within an internal, gas-sealed region of a container. Methods and apparatus as described herein have a variety of potential uses in the manufacture of containers that include internal, gas-sealed regions with durable gas pressure below atmospheric pressure, such as near-vacuum gas pressure, without active pumping of gas out of the internal gas-sealed regions. Methods and apparatus described herein may be utilized to establish and maintain a durable low gas pressure region internal to a container structure, and may be particularly useful in regard to containers fabricated from materials that lose their structural stability at temperatures below the activation temperatures required by many getter materials. For example, the methods and apparatus as described herein may be utilized to establish and maintain a stable gas pressure below atmospheric pressure, such as near-vacuum gas pressure, within an internal, gas-sealed cavity within a portion of a larger device fabricated all or in part from aluminum. For example, the methods and apparatus as described herein may be useful in the manufacture and durability of containers fabricated out of plastic-metal composites that include internal, gas-impermeable spaces with gas pressure less than that of the environment surrounding the container, such as substantially evacuated, gas-impermeable internal spaces.
Intemal, gas-sealed regions with low gas pressure may be incorporated into the structure of containers as part of the insulation for the container. Internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of containers as partial insulation for the container may include other materials or features, such as insulation materials, electronics or structural features of the container. For example, intemal, gas- sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of a container may include multilayer insulation material (MLI). For example, internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of a container may include wires or conduits connecting electronic components operably attached to different regions of the container. Internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure may also isolate electronics incorporated into the device from external factors, such as chemically active materials, magnetically active materials, water, heat and cold. For example, internal, gas-sealed regions of low gas pressure incorporated into the structure of a container may include structural elements such as flanges, supports, struts and other features improving the structural stability of the container. Internal, gas-sealed regions of low pressure may have advantages of low weight and cost in a finished, manufactured device. Methods and apparatus described herein may be used to manufacture substantially thermally sealed storage devices, such as those suitable for stable maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range without reliance on external power sources to maintain the temperature range within the storage area. For example, containers and devices such as those manufactured with the methods and apparatus described herein are suitable for maintenance of stored materials within a predetermined temperature range in locations with minimal municipal power, or unreliable municipal power sources, such as remote locations or in emergency situations. For example, containers and devices such as those manufactured with the methods and apparatus described herein may be useful for the transport and storage of materials that are sensitive to external temperature changes that can occur during shipment and storage. For example, the storage systems described herein are useful for the shipment and storage of medicinal agents, including vaccines. Many medicinal agents, including vaccines, currently in regular use are highly sensitive to temperature variations, and must be maintained in a particular temperature range to preserve stability, as well as the potency and efficacy of the medicinal agents. The temperature range to maintain stability in storage is inherent to the particular formulation and medicinal agent. For example, many medicinal agents, including vaccines, must be stored in a predetermined temperature range, such as between 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade, or between 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade, or between 10 degrees Centigrade and 15 degrees Centigrade, or between 15 degrees Centigrade and 25 degrees Centigrade, or between -15 degrees Centigrade and -5 degrees Centigrade, or between -50 degrees Centigrade and -15 degrees Centigrade, to preserve efficacy of the medicinal agent. Storage and transport of medicinal agents, including vaccines, within a temperature range, such as between 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade, or between 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade, or between 10 degrees Centigrade and 15 degrees Centigrade, or between 15 degrees Centigrade and 25 degrees Centigrade, or between -15 degrees Centigrade and -5 degrees Centigrade, or between -50 degrees Centigrade and -15 degrees Centigrade, is often referred to as the "cold chain."
Containers and storage devices such as those fabricated using methods and apparatus described herein may be designed in a variety of sizes and shapes, depending on the embodiment. For example, containers and storage devices may be fabricated in various sizes, shapes and materials depending on the intended use of the container or storage device. A representative example of a storage container is shown in Figure 63 and described in the associated text (see below). For example, containers and storage devices manufactured using the methods and apparatus described herein may be of a shape and size for convenient portability, such as no more than 1 kilogram (kg), 2 kg, 5 kg, 7 kg or 10 kg. For example, containers and storage devices manufactured using the methods and apparatus described herein may be of a size and shape to be carried easily by an individual person, either directly or with a carrier, such as with a satchel, duffle bag, rucksack, carryall, handbag, haversack, knapsack, pack, pouch, suitcase, tote, travel bag or backpack. For example, containers and storage devices may be fabricated in a shape and size for transport using a small wheeled conveyance operated by a single person, such as with a mass of no more than 15 kg, 20 kg, or 25 kg. For example, containers and storage devices manufactured using the methods and apparatus described herein may be of a size and shape to be carried easily by a person using a handcart, a rickshaw, a gurney, a bicycle or a motorcycle, such as in a saddlebag, carrier or rack. For example, containers and storage devices may be fabricated in a shape and size for transport using a truck, wagon, pickup, van or other motorized delivery vehicle, such as with a mass of no more than 30 kg, 35 kg, 40 kg, 45 kg, 50 kg or 55 kg. For example, containers and storage devices may be fabricated in a shape and size for substantially stationary use, for example with a mass of greater than 100 kg.
With reference now to Figure 1, shown is an example of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 that may serve as a context for introducing one or more apparatuses described herein. For the purposes of illustration in Figure 1, the container 100 is depicted in cross-section to view interior aspects. Figure 1 depicts a vertically upright, substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 including an outer wall 105, an inner wall 110 and a connector 115. Figure 1 depicts the container 100 as including a connector 115 with a flexible segment 160, configured to form a flexible connector. In a given embodiment, the connector 115 with a flexible segment 160 as illustrated in Figure 1 is fabricated with materials sufficient to support the mass of the inner wall 110 and any material internal to the inner wall 110. In some embodiments, however, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include a connector 115 without a flexible segment, or a connector 115 with fixed segments.
Also as illustrated in Figure 1 , a substantially thermally sealed storage container
100 includes at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 with extremely low heat conductance and extremely low heat radiation transfer between the outside environment of the container and the area internal to the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. A substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is configured for extremely low heat conductance and extremely low heat radiation transfer between the outside environment of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 and the inside of a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. For example, in some embodiments the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is less than 1 Watt (W) when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees Centigrade (C) and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C. For example, in some embodiments the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is less than 700 mW when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees C and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C. For example, in some embodiments the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is less than 600 mW when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees C and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C. For example, in some embodiments the heat leak between a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is approximately 500 mW when the exterior of the container is at a temperature of approximately 40 degrees C and the substantially thermally sealed storage region is maintained at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
A substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured for transport and storage of material in a predetermined temperature range within a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 for a period of time without active cooling activity or an active cooling unit. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in an environment with an external temperature of approximately 40 degrees C may be configured for transport and storage of material in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C within a substantially, thermally sealed storage region 130 for up to three months. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in an environment with an external temperature of approximately 40 degrees C may be configured for transport and storage of material in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C within a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 for up to two months. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in an environment with an external temperature of approximately 40 degrees C may be configured for transport and storage of material in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C within a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 for up to one month. A substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 includes a minimal thermal gradient. The interior of a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 is essentially the same temperature, for example with an internal thermal gradient (e.g. top to bottom or side to side) of no more than 5 degrees Centigrade, or of no more than 3 degrees Centigrade, or of no more than 1 degree Centigrade.
Specific thermal properties and storage capabilities of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may vary depending on the embodiment. For example, the materials used in fabrication of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may depend on factors including; the design of the container 100, the required temperature range within the storage region 130, and the expected external temperature for use of the container 100. A substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 as described herein includes a storage structure configured for receiving and storing at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module. The choice of number and type of both the heat sink module(s) and the stored material module(s) will determine the specific thermal properties and storage capabilities of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 for a given intended time for length of storage in a given temperature range. For example, if a longer storage time in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C is desired, relatively more heat sink module(s) may be included in the storage structure and relatively fewer stored material module(s) may be included. For example, if a shorter storage time in a temperature range between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C is desired, relatively fewer heat sink module(s) may be included in the storage structure and relatively more stored material module(s) may be included.
The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be of a portable size and shape, for example a size and shape within expected portability estimates for an individual person. The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured for both transport and storage of material. The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured of a size and shape for carrying, lifting or movement by an individual person. For example, in some embodiments the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 and any internal structure has a mass that is less than approximately 50 kilograms (kg), or less than approximately 30 kg, or less than approximately 20 kg. For example, in some embodiments a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 has a length and width that are less than approximately 1 meter (m). For example, implementations of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may have external dimensions on the order of 45 centimeters (cm) in diameter and 70 cm in height. For example, in some embodiments a substantially thermally sealed storage container includes external handles, hooks, fixtures or other projections to assist in mobility of the container. For example, in some embodiments a substantially thermally sealed storage container includes external straps, bands, harnesses, or ropes to assist in transport of the container. In some embodiments, a substantially thermally sealed storage container includes external fixtures configured to secure the container to a surface, for example flanges, brackets, struts or clamps. The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 illustrated in Figure 1 is roughly configured as an oblong shape, however multiple shapes are possible depending on the embodiment. For example, a rectangular shape, or an irregular shape, may be utilized in some embodiments, depending on the intended use of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. For example, a substantially round or ball-like shape of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be utilized in some embodiments.
A substantially thermally sealed storage container, as described herein, includes zero active cooling units during routine use. No active cooling units are depicted in Figure 1 , for example. The term "active cooling unit," as used herein, includes conductive and radiative cooling mechanisms that require electricity from an external source to operate. For example, active cooling units may include one or more of: actively powered fans, actively pumped refrigerant systems, thermoelectric systems, active heat pump systems, active vapor-compression refrigeration systems and active heat exchanger systems. The external energy required to operate such mechanisms may originate, for example, from municipal electrical power supplies or electric batteries. A substantially thermally sealed storage container, as described herein includes, no active cooling units during regular use as described herein.
As depicted in Figure 1, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes an outer assembly, including an outer wall 105. The outer wall 105 substantially defines the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100, and the outer wall 105 substantially defines a single outer wall aperture 150. As illustrated in Figure 1 , the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes an inner wall 110. The inner wall 110 substantially defines a single inner wall aperture 140. As illustrated in Figure 1, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes a gap 120 between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105. The inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 are separated by a distance and substantially define a gap 120. The surfaces of the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 to not meet or come into thermal contact across the gap 120 when the container is in its usual position. At least one section of ultra efficient insulation material is included in the gap 120. Substantially evacuated space may be included in the gap 120, with the container segments sufficiently sealed to minimize gas leakage into the gap 120 from the region external to the container. The container 100 includes a connector 115 forming a conduit 125 connecting the single outer wall aperture 150 with the single inner wall aperture 140. Although the connector 115 illustrated in Figure 1 is a flexible connector, in some embodiments the connector 115 may be not be a flexible connector. The container 100 includes a single access aperture to the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, wherein the single access aperture is formed by an end of the connector 115. In some embodiments, the container 100 includes an outer assembly, including one or more sections of ultra efficient insulation material substantially defining at least one thermally sealed storage region, wherein the outer assembly and the one or more sections of ultra efficient insulation material substantially define a single access aperture to the at least one thermally sealed storage region. As will be illustrated in the following Figures, the container 100 includes an inner assembly within the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, including a storage structure configured for receiving and storing at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module.
As illustrated in Figure 1, the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that the outer wall aperture 150 is located at the top of the container during use of the container. The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at the top edge of the outer wall 105 during routine storage or use of the container. The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that an aperture in the exterior of the container connecting to the conduit 125 is at the top edge of the container 100 during storage of the container 100. The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at an opposing face of the container 100 relative to a base or bottom support structure of the container 100. Embodiments wherein the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at the top edge of the outer wall 105 during routine storage or use of the container may be configured for minimal passive transfer of thermal energy from the region exterior to the container. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 configured so that an outer wall aperture 150 is at an opposing face of the container 100 as a base or bottom support structure of the container 100 may also be configured so that thermal energy radiating from a floor or surface under the container 100 does not directly radiate into the aperture in the outer wall 105.
In some embodiments, the inner wall 1 10 substantially defines a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 within the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. Although the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 depicted in Figure 1 includes a single substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, in some embodiments a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include a plurality of substantially thermally sealed storage regions. In some embodiments, there may be a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 including a plurality of storage regions (e.g. 130) within the container. In embodiments including a plurality of storage regions (e.g. 130) within the container, they may be associated with a single conduit to the region exterior to the container. In embodiments including a plurality of storage regions (e.g. 130) within the container, they may be associated with a plurality of conduits to the region external to the container. For example, each of the plurality of storage regions may be associated with a single, distinct conduit. For example, more than one storage region may be associated with a single conduit to the region external to the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100.
A plurality of storage regions may be, for example, of comparable size and shape or they may be of differing sizes and shapes as appropriate to the embodiment. Different storage regions may include, for example, various removable inserts, at least one layer including at least one metal on the interior surface of a storage region, or at least one layer of nontoxic material on the interior surface, in any combination or grouping. Although the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 depicted in Figure 1 is approximately cylindrical in shape, a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may be of a size and shape appropriate for a specific embodiment. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may be oblong, round, rectangular, square or of irregular shape. A substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may vary in total volume, depending on the embodiment and the total dimensions of the container 100. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 configured for portability by an individual person may include a single substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 with a total volume less than 30 liters (L), for example a volume of 25 L or 20 L. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 configured for transport on a vehicle may include a single substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 with a total volume more than 30 L, for example 35 L or 40 L. A substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 may include additional structure as appropriate for a specific embodiment. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage region may include stabilizing structures, insulation, packing material, or other additional components configured for ease of use or stable storage of material.
In some embodiments, a substantially thermally sealed container 100 includes at least one layer of nontoxic material on an interior surface of one or more substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. Nontoxic material may include, for example, material that does not produce residue that may be toxic to the contents of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, or material that does not produce residue that may be toxic to the future users of contents of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. Nontoxic material may include material that maintains the chemical structure of the contents of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, for example nontoxic material may include chemically inert or non-reactive materials. Nontoxic material may include material that has been developed for use in, for example, medical, pharmaceutical or food storage applications. Nontoxic material may include material that may be cleaned or sterilized, for example material that may be irradiated, autoclaved, or disinfected. Nontoxic material may include material that contains one or more antibacterial, antiviral, antimicrobial, or antipathogen agents. For example, nontoxic material may include aldehydes, hypochlorites, oxidizing agents, phenolics, quaternary ammonium compounds, or silver. Nontoxic material may include material that is structurally stable in the presence of one or more cleaning or sterilizing compounds or radiation, such as plastic that retains its structural integrity after irradiation, or metal that does not oxidize in the presence of one or more cleaning or sterilizing compounds. Nontoxic material may include material that consists of multiple layers, with layers removable for cleaning or sterilization, such as for reuse of the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region. Nontoxic material may include, for example, material including metals, fabrics, papers or plastics.
In some embodiments, a substantially thermally sealed container 100 includes at least one layer including at least one metal on an interior surface of at least one thermally sealed storage region 130. For example, the at least one metal may include gold, aluminum, copper, or silver. The at least one metal may include at least one metal composite or alloy, for example steel, stainless steel, metal matrix composites, gold alloy, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or silver alloy. In some embodiments, the at least one metal includes metal foil, such as titanium foil, aluminum foil, silver foil, or gold foil. A metal foil may be a component of a composite, such as, for example, in association with polyester film, such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) polyester film. The at least one layer including at least one metal on the interior surface of at least one storage region 130 may include at least one metal that may be sterilizable or disinfected. For example, the at least one metal may be sterilizable or disinfected using plasmons. For example, the at least one metal may be sterilizable or disinfected using autoclaving, thermal means, or chemical means. Depending on the embodiment, the at least one layer including at least one metal on the interior surface of at least one storage region may include at least one metal that has specific heat transfer properties, such as a thermal radiative properties.
In some embodiments, the container 100 may be configured for storage of one or more medicinal units within a storage region 130. For example, some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 0 degrees Centigrade and approximately 10 degrees Centigrade. For example, some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 2 degrees Centigrade and approximately 8 degrees Centigrade. For example, some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 5 degrees Centigrade and approximately 15 degrees Centigrade. For example, some medicinal units are optimally stored within approximately 0 degrees Centigrade and approximately -10 degrees
Centigrade. See: Chan and Kristensen, "Opportunities and Challenges of Developing Thermostable Vaccines," Expert Rev. Vaccines, 8(5), pages 547-557 (2009); Matthias et al., "Freezing Temperatures in the Vaccine Cold Chain: A Systematic Literature Review," Vaccine 25, pages 3980-3986 (2007); Wirkas et al, "A Vaccines Cold Chain Freezing Study in PNG Highlights Technology Needs for Hot Climate Countries," Vaccine 25, pages 691 -697 (2007); the WHO publication titled "Preventing Freeze Damage to
Vaccines," publication no. WHO/IVB/07.09 (2007); the WHO publication titled
"Temperature Sensitivity of Vaccines," publication no. WHO/IVB/06.10 (2006); and Setia et al., "Frequency and Causes of Vaccine Wastage," Vaccine 20: 1148-1156 (2002), which are all herein incorporated by reference. The term "medicinal", as used herein, includes a drug, composition, formulation, material or compound intended for medicinal or therapeutic use. For example, a medicinal may include drugs, vaccines, therapeutics, vitamins, pharmaceuticals, remedies, homeopathic agents, naturopathic agents, or treatment modalities in any form, combination or configuration. For example, a medicinal may include vaccines, such as: a vaccine packaged as an oral dosage compound, vaccine within a prefilled syringe, a container or vial containing vaccine, vaccine within a unijet device, or vaccine within an externally deliverable unit (e.g. a vaccine patch for transdermal applications). For example, a medicinal may include treatment modalities, such as: antibody therapies, small-molecule compounds, anti-inflammatory agents, therapeutic drugs, vitamins, or pharmaceuticals in any form, combination or configuration. A medicinal may be in the form of a liquid, gel, solid, semi-solid, vapor, or gas. In some embodiments, a medicinal may be a composite. For example, a medicinal may include a bandage infused with antibiotics, anti-inflammatory agents, coagulants, neurotrophic agents, angiogenic agents, vitamins or pharmaceutical agents.
In some embodiments, the container 100 may be configured for storage of one or more food units within a storage region 130. For example, a container 100 may be configured to maintain a temperature in the range of -4 degrees C and -10 degrees C during storage, and may include a storage structure configured for storage of one or more food products, such as ice cream bars, individually packed frozen meals, frozen meat products, frozen fruit products or frozen vegetable products. In some embodiments, the container 100 may be configured for storage of one or more beverage units within a storage region 130. For example, a container 100 may be configured to maintain a temperature in the range of 2 degrees C and 10 degrees C during storage, and may include a storage structure configured for storage of one or more beverage products, such as wine, beer, fruit juices, or soft drinks.
In the embodiment depicted in Figure 1 , the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes a gap 120 between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105. As shown in Figure 1, the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 are separated by a distance and substantially define a gap 120. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 1, there are no irregularities or additions within the gap 120 to thermally join or create a thermal connection between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 across the gap 120 when the container is upright, or in the position configured for normal use of the container 100. When the container 100 is in an upright position, as illustrated in Figure 1, the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 do not directly come into contact with each other. Further, when the container 100 is in an upright position, there are no additions, junctions, flanges, or other fixtures within the gap that would function as a thermal connection across the gap 120 between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105. As illustrated in Figure 1, the connector 115 supports the entire mass of the inner wall and any contents of the storage region 130. In some embodiments, additional supporting units may be included in the gap 120 to provide additional support to the inner wall 110 in addition to that provided by the connector 115. For example, there may be one or more thermally non-conductive strands attached to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120, wherein the thermally non-conductive strands are configured to extend around the surface of the inner wall 110 facing the gap 120 and provide additional support or movement restraint on the inner wall 110 and, by extension, the contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. In some embodiments, the central regions of the plurality of strands wrap around the inner wall 110 at diverse angles, with the corresponding ends of each of the plurality of strands fixed to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120 at multiple locations. One or more thermally non-conductive strands may be, for example, fabricated from fiberglass strands or ropes. One or more thermally non-conductive strands may be, for example, fabricated from strands of a para- aramid synthetic fiber, such as Kevlar™. A plurality of thermally non-conductive strands may be attached to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120 at both ends, with the center of the strands wrapped around the surface of the inner wall 110 facing the gap 120. For example, a plurality of strands fabricated from stainless steel ropes may be attached to the surface of the outer wall 105 facing the gap 120 at both ends, with the center of the strands wrapped around the surface of the inner wall 110 facing the gap 120.
In some embodiments, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include one or more sections of an ultra efficient insulation material. In some
embodiments, there is at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material within a gap 120. The term "ultra efficient insulation material," as used herein, may include one or more type of insulation material with extremely low heat conductance and extremely low heat radiation transfer between the surfaces of the insulation material. The ultra efficient insulation material may include, for example, one or more layers of thermally reflective film, high vacuum, aerogel, low thermal conductivity bead-like units, disordered layered crystals, low density solids, or low density foam. In some embodiments, the ultra efficient insulation material includes one or more low density solids such as aerogels, such as those described in, for example: Fricke and Emmerling, Aerogels- preparation, properties, applications, Structure and Bonding 77: 37-87 (1992); and Pekala, Organic aerogels from the polycondensation of resorcinol with formaldehyde, Journal of Materials Science 24: 3221-3227 (1989), which are each herein incorporated by reference. As used herein, "low density" may include materials with density from about 0.01 g/cm3 to about 0.10 g/cm3, and materials with density from about 0.005 g/cm3 to about 0.05 g/cm3. In some embodiments, the ultra efficient insulation material includes one or more layers of disordered layered crystals, such as those described in, for example: Chiritescu et al.,
Ultralow thermal conductivity in disordered, layered WSe2 crystals, Science 315: 351-353 (2007), which is herein incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, the ultra efficient insulation material includes at least two layers of thermal reflective film surrounded, for example, by at least one of: high vacuum, low thermal conductivity spacer units, low thermal conductivity bead like units, or low density foam. See, for example, Mikhalchenko et al., "Study of heat transfer in multilayer insulation based on composite spacer materials," Cryogenics, 1983, pages 309-311, which is incorporated by reference herein. In some embodiments, the ultra efficient insulation material may include at least two layers of thermal reflective material and at least one spacer unit between the layers of thermal reflective material. For example, the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one multiple layer insulating composite such as described in U.S. Patent 6,485,805 to Smith et al., titled "Multilayer insulation composite," which is herein incorporated by reference. For example, the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one metallic sheet insulation system, such as that described in U.S. Patent
5,915,283 to Reed et al., titled "Metallic sheet insulation system," which is herein incorporated by reference. For example, the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one thermal insulation system, such as that described in U.S. Patent 6,967,051 to Augustynowicz et al., titled "Thermal insulation systems," which is herein incorporated by reference. For example, the ultra-efficient insulation material may include at least one rigid multilayer material for thermal insulation, such as that described in U.S. Patent 7,001,656 to Maignan et al., titled "Rigid multilayer material for thermal insulation," which is herein incorporated by reference. See also: Li et al., "Study on effect of liquid level on the heat leak into vertical cryogenic vessels," Cryogenics, vol. 50, 2010, pages 367-372; Barth et al., "Test results for a high quality industrial superinsulation,"
Cryogenics, vol. 28, 1988, pages 607-609; and Eyssa and Okasha, "Thermodynamic optimization of thermal radiation shields for a cryogenic apparatus," Cryogenics, 1978, pages 305-307; which are each incorporated by reference. For example, the ultra-efficient insulation material may include multilayer insulation material, or "MLI." For example, an ultra efficient insulation material may include multilayer insulation material such as that used in space program launch vehicles, including by NASA. See, e.g., Daryabeigi, Thermal analysis and design optimization of multilayer insulation for reentry aerodynamic heating, Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets 39: 509-514 (2002), which is herein incorporated by reference. For example, the ultra efficient insulation material may include space with a partial gaseous pressure lower than atmospheric pressure external to the container 100. For example, the ultra efficient insulation material may include space with a gaseous pressure lower than atmospheric pressure external to the gas-sealed gap 120. See, for example, Nemanic, "Vacuum insulating panel," Vacuum, vol. 46, nos. 8-10, 1995, pages 839-842, which is incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, the ultra efficient insulation material may substantially cover the inner wall 110 surface facing the gap 120. In some embodiments, the ultra efficient insulation material may substantially cover the outer wall 105 surface facing the gap 120.
In some embodiments, there is at least one layer of multilayer insulation material ("MLI") within the gas-sealed gap 120. The at least one layer of multilayer insulation material may substantially surround the surface of the inner wall 1 10. In some
embodiments, there are a plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material within the gap 120, wherein the layers may not be homogeneous. For example, the plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material may include layers of differing thicknesses, or layers with and without associated spacing elements. In some embodiments there may be one or more additional layers within or in addition to the ultra efficient insulation material, such as, for example, an outer structural layer or an inner structural layer. An inner or an outer structural layer may be made of any material appropriate to the embodiment, for example an inner or an outer structural layer may include: plastic, metal, alloy, composite, or glass. See, for example, US Patent No. 4,726,974 to Nowobilski et al., titled "Vacuum insulation panel," which is incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, there may be one or more layers of high vacuum between layers of thermal reflective film. In some
embodiments, the gap 120 includes a substantially evacuated gaseous pressure relative to the atmospheric pressure external to the container 100. A substantially evacuated gaseous pressure relative to the atmospheric pressure external to the container 100 may include substantially evacuated gaseous pressure surrounding a plurality of layers of MLI, for example between and around the layers. A substantially evacuated gaseous pressure relative to the atmospheric pressure external to the container 100 may include substantially evacuated gaseous pressure in one or more sections of a gap. For example, in some embodiments the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to lxlO"2 torr. For example, in some embodiments the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to 5X10"4 torr. For example, in some embodiments the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to lxl 0"2 torr in the gap 120. For example, in some embodiments the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to 5X10"4 torr in the gap 120. In some embodiments, the gap 120 includes substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than 1x10" torr, for example, less than 5xl0"3 torr, less than 5x10" torr, less than 5xl0"5 torr, SxlO^torr or 5xl0"7 torr. For example, in some embodiments the gap 120 includes a plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material and substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to lxlO"2 torr. For example, in some embodiments the gap 120 includes a plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material and substantially evacuated space having a pressure less than or equal to 5x10"4 torr.
Depending on the embodiment, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be fabricated from a variety of materials. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be fabricated from metals, fiberglass or plastics of suitable characteristics for a given embodiment. For example, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include materials of a suitable strength, hardness, durability, cost, availability, thermal conduction characteristics, gas-emitting properties, or other considerations appropriate for a given embodiment. In some embodiments, the materials for fabrication of individual segments of the container 100 are compatible with forming a gas-impervious seal between the segments. In some embodiments, the outer wall 105 is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, the outer wall 105 is fabricated from aluminum. In some embodiments, the inner wall 110 is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, the inner wall 110 is fabricated from aluminum. In some embodiments, all or part of the connector 115 is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, all or part of the connector 115 is fabricated from aluminum.
Embodiments include a container with an inner wall 110 and an outer wall 105 fabricated from stainless steel, and a connector 115 with segments fabricated from stainless steel and segments fabricated from aluminum. In some embodiments, the connector 115 is fabricated from fiberglass. In some embodiments, portions or parts of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may be fabricated from composite or layered materials. For example, an outer wall .105 may be substantially fabricated from stainless steel, with an external covering of plastic, such as to protect the outer surface of the container from scratches. For example, an inner wall 1 10 may substantially be fabricated from stainless steel, with a coating within the substantially sealed storage region 130 of plastic, rubber, foam or other material suitable to provide support and insulation to material stored within the substantially sealed storage region 130.
Figure 1 illustrates a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 1 10, with a connector 1 15 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10. As shown in Figure 1 , the inner wall 1 10 roughly defines a
substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. When the container 100 is in an upright position, as depicted in Figure 1 , the connector 1 15 is configured to entirely support the mass of the inner wall 1 10 and the total contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. In addition, in embodiments wherein a gap 120 includes a gaseous pressure significantly less than atmospheric pressure (e.g. less than or equal to 1 10" torr, less than or equal to lxl O"3 torr, less than or equal to lxl 0^ torr, or less than or equal to 5x10^ torr), the connector 1 15 as depicted in Figure 1 supports the mass of the inner wall 1 10 and any contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 against the force of the partial pressure within the gap 120. For example, in an embodiment wherein the connector 1 15 includes a conduit 125 of approximately 2½ inches in diameter and the partial pressure of the gap 120 is 5x10^ torr, the downward force on the region of the inner wall 1 10 directly opposite to the end of the conduit 125 is approximately equivalent to 100 pounds of weight at that location due to the partial pressure in the gap 120. As illustrated in Figure 1 , when the container 100 is in an upright position, the connector 1 15 substantially supports the mass of the inner wall 1 10 and any contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 without additional supporting elements within the gap 120. For example, in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 1 , the inner wall 1 10 is connected to the connector 1 15, and the inner wall 1 10 does not contact any other supporting units when the container 100 is in an upright position. As illustrated in Figure 1 , in embodiments wherein an inner wall 1 10 is entirely freely supported by a connector 1 15 and wherein the connector 1 15 is a flexible connector, the inner wall 1 10 may swing or otherwise move within the gap 120 in response to motion of the container 100. For example, when the container 100 is transported, the flexible connector 1 15 may bend or flex in response to the transportation motion, and the inner wall 110 may correspondingly swing or move within the gap 120.
Figure 2 depicts aspects of some embodiments of a substantially thermally sealed container 100. Figure 2 depicts in cross-section an inner wall 110 in conjunction with a connector 115. Although a connector 115 with a flexible segment 160 is illustrated, a connector 115 may be non-flexible in some embodiments. The interior of the connector 115 substantially defines a conduit 125 between the exterior of the container and the interior of a storage region 130. As illustrated in Figure 2, the multiple flanges of the flexible segment 160 of the connector 115 form an elongated thermal pathway on the surface of the connector 115 forming the edges of the conduit 125 between the storage region 130 and the region exterior to the container. The elongated thermal pathway of the conduit 125 provides reduced thermal energy transfer along the conduit 125 in comparison with a smooth (i.e. non-flanged) connector 115.
The connector 115 illustrated in Figure 2 includes a first compression unit 250 substantially encircling one end of the flexible segment 160 and a second compression unit 240 substantially encircling another end of the flexible segment 160. Although only a single compression strand 230 is illustrated in the view of Figure 2, in an actual embodiment a plurality of compression strands 230 are positioned around the
circumference of the flexible segment 160. The plurality of compression strands 230 are attached to both the first compression unit 250 and the second compression unit 240, substantially fixing a maximum distance allowable between the first compression unit 250 and the second compression unit 240. A junction unit 270 joins the connector 115 with the inner wall 110 of the container 100.
In embodiments with an inner wall 110 and/or an outer wall 105 fabricated from one or more materials and a connector 115 fabricated from one or more different materials, one or more junction units 270 may be included in the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 to ensure a suitably strong, durable and/or gas-impermeable connection between the inner wall 110 and the connector 115 and/ or the outer wall 105 and the connector 115. A "junction unit," as used herein, includes a unit configured for connections to two different components of the container 100, forming a junction between the different components. A substantially thermally sealed container 100 may include a gas-impermeable junction between the first end of the connector 115 and the outer wall at the edge of the outer wall aperture. A substantially thermally sealed container 100 may include a gas-impermeable junction between the second end of the duct and the inner wall at the edge of the inner wall aperture. Some embodiments include a gas-impermeable junction between the second end of the duct and the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, the gas-impermeable junction substantially encircling the aperture in the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. For example, in embodiments with a inner wall 110 and/or an outer wall 105 fabricated from aluminum and a connector 115 fabricated from stainless steel, one or more junction units 270 may be included in the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 to ensure a suitably strong and gas- impermeable attachment between the inner wall 110 and the connector 115 and/ or the outer wall 105 and the connector 115. Some embodiments include a gas-impermeable junction between the first end of the duct and the exterior of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100, the gas-impermeable junction substantially encircling the aperture in the exterior. For example, a substantially ring-shaped junction unit may be included to functionally connect the top edge of the connector 115 and the edge of the aperture in the outer wall 105. For example, Figure 2 illustrates a substantially ring- shaped junction unit 270 between the bottom edge of the connector 115 and the edge of the aperture in the inner wall 110. Junction units such as those depicted 270 in Figure 2 may be fabricated from roll bonded clad metals, for example as roll bonded transition inserts such as those available from Spur Industries Inc., (Spokane WA). For example, a roll bonded transition insert including a layer of stainless steel bonded to a layer of aluminum is a suitable base for fabricating a junction unit 270 between an aluminum outer wall 105 or inner wall 110 and a stainless steel connector 115. In such an embodiment, a junction unit 270 is positioned so that identical materials are placed adjacent to each other, and then operably sealed together using commonly implemented methods, such as welding. For example, in an embodiment where a container 100 includes an aluminum outer wall 105 and a stainless steel connector 115, a roll bonded transition insert including a layer of stainless steel bonded to a layer of aluminum may be used in a first junction unit, suitably positioned so that the aluminum outer wall 105 may be welded to the aluminum portion of the first junction unit. Similarly, the stainless steel portion of the junction unit may be welded to the top edge of the stainless steel connector 115. A second junction unit 270 may be similarly used to operably attach the bottom edge of the stainless steel connector 115 to the edge of the aperture in the aluminum inner wall 110. In embodiments where junction units 270 are not utilized, brazing methods and suitable filler materials may be used to operably attach a connector 115 fabricated from materials distinct from the materials used to fabricate the outer wall 105 and/or the inner wall 110.
As illustrated in Figure 2, the interior of the storage region 130 includes a storage structure 200. The storage structure 200 is fixed to the interior surface of the inner wall 110. The storage structure 200 illustrated in Figure 2 includes a plurality of apertures 220, 210 of an equivalent size and shape. Some of these apertures 220, 210 are completely depicted and some are only partially depicted in the cross-section illustration of Figure 2. The storage structure 200 includes a planar structure including a plurality of apertures 220, 210, wherein the planar structure is located adjacent to a wall of the thermally sealed storage region 130 opposite to the single access aperture and substantially parallel with the diameter of the single access aperture. The plurality of apertures 220, 210 included in the storage structure 200 include substantially circular apertures. The plurality of apertures 220, 210 included in the storage structure 200 include a plurality of apertures 220 located around the circumference of the storage structure 200, and a single aperture 210 located in the center of the storage structure 200. As illustrated in Figure 2, the apertures 220, 210 included in the storage structure 200 are of substantially similar size and shape, allowing for the interchange of the heat sink units and the stored material modules in different apertures 220, 210.
Although a substantially planar storage structure 200 is depicted in Figure 2, in some embodiments a storage structure may include brackets, hooks, springs, flanges, or other configurations as appropriate for reversible storage of the heat sink modules and stored material modules of that embodiment. For example, a storage structure may include brackets and/or hooks. For example, a storage structure may include brackets with openings configured for heat sink modules and stored material modules to slide into the structure. For example, a storage structure may include hanging cylinders and/or a carousel-like structure with openings configured for heat sink modules and stored material modules to slide into the structure. Some embodiments include a storage structure with aspects configured to assist in the insertion, positioning and removal of heat sink modules and/or stored material modules, such as slide structures and/or positioning guide structures. Some embodiments include an external insertion and removal device, such as a hook, loop or bracket on an elongated pole configured to assist in the insertion, positioning and removal of heat sink modules and/or stored material modules. In some embodiments, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes one or more storage structures 200 within an interior of at least one thermally sealed storage region 130. A storage structure 200 is configured for receiving and storing of at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module. A storage structure 200 is configured for interchangeable storage of at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module. For example, a storage structure may include racks, shelves, containers, thermal insulation, shock insulation, or other structures configured for storage of material within the storage region 130. In some embodiments, a storage structure includes at least one bracket configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some
embodiments, a storage structure includes at least one rack configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some embodiments, a storage structure includes at least one clamp configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some embodiments, a storage structure includes at least one fastener configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some embodiments, a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 includes one or more removable inserts within an interior of at least one thermally sealed storage region 130. The removable inserts may be made of any material appropriate for the embodiment, including nontoxic materials, metal, alloy, composite, or plastic. The one or more removable inserts may include inserts that may be reused or reconditioned. The one or more removable inserts may include inserts that may be cleaned, sterilized, or disinfected as appropriate to the embodiment. In some
embodiments, a storage structure includes at least one bracket configured for the reversible attachment of at least one heat sink module or at least one stored material module. In some embodiments, a storage structure is configured for interchangeable storage of a plurality of modules, wherein the modules include at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module.
In some embodiments the substantially thermally sealed storage container may include one or more heat sink units thermally connected to one or more storage region
130. In some embodiments, the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include no heat sink units. In some embodiments, the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include heat sink units within the interior of the container 100, such as within a storage region 130. Heat sink units may be modular and configured to be removable and interchangeable. In some embodiments, heat sink units are configured to be interchangeable with stored material modules. Heat sink modules may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment. Materials for inclusion in a heat sink module may be selected based on properties such as thermal conductivity, durability over time, stability of the material when subjected to particular temperatures, stability of the material when subjected to repeated cycles of freezing and thawing, cost, weight, density, and availability. In some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from metals. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from stainless steel. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from aluminum. In some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from plastics. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from polyethylene. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from polypropylene. A heat sink unit may be fabricated to be durable and reusable, for example a heat sink unit may be fabricated from stainless steel and water. A heat sink unit may be brought to a suitable temperature before placement in a storage region 130, for example a heat sink unit may be frozen at -20 degrees Centigrade externally to the container 100 and then brought to 0 degrees Centigrade externally to the container 100 before placement within a storage region 130.
The term "heat sink unit," as used herein, includes one or more units that absorb thermal energy. See, for example, U.S. Patent 5,390,734 to Voorhes et al., titled "Heat Sink," U.S. Patent 4,057,101 to Ruka et al., titled "Heat Sink," U.S. Patent 4,003,426 to Best et al., titled "Heat or Thermal Energy Storage Structure," and U.S. Patent 4,976,308 to Faghri titled "Thermal Energy Storage Heat Exchanger," and Zalba et al., "Review on thermal energy storage with phase change: materials, heat transfer analysis and
applications," Applie d Thermal Engineering 23: 251-283 (2003), which are each incorporated herein by reference. In the embodiments described herein, all of the heat sink materials included within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 are located within specific heat sink units, as illustrated in the following Figures. All of the embodiments described herein include heat sink materials only within sealed heat sink units, maintained physically distinct and separated from any stored material within a storage region 130. This physical distance allows for the transfer of heat energy to the heat sink from the interior of the storage region 130 without excessive cooling of the stored material, which may damage the stored material For example, many medicinals must be stored a temperatures near to but above freezing (e.g. approximately 2 degrees Centigrade to approximately 8 degrees Centigrade). See Wirkas et al., "A Vaccine Cold Chain Freezing Study in PNG Highlights Technology Needs for Hot Climate Countries," Vaccine 25: 691-697 (2007). Heat sink units may include, for example: units containing frozen water or other types of ice; units including frozen material that is generally gaseous at ambient temperature and pressure, such as frozen carbon dioxide (C02); units including liquid material that is generally gaseous at ambient temperature and pressure, such as liquid nitrogen; units including artificial gels or composites with heat sink properties; units including phase change materials; and units including refrigerants. See, for example: U.S. Patent 5,261,241 to Kitahara et al., titled "Refrigerant," U.S. Patent 4,810,403 to Bivens et al., titled "Halocarbon Blends for Refrigerant Use," U.S. Patent 4,428,854 to Enjo et al., titled "Absorption Refrigerant Compositions for Use in Absorption Refrigeration
Systems," and U.S. Patent 4,482,465 to Gray, titled "Hydrocarbon-Halocarbon Refrigerant Blends," which are each herein incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, heat sink materials include tetradecane and hexadecane binary mixtures (see, for example, Bo et al., "Tetradecane and hexadecane binary mixtures as phase change materials (PCMs) for cool storage in district cooling systems," Energy 24: 1015-1028 (1999), which is incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, heat sink materials include
commercially available materials, such as PureTemp™ phase change materials, available from Entropy Solutions Inc., Plymouth, Minnesota.
The heat sink materials used for a given embodiment may vary depending on the desired internal temperature of the storage region 130 and the length of intended use, as well as other factors such as cost, weight and toxicity of the heat sink material. Although in the embodiments described herein the heat sink materials are only intended for use within a sealed heat sink unit, toxicity of a heat sink material may be relevant for manufacturing or disposal purposes. As an example, for embodiments wherein the storage region 130 is intended to be maintained between approximately 2 degrees to
approximately 8 degrees Centigrade for a period of 30 days or greater, water ice or a water-ice combination may be used as a heat sink material.
In the embodiments described herein, the substantially thermally sealed storage container includes one or more stored material modules. The substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 may include stored material modules within a storage region 130 in association with a storage structure 200. A stored material module may be configured to reversibly mate with the edge of an aperture 220, 210 in the storage structure 200, as illustrated in Figure 3. A stored material module may be configured for use with a given size container 100 and storage structure 200 with apertures 220, 210 of specific dimensions. For example, a stored material module may be of a height suitable to fit a storage structure 200 within a storage region 130 in an upright position without coming into contact with the interior surface of the storage region 130. For example, a stored material module may be cylindrical and fit with minimal extra space within an aperture 220, 210 of a storage structure 130.
As used herein, "stored material modules" refers to modular units configured for storage of materials within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. Stored material modules are modular and configured to be removable and interchangeable.
Stored material modules are configured to be removable and interchangeable with each other as well as with heat sink units, i.e. of a similar size and shape. Stored material modules such as those described herein are configured to fit, with minimal open space, within an aperture 220, 210 within a storage structure 200. Stored material modules may include a plurality of storage units. For example, a stored material module may include a plurality of cups, drawers, inserts, indentations, cavities, or chambers, each of which may be a storage unit configured for storage of material. In some embodiments, stored material modules are configured to be interchangeable with heat sink units. Stored material modules may be configured to be fixed in place within a storage region 130 with a storage structure 200. Stored material modules may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment. Materials for inclusion in a stored material module may be selected based on properties such as thermal conductivity, durability over time, stability of the material when subjected to particular temperatures, stability, strength, cost, weight, density, and availability. In some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from metals. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from stainless steel. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from aluminum. In some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from plastics. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from polyethylene. For example, in some embodiments, heat sink modules are fabricated from polypropylene.
Figure 3 illustrates aspects of a storage structure 200 and a plurality of modules 300, including heat sink modules 310 and stored material modules 320. As illustrated in Figure 3, the storage structure 200 is configured for receiving and storing a plurality of modules 300, wherein the modules include at least one heat sink module 310 and at least one stored material module 320. As illustrated in Figure 3, the storage structure 200 is configured for interchangeable storage of a plurality of modules 300, wherein the modules include at least one heat sink module 310 and at least one stored material module 320.
The storage structure 200, as illustrated in Figure 3, includes a planar structure including a plurality of circular apertures 220, 210 (see Figure 2). The plurality of modules 300 illustrated in Figure 3 are configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of the circular apertures 220, 210. The plurality of modules 300 are configured to be interchangeable at different locations within the storage structure 200. The storage structure 200 includes circular apertures 220, 210 of substantially equivalent size and spacing configured to facilitate the modular format of the plurality of modules 300. Although the container 100 exterior is not depicted in Figure 3, the storage structure 200 and the plurality of modules 300 are configured for inclusion within a storage region 130 of a container 100.
A stored material module 320, as illustrated in Figure 3, includes a plurality of storage units 330. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 3, the storage units 330 are arranged in a columnar structure within the stored material module 320. Each storage module 320 includes a plurality of storage units positioned in a columnar array. In some embodiments, the plurality of storage units 330 may be of a substantially equivalent size and shape, as depicted in Figure 3. In some embodiments, the plurality of storage units 330 may be positioned in a columnar array and wherein the storage units 330 are of a substantially equivalent horizontal dimension and wherein the plurality of storage units 330 include individual storage units 330 of at least two distinct vertical dimensions.
Storage units 330 with fixed horizontal dimensions may be stacked in a linear array.
However, storage units 330 with fixed width or diameter need not have the same height.
In some embodiments, storage units 330 of varying heights may be desirable for storage of materials of varying sizes or heights. For example, in embodiments configured for storage of medicinal vials, such as vaccine vials, storage units 330 of varying heights may be configured for storage of different size vaccine vials. A storage unit 330 may be configured, for example, for storage of standard-size 2 cc vaccine vials, or standard-size 3 cc vaccine vials. A stored material module 320 may also include a cap 340. The cap 340 may be configured to enclose the adjacent storage unit 330. The cap may be removable and replicable. A central stabilizer 350 may be attached to a stored material module 320. A central stabilizer 350 may be attached to a cap 340 reversibly, for example with a threaded screw on the central stabilizer 350 configured to mate with a threaded aperture on the surface of the cap 340.
Stored material modules 320 and associated stored material units 330 may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment. For example, the stored material modules 320 and stored material units 330 may be fabricated from a low thermal mass plastic, or a rigid foam material. In some embodiments the stored material modules 320 and stored material units 330 may be fabricated from acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) plastic. In some embodiments the stored material modules 320 may include metal components.
In some embodiments, a storage structure 200 and a plurality of modules 300, including heat sink modules 310 and stored material modules 320 may be configured for interchangeable storage of heat sink modules 310 and stored material modules 320. The choice of the type and number of heat sink modules 310 and stored material modules 320 may vary for any particular use of the container 100. For example, in an embodiment where the stored material modules 320 are required to be stored for a longer period of time in a predetermined temperature range, relatively fewer stored material modules 320 and relatively more heat sink modules 310 may be included. For example, in an embodiment such as depicted in Figure 3, a total of nine heat sink modules may be included in the outer ring of the storage structure 200 and a single stored material module 320 may be included in the center of the ring. An embodiment such as depicted in Figure 3 may, for example, be configured to store a single stored material module 320 and a total of nine heat sink modules 310 including water ice for at least three months at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C. An embodiment such as depicted in Figure 3 may, for example, be configured to store two stored material modules 320 and a total of eight heat sink modules 310 including water ice for at least two months at a temperature between 0 degrees C and 10 degrees C.
Other configurations and relative numbers of stored material modules 320 and heat sink modules 310 may be utilized, depending on the particular container 100 and desired storage time in a particular temperature range. Other configurations and ratios of stored material modules 320 and heat sink modules 310 may be included in a particular container 100 depending on the desired storage time in a particular temperature range. Other configurations and ratios of stored material modules 320 and heat sink modules 310 may be included in a particular container 100 depending on the number of access events during the desired storage time in a particular temperature range. A heat sink, module 310 including a particular volume of heat sink material at a particular temperature may be estimated to have a particular amount of energy storage, such as in joules of energy.
Assuming a constant heat leak in the container 100, an incremental value of energy, e.g. joules, per time of storage may be calculated. Assuming a constant access energy loss to a storage region in a container, an incremental value of energy, e.g. joules, per access to a storage region may be calculated. For a particular use, heat sink module(s) 310 with corresponding values of energy storage, e.g. joules, may be included as calculated per time of storage. For a particular use, heat sink module(s) 310 with corresponding values of energy storage, e.g. joules, may be included as calculated per access to the storage region e.g. removal and/or insertion of stored material).
Figure 4 illustrates aspects of a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 including stored material modules 310, 320. Figure 4 depicts an inner wall 110 and an attached connector 115 in cross-section. In the interests of illustrating the inner components of the container 100, an outer wall 105 and other aspects of the container are not depicted in Figure 4. The storage region 130 within the inner wall 110 contains multiple storage modules 310, 320. Figure 4 illustrates two heat sink modules 310 in cross-section. As is evident in the cross- section view, each of the two heat sink modules 310 includes two heat sink units, forming an upper and a lower heat sink region relative to the orientation of Figure 4. Each of the heat sink modules 310 includes a cap 360. The cap 360 may be configured to be removable, for example with screw- type threading configured to mate with an edge of the heat sink unit. In some embodiments, a heat sink unit or module may not include a cap 360 but instead by constitutively sealed. In some embodiments, the cap 360 may include a flange, handle, knob or shaft configured to enable the insertion and removal of the heat sink module 310 from the container 100. For example, a cap 360 may include a thin flexible arc of material externally to the cap, the arc of material of suitable strength to allow its use as a handle for the insertion and removal of the heat sink module 310 from the storage region 130. A heat sink module 310 may be cylindrical, as illustrated in Figure 4. A heat sink module 310 may contain, for example, water, water ice, and/or air. A heat sink module 310 may contain a heat sink material that may be recharged, such as water (i.e. by re-cooling or re- freezing). A heat sink module 310 may contain a heat sink material that may be replaced (i.e. by opening a cap 360). The illustrated heat sink modules 310 are substantially cylindrical in shape and include caps 360 configured for reversible opening of the heat sink modules 310. For example, the heat sink modules 310 may be opened for recharging or replacement of heat sink material within the heat sink modules 310. In some embodiments, the heat sink modules 310 may be sealed closed (e.g. with a welding joint) and not configured for reversible opening. The heat sink modules 310 may include two or more heat sink units (e.g. top and bottom relative to Figure 4). Heat sink units may be attached to form a heat sink module 310 with a module joint, for example an adhesive attachment, a weld attachment, or a screw-type reversible attachment.
Some embodiments include a plurality of heat sink modules 310 of a substantially cylindrical shape as depicted in Figures 3 and 4. The materials used in the fabrication of the heat sink units may depend, for example, on the thermal properties of the heat sink material stored in the heat sink modules 310. The materials used in the fabrication of the heat sink modules 310 may depend, for example, on cost, weight, availability, and durability. The heat sink modules 310 may be fabricated from stainless steel of an appropriate type and thickness to the embodiment. The heat sink modules 310 may include water stored internally as a heat sink material. For example, substantially cylindrical heat sink modules 310 may be fabricated from stainless steel and
approximately 90% filled with water. The heat sink modules 310 may then be placed horizontally and frozen in an environment set to approximately -20 degrees C (for example, a standard freezer). After a sufficient time for the water within the heat sink modules 310 to freeze, the heat sink modules may be removed and placed at
approximately 20 degrees C (for example, an average room temperature) until some of the water turns to ice. See, for example, "Preventing Freeze Damage to Vaccines," WHO publication WHO/IVB/07.09, and Magennis et al., "Pharmaceutical Cold Chain: a Gap in the Last Mile," Pharmaceutical & Medical Packaging News, Supply Chain Management Supplement, 44-50 (September, 2010), which are herein incorporated by reference. Once the heat sink modules 310 contain both ice and liquid water, they are ready for use in a storage region 130 within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 with an approximate temperature range between 0 degrees C to 10 degrees C.
Figure 4 depicts a stored material module 320 in cross-section in the center of the storage region 130. The stored material module 320 includes a series of stored material units 330 arranged in a columnar array. Each of the stored material units 330 includes a side region 440 and a bottom region 430 positioned at substantially right angles to the side region 440. Each of the stored material units 330 includes a plurality of apertures 410 in the bottom of the stored material unit 330. Such apertures may be configured to improve thermal circulation around stored material within the stored material unit 330. Such apertures may be configured to improve air flow around stored material within the stored material unit 330. The stored material module 320 includes a base 420 at the lower end of the module 320, the base having an external surface configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of the center aperture 210 in the storage structure 200.
A stored material module 320 may be configured to reversibly mate with an aperture in a storage structure (see e.g. Figures 9, 10 and 11). The stored material module 320 includes a plurality of stored material units 330. Although each of the stored material units 330 depicted in Figures 3 and 4 are of a similar vertical dimension, or height, in some embodiments the stored material units 330 may be of a variety of vertical dimensions, or heights. Each of the stored material units 330 is configured in a cup-like shape. Each of the stored material units 330 includes a side region 440 and a bottom region 430 positioned at substantially right angles to the side region 440. Each of the stored material units 330 may include a plurality of apertures 410 in the bottom of the cuplike unit. The stored material units 330 are arrayed in a columnar stack, with most of the stored material units 330 resting on top of a lower stored material unit 330. At the bottom of the column of stored material units 330, the lowest stored material unit 330 sits on top of a stored material module base 420. At the top of the column of stored material units 330, the highest stored material unit 330 is covered with a cap 340. The cap 340 includes an attachment region 370. Although not illustrated in Figures 3 and 4, in some
embodiments a stored material module 320 includes a flange, knob, handle or shaft configured to enable removal and insertion of the stored material module 320 into a storage region 130. Although not illustrated in Figures 3 and 4, in some embodiments a stored material module 320 includes an indentation along at least one vertical side, the indentation configured for insertion and support of wires as part of an information system. Although not illustrated in Figures 3 and 4, in some embodiments a stored material module 320 includes an indentation along at least one vertical side, the indentation configured for insertion and support of wires as part of a sensor system.
At the top of the stored material module 320 illustrated in cross-section, Figure 4 depicts an attachment region 370 configured for reversible attachment of a central stabilizer unit 350 to the stored material module 320. For example, the attachment region 370 may include a threaded region configured to reversibly mate with a threaded region on a central stabilizer unit 350. The central stabilizer unit 350 may be configured from a material with low thermal conductivity, such as a low thermal mass plastic, or a rigid foam material. The central stabilizer unit 350 may be configured to substantially fill the conduit 125 in the connector 115. The central stabilizer unit 350 may be configured to provide " lateral stabilization and/or support to the attached the stored material module 320. As illustrated in Figure 4, a distal end of a central stabilizer unit 350 may protrude beyond the end of the connector 115.
Figure 5 illustrates aspects of an apparatus for use with a substantially thermally sealed storage container. An apparatus, as illustrated in Figure 5, includes: a stored material module including a plurality of storage units configured for storage of medicinal units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container and including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit; a storage stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the stored material module; a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one storage stabilizer unit; and a central stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit in the substantially thermally sealed storage container. The size and shape of the apparatus is dependent on the particular container 100 with which the apparatus is used. For example, the stored material module base 420 is configured to reversibly mate with the surface of an aperture in the storage structure 200, while the lid 500 is configured to remain external to the container 100. The apparatus, therefore, must be of an appropriate length (e.g. along the axis between the stored material module base 420 and the lid handle 510) to allow the stored material module base 420 to reversibly mate with the surface of an aperture in the storage structure 200, while simultaneously allowing the lid 500 to remain external to the container 100. Similarly, the stored material module base 420, the stored material module 320 and the central stabilizer 350 of the apparatus are configured to be reversibly inserted and removed from the interior of the container 100 through the conduit 125. The apparatus, therefore, must be of a diameter (i.e. approximately horizontal relative to Figure 5) across the stored material module base 420, the stored material module 320 and the central stabilizer 350 to fit within the conduit 125.
Preferably, the central stabilizer 350 has a diameter similar to the minimal diameter of the conduit 125, so that there is minimal air space between the outer surface of the central stabilizer 350 and the surface of the connector 115 when the apparatus is in use within the container 100. An apparatus such as illustrated in Figure 5 also should be of a weight and size suitable for handling by a person. For example, the apparatus should be configured to allow an individual person to easily pull the apparatus partially out of the container 100 with one hand, and to remove stored material from a storage unit 330 with the opposite hand. For example, the total apparatus such as illustrated in Figure 5 should be no more than 3 kg, or no more than 5 kg, or no more than 7 kg, or no more than 10 kg when in use with stored material included within the storage units 330 A-I.
Components of the apparatus may be fabricated from a variety of materials, depending on the embodiment. For example, multiple components may be fabricated from materials selected for attributes such as cost, strength, density, weight, durability, low thermal transfer properties, resistance to corrosion, and thermal stability. Some of the components may be fabricated from a rigid plastic material, such as polyoxymethylene (POM) or Delrin™. Some of the components may be fabricated from stainless steel. Some of the components may be fabricated from aluminum. Some of the components may be fabricated from glass-reinforced plastic (GRP) or fiberglass.
As shown in Figure 5, a stored material module 320 includes a plurality of storage units, 330A, 330B, 330C, 330D, 330E, 330F, 330G, 330H, and 3301. The storage units 330A-I are positioned in a columnar array in the stored material module 320. The storage units 330A-I are positioned as a vertical stack within the stored material module 320. As illustrated, the storage units 330 A-I are configured to be interchangeable within the stored material module 320. For example, storage unit 330 B and storage unit 330 D may be removed from the stored material module 320 and switched in position within the stored material module 320 (i.e. so the storage unit order would be A, D, C, B, E, F, G, H, I) without loss of function or significant changes in the total size and shape of the stored material module 320. As illustrated, storage units 330A-I are of a substantially similar size and shape. In some embodiments, there may be at least two storage units 330 of a similar diameter relative to the column of the stored material module 320 but with distinct lengths, or heights relative to the stored material module 320 illustrated in Figure 5. Such differently-sized storage units 330 may be suitable for storage of materials of different sizes within a single stored material module 320. For example, medicinal vials, such as vaccine vials, of different heights may be stored within a single stored material module 320 in distinct storage units 330 with different heights.
Each of the storage units 330A-I are configured for storage of medicinal units, more specifically each of the storage units 330A-I are configured for storage of medicinal vials, such as vaccine vials, of a set size and shape. Each of the storage units 330A-I are configured for storage of a number of vaccine vials, depending on the size of the vaccine vials (i.e. 2 cc or 3 cc vials). Given the space available, each of the storage units 330A-I are configured to store a maximum number of medicinal vials, for example less than 30 medicinal vials, less than 20 medicinal vials, or less than 10 medicinal vials. In some embodiments, one or more of the plurality of the storage units 330A-I are configured to store prefiUed medicinal syringes and associated packaging, for example prefiUed syringes containing vaccine. Given the space available and the packaging associated with a prefiUed syringe, each of the storage units 330A-I may be configured to store a maximum number of prefilled medicinal syringes, for example less than 25 medicinal syringes, less than 20 medicinal syringes, less than 15 medicinal syringes, less than 10 medicinal syringes, or less than 5 medicinal syringes. Additional packaging, padding or
contamination-limiting material may be added to one or more storage unit 330 A-I as desirable for a specific embodiment and type of stored material. One or more storage units 330A-I may also be left empty during use of the container, depending on the needs of the user.
The stored material module 320 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container. More specifically, the stored material module 320 includes a stored material module base 420 operably attached to the stored material module at an end of the stored material module distal to the stored material module cap. The exterior surface of the stored material module base 420 is configured to reversibly mate with the edge surface of an aperture 220, 210 in the storage structure 200 (not illustrated in Figure 5). In some embodiments, as illustrated in Figures 26-31 and as discussed more fully in the associated text, a stored material module base 420 includes one or more apertures with edges configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of a stabilizer unit. The apparatus depicted in Figure 5 also includes a storage stabilizer unit 570 configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module 320. Each of the plurality of storage units 330A-I within the stored material module 320 include a surface configured to reversibly mate with an outer surface of the storage stabilizer unit 570. See also Figures 9-1 1 and associated text. As illustrated in Figure 5, a single storage stabilizer unit 570 of a substantially rod-like shape is positioned along the outer edge of the surface of the stored material module 320. In some embodiments, there may be two or more storage stabilizer units 570. The selection on number and positioning of the storage stabilizer units 570 will depend on the intended use of a substantially thermally sealed storage container, for example the expected motion to the substantially thermally sealed storage container in transport or during use. A storage stabilizer unit 570 is configured to provide lateral support for the stored material module 320 column, maintaining the structure of the stored material module 320 during use. Depending on the embodiment, a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from material such as stainless steel, plastic, or glass-reinforced plastic. For durability, a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from a material that resists corrosion and maintains its properties in a given intended use. For example, in embodiments wherein the intended use includes maintaining an internal storage region 130 of a container 100 between 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade, a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from a material predicted to maintain its strength and structure at in that temperature range. For example, in embodiments wherein the intended use includes humid conditions, a storage stabilizer unit 570 may be fabricated from a material with low corrosion properties in those conditions. Figures 11 , 12 and 21-29 and associated text further describe storage stabilizer units 570.
As illustrated in Figure 5, the apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340 configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units (e.g. 330 A as illustrated in Figure 5) within the stored material module 320 and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one storage stabilizer unit 570. The stored material module cap 340 is configured to be positioned at one end of the columnar array of stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320. A stored material module cap 340 may include at least one aperture with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a tab of a stored material unit 330. A stored material module cap 340 may include at least one aperture configured to attach a fastener between the stored material module 320 and the stored material module cap 340. Depending on the embodiment, a stored material module cap 340 may be fabricated from a number of materials of low thermal density and sufficient strength and durability. For example, a stored material module cap 340 may be fabricated from low thermal density plastic, or glass-reinforced plastic.
A stored material module cap 340 is configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a central stabilizer unit 350. The cap may include a connection region 370, as described in more detail in Figures 13-17. A connection region 370 may include a base and a rim, with a surface of the connection region 370 configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the central stabilizer 350. A connection region 370 is configured to allow a user to reversibly slide the stored material module 320 and the central stabilizer unit 350 and to maintain their relative positions during use of the apparatus. A stored material module cap 340 may include a connection region 370, including an aperture; and a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a surface of the central stabilizer 350. For example, an aperture in a stored material module cap 340 may be configured to allow for a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector positioned to mate with a
corresponding connector on a central stabilizer unit 350. A stored material module cap 340 may include a surface region configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and a central stabilizer 350.
The apparatus illustrated in Figure 5 also includes a central stabilizer unit 350. The central stabilizer unit 350 is configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap 340, wherein the central stabilizer unit 350 is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit 125 in the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The central stabilizer unit 350 is positioned with a central axis substantially identical to the column formed by the stored material module 340 during regular use. The central stabilizer unit 350 includes a base 560, wherein the base 560 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap 340. The central stabilizer unit 350 may include an aperture 550 configured for user access to a fastener release for a fastener between the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module 340. The central stabilizer unit 350 may include a fastener positioned to reversibly attach the central stabilizer unit to the stored material module cap 340. The central stabilizer unit 350 may include a mechanical release operably attached to the fastener, the release positioned for access from an exterior surface of the central stabilizer unit 350, such as through an aperture 550.
The apparatus illustrated in Figure 5 includes a lid 500 attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit 350 at a site distal to the stored material module cap 340. The lid 500 is attached to a handle 510 on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit 350. The lid 500 includes a display 520, for example a digital display unit, such as a monitor, screen, or video display device. The display 520 may be integral to the lid 500. A display 520 may be a LCD display. The lid may also include an electromechanical user input device 530, such as a button operably attached to circuitry. In some embodiments, the user input device 530 and associated circuitry is operably attached to the display 520, for example so that a signal is sent to the display 520 when the user input device 530 is operated by a user. For example, a person may depress a button user input device 530 and send a signal to the circuitry system, causing the system to respond by sending a signal to display the most recent sensor readings on the display 520. The lid 500 may include an access aperture 540 for access to a connector operably connected to circuitry positioned under the lid 500. In various embodiments, the lid 500 may be fabricated out of a variety of materials with low thermal conductivity and appropriate durability, hardness and strength. For example, the lid may be fabricated from a suitable plastic, glass-impregnated plastic, or aluminum.
Although not shown in Figure 5, in some embodiments the lid 500 serves as a cover for a circuitry system located in the space under the lid and external to the container 100. For example, a circuitry system may include a global positioning device (i.e. GPS) and be configured to send a signal to a display 520 at set intervals, or in response to an input signal when a user input device 530 is operated by a user. For example, a circuitry system may be operably connected to a temperature sensor located on a stored material module 320 or within a stabilizer unit 570, the circuitry system configured to send a signal to a display 520 at set intervals, or in response to an input signal when a user input device 530 is operated by a user. In some embodiments, a circuitry system may be operably connected to an electromechanical switch located on a surface of the lid 500 in a region configured to mate with a surface of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 when the lid 500 is positioned on a container 100. Such an electromechanical switch may be configured with the associated circuitry to maintain a closed electrical circuit when the switch is engaged (i.e. pressed down by the pressure of the surface of the container 100 against the lid 500). A circuitry system and associated electromechanical switch located on a surface of the lid 500 may be configured to sound an alarm, such as a specific signal on the display 520, in response to the electromechanical switch being unengaged and the associated closed electrical circuit broken. A circuitry system may be configured to record data, for example from a sensor, over time. A circuitry system may be configured to display data on the display 520 in response to a user of the apparatus operating the user input device 530. A circuitry system may be configured to display data on the display 520 in response to predetermined parameters, such as a preset GPS coordinate being detected or a preset temperature being detected by an attached sensor.
A circuitry system may include at least one power source. An electrical power source may originate, for example, from municipal electrical power supplies, electric batteries, or an electrical generator device. A power source may include an electrical connector configured to connect with a municipal electrical power supply, for example through a connection associated with an access aperture 540 in the lid 500. A power source may include a battery pack. A power source may include an electrical generator, for example a solar-powered generator. In some embodiments, sensors within the apparatus may also be operably connected to a power source located under the lid 500. For example, power source such as a battery pack may be operably connected to a temperature sensor located in a stabilizer unit through wires running through the stabilizer unit, through an aperture in the stored material module cap 340, through an aperture in the central stabilizer 350 to circuitry located under the lid 500. For example, power source such as a battery pack may be operably connected to display 520 associated with the surface of the lid 500.
A circuitry system may be operably connected to a computing device, such as via a wire connection, such as joined through an access aperture 540 in the lid 500 or a wireless connection. The computing device may include a display, such as a monitor, screen, or video display device. The computing device may include a user interface, such as a keyboard, keypad, touch screen or computer mouse. A computing device may be a desktop system, or it may include a computing device configured for mobility, for example a PDA, tablet-type device, laptop, or mobile phone. A system user may use the computing device to obtain information regarding the circuitry system and apparatus, query the circuitry system, or set predetermined parameters regarding the circuitry system. For example, a remote system user, such as an individual person operating a remote computing device, may send signals to the circuitry system with instructions to set the parameters of acceptable temperature readings from a temperature sensor, and instructions to transmit a signal to the display 520 if temperature readings deviate from the acceptable parameters.
A circuitry system may include a controller. A circuitry system may include a power distribution unit. The power distribution unit may be configured, for example, to conserve the energy use by the system over time. The power distribution unit may be configured, for example, to minimize total energy within the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 within the container 100, for example by minimizing power distribution to one or more sensors located within the stored material module 320 or stabilizer unit 570. The power distribution unit may include a battery capacity monitor. The power distribution unit may include a power distribution switch. The power distribution unit may include charging circuitry. The power distribution unit may be operably connected to a power source. For example, the power distribution unit may be configured to monitor electricity flowing between the power source and other components within the circuitry system. A wire connection may operably connect a power distribution unit to a power source.
Depending on the embodiment, the circuitry system may include additional components. For example, the circuitry system may include at least one indicator, such as a LED indicator or a display indicator. For example, the circuitry system may include at least one indicator that provides an auditory indicator, such as an auditory transmitter configured to produce a beep, tone, voice signal or alarm. For example, the circuitry system may include at least one antenna. An antenna may be configured to send and/or receive signals from a sensor network. An antenna may be configured to send and/or receive signals from an external network, such as a cellular network, or as part of an ad- hoc system configured to provide information regarding a group of substantially thermally sealed containers 100. The circuitry system may include one or more global positioning devices (e.g. GPS). The circuitry system may include one or more data storage units, such as computer DRAM, hard disk drives, or optical disk drives. The circuitry system may include circuitry configured to process data from a sensor network. The circuitry system may include logic systems. The circuitry system may include other components as suitable for a particular embodiment. The circuitry system may include one or more external network connection device. An external network connection device may include a cellular phone network transceiver unit. An external network connection device may include a WiFi™ network transceiver unit. An external network connection device may include an Ethernet network transceiver unit. An external network connection device may be configured to transmit with Short Message Service (SMS) protocols. An external network connection device may be configured to transmit to a general packet radio service (GPRS). An external network connection device may be configured to transmit to an ad-hoc network system. An external network connection device may be configured to transmit to an ad-hoc network system such as a peer to peer communication network, a self-realizing mesh network, or a ZigBee™ network.
Figure 6 illustrates aspects of the use of an apparatus such as that shown in Figure 5. Figure 6 illustrates how components of the apparatus may shift relative to each other for access of stored material within the storage units 330 A-I. In the view shown in Figure 6, some of the plurality of stored material units 330 A-I have moved relative to the column of the stored material module 320. Stored material units 330 A and 330 B have moved vertically, or upwards as viewed in Figure 6, relative to the remainder of the column of the stored material module 320 including stored material units 330 C-I and the base 420. The relative movement of the stored material units 330 A and 330 B allows a user of the apparatus to access material stored in stored material unit 330 B, for example by grasping a stored medicinal vial therein with the user's fingers. Similarly, the relative movement of the stored material units 330 A and 330 B allows a user of the apparatus to insert material into stored material unit 330 B, for example by placing medicinal vial from a user's fingers into stored material unit 330 B. Depending on the embodiment, the relative movement of the stored material units (e.g. 330 A and 330 B in Figure 6) should be sufficient to allow access to the stored material within the stored material units. For example, stored material units that were previously in contact with each other (e.g. 330 B and 330 C in Figure 5) should move at least 3 cm, at least 4 cm, or at least 5 cm apart depending on the size of the stored material. For example, stored material units that were previously in contact with each other (e.g. 330 B and 330 C in Figure 5) should move at least as far from each other as the height of the wall of the unit from which material will be removed (e.g. 330 C in Figure 6). As depicted in Figure 6, in some embodiments there are multiple storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. The storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are each configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units 330 A-I within the stored material module 320 and configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of each of the storage stabilizer units 330 A-I. For example, as illustrated in Figure 6, the storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are configured as tubular structures, and the storage units 330 A-I are configured with a circular surface region that reversibly mates with the surfaces of the tubular structures. As illustrated in Figure 6, distinct storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B may be of different relative diameters. For example, storage stabilizer unit 570 A may be of approximately double the diameter of storage stabilizer unit 570 B. For example, storage stabilizer unit 570 A may have a diameter of approximately one centimeter, while storage stabilizer unit 570 B may have a diameter of approximately a half centimeter. In some embodiments, the plurality of storage units 330 A-I are configured to slide along an axis substantially defined by one or more storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. As illustrated in Figure 6, the storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are configured as tubular structures, and the storage units 330 A-I are configured with a corresponding surface region that reversibly mates with and can slide along the surfaces of the tubular structures. Wherein there are distinct storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B of different relative diameters, the corresponding storage units 330 A-I surfaces configured to mate with the surfaces of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570B are similarly of different sizes (see Figures 9-11 and associated text). The embodiment illustrated in Figure 6 includes two storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B, however in some embodiments there may be a single storage stabilizer unit or more than two storage stabilizer units. The choice of number and relative positioning of storage stabilizer units depends on the intended use of a particular container 100. For example a container 100 designed for use in a relatively stable setting may require fewer storage stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B than a container 100 designed for frequent transport or relocation in use. Depending on the intended use of the container 100, a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be fabricated from a variety of materials. The choice of material may be made relative to considerations such as durability, thermal properties, corrosion resistance and cost. In some embodiments, a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be fabricated from plastic, or glass-reinforced plastic. Figure 7 illustrates an apparatus such as that shown in Figure 5 in a full side view. An apparatus in the configuration illustrated in Figure 7 is suitable for use with, and placement in, a substantially thermally sealed container 100. An apparatus such as illustrated in Figure 7 includes a lid 500 with an integral handle 510 and a user input device 530, such as an electromagnetic switch. The lid 500 is attached to a central stabilizer unit 350 at an opposing end from the base 560 of the central stabilizer unit 350. The central stabilizing unit 350 includes an aperture 550 configured to allow a user of the apparatus to access a fastener within the central stabilizing unit 350, such as a fastener configured to reversibly hold the central stabilizing unit in position relative to a stored material module cap 340. The apparatus includes a stored material module 320 attached to the stored material module cap 340 at an opposing face of the stored material module cap 340 from the central stabilizing unit 350. The stored material module 320 includes a plurality of storage units (e.g. 330) arrayed in a vertical stack with the top edge of each storage unit in the stack in contact with the corresponding lower edge of the adjacent storage unit. The bottom of the stored material module 320 includes a stored material module base 420. In the view illustrated in Figure 7, all of the' storage units (e.g. 330) within the stored material module 320 are in the storage position, without substantial gaps or distance between the storage units. Although not illustrated in Figure 7, the apparatus may also include one or more storage stabilizer unit located behind the storage units in the instant view.
Figure 8 depicts an apparatus such as the one shown in Figure 7, in a similar full side view. The apparatus illustrated in Figure 8 includes the same features as in Figure 7, with the addition that two of the storage units (330 A and 330 B) are separated from the rest of the stack of storage units (330 C-I). This configuration would allow access to material stored within the storage unit identified as 330 C. As illustrated in Figure 8, the separation of the storage units 330 A and 330 B from the remainder of the units is along an axis substantially defined by two storage stabilizer units, 570 A and 570 B.
Corresponding to the relative movement of the storage units, the two ends of the apparatus, the handle 510 and the stored material module base 420, are separated from each other by the length of the distance between storage units 330 B and 330 C in Figure 8 relative to Figure 7.
Figure 9 illustrates aspects of a stored material unit 330. The illustrated stored material unit 330 includes a side wall 440. The side wall 440 is formed from a curved plane in a substantially cylindrical structure. The lower edge of the side wall 440 includes at least one indentation 940. The edges of the indentation 940 are configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of one or more corresponding tabs 900 on an adjacent stored material unit 330. A stored material unit 330 may include at least one tab structure 900 on an upper edge of the cup-like structure. A stored material unit 330 may include at least one indentation 940, wherein the indentation 940 is configured to reversibly mate with a tab structure 900 on an adjacent stored material unit 330. For example, a series of tab structures 900 and corresponding indentations 940 may assist in stabilization of a columnar array of stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320. A series of tab structures 900 and corresponding indentations 940 may be configured to minimize potential displacement of the stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320. A series of tab structures 900 and corresponding indentations 940 may be configured to increase stability of stored material units 330 in a stored material module 320 during addition or removal of stored material to one or more stored material units 330. A stored material unit 330 includes a bottom 430, which is substantially planar and attached to the side wall 440 at substantially right angles. The stored material unit bottom 430 may include one or more apertures 410, configured to allow air circulation through the stored material unit, such as during storage or when the apparatus is being inserted into or removed from a substantially thermally sealed container. The side wall 440 includes at least one gap 910, configured as a region of the side wall 440 that is shorter than other regions. A gap 910 may be oriented and configured to allow a user of the apparatus to view the interior of the stored material unit 330, such as any material stored within the stored material unit 330. A gap 910 may be oriented and configured to allow a user of the apparatus increased access to any material stored within the stored material unit 330, such as when the stored material unit is distanced from an adjacent stored material unit (e.g. as in Figure 8). A gap 910 may be configured to allow thermal circulation through a stored material unit 330. A gap 910 may be configured to allow air flow through the stored material unit 330. A gap 910 may be configured to allow visual identification of stored material within the stored material unit 330.
A stored material unit 330 may include at least one stabilizer unit attachment region 920, 930. As illustrated in Figure 9, the stored material unit 330 includes two stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930. As illustrated in Figure 9, each of the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 is configured with a surface of a size and shape to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit 570. For example, stabilizer unit attachment region 920 is configured to reversibly mate with the surface of stabilizer unit 570 B in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 5. For example, stabilizer unit attachment region 930 is configured to reversibly mate with the surface of stabilizer unit 570 A in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 5. Although the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 illustrated in Figure 9 are substantially cylindrical regions configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the tubular stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B in Figure 5, in some embodiments a stabilizer unit attachment region may be of another shape. For example, a stabilizer unit attachment region may be configured in a substantially oblong, rectangular, triangular or other shape as required for the surface to reversibly mate with the surface of a corresponding stabilizer unit. As illustrated in Figure 9, the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 have surfaces that are configured to allow the stabilizer unit to slide relative to the surface of the stored material unit 330. The stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 are of a length shorter than the length of the surface of a corresponding stabilizer unit. The stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 are configured to reversibly mate with a substantial region of the surface of a corresponding stabilizer unit as the surfaces move relative to each other.
Figure 10 illustrates aspects of a stored material unit 330. The view illustrated in Figure 10 is a "top down" view of a stored material unit 330 such as the one illustrated in Figure 9. A stored material unit 330 includes a side wall 440, and a bottom region 430.
The bottom region may include apertures 410, for example to promote air flow through the stored material unit 330. The side wall 440 may include one or more tab structures 900. The stored material unit 330 may include at least one stabilizer unit attachment region 920, 930. In embodiments wherein the stored material unit includes more than one stabilizer unit attachment region 920, 930, the regions may be of differing sizes and shapes, for example to promote stability, to maintain the directionality of the apparatus, or as suitable for other design requirements. For example, stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B include other features within their interiors as further illustrated in Figure 11.
Figure 11 depicts aspects of a stored material unit 330 in horizontal cross- section along with the associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B and lower stored material units in the columnar array. The view depicted in Figure 11 is similar to the view as illustrated in Figure 10, only with the addition of multiple lower stored material units as well as associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. A stored material unit 330 includes a side wall 440, and a bottom region 430. The side wall 440 may include one or more tab structures 900. The bottom region may include apertures 410, for example to promote air flow through the stored material unit 330. As visible in Figure 11, the apertures 410 in adjacent stored material units (e.g. 330 A, 330 B and 330 C in Figure 5) need not align or correspond in a linear array through the column.
The stored material unit 330 shown in Figure 11 includes stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 11, the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 are of similar curvilinear shapes with distinct diameters. Each of the stabilizer unit attachment regions 920, 930 have surfaces which reversibly mate with the exterior surfaces of stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. Each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B includes an inner tube and at least one exterior tube of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned as at least one interior and at least one exterior tube relative to each other, the tubes sized to slide relative to each other. The tubes included in each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B form a telescoping structure along the length of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. See also Figure 12. Each of the interior tubes included in each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B forms an interior aperture, including an interior space within each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. The interior space within a stabilizer unit 570A, 570B may include additional components. As illustrated in Figure 11 , the interior space within stabilizer unit 570 A includes a circuitry connector 1 1 10, such as common connectors between wires and circuitry components. A circuitry connector 1 1 10 may include, for example, a cable connector, a quick-disconnect, a keyed connector, a plug and socket connector, or other types of electrical connectors as suitable to a particular embodiment. As illustrated in Figure 1 1 , the interior space within stabilizer unit 570 B includes a retaining unit 1100. The retaining unit 1100 is configured to maintain tension on a rod, as further illustrated in Figure 17. In some embodiments, the interior space within a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B may be empty or include other components as suitable for a given embodiment.
Figure 12 illustrates a stored material module cap 340 and two associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B in the absence of a stored material module 320. Although a stored material module cap 340 and associated stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B are generally implemented in combination with a stored material module 320, the stored material module 320 has been removed from Figure 12 for purposes of illustration. As illustrated in Figure 12, a stored material module cap 340 includes an attachment region 370. Also as illustrated in Figure 12, each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B includes an inner tube and at least one exterior tube of different internal diameters. For example, Figure 12 illustrates that stabilizer unit 570 A includes an inner tube 1200 and an outer tube 1220, with the exterior surface of the inner tube 1200 positioned to reversibly mate with the interior surface of the outer tube 1220. The inner tube 1200 is positioned to slide relative to the outer tube 1220 in a telescoping fashion, so that the inner tube 1200 reversibly slides within the outer tube 1220. The end of the inner tube 1200 may be operably attached to a surface of the stored material module cap 340 if desired in a specific embodiment. Figure 12 also illustrates that stabilizer unit 570 B includes an outer tube 1210 and an inner tube 1230. The exterior surface of the inner tube 1230 positioned to reversibly mate with the interior surface of the outer tube 1210. The inner tube 1230 is positioned to slide relative to the outer tube 1210 in a telescoping fashion, so that the inner tube 1230 reversibly slides within the outer tube 1210. The end of the outer tube 1210 may be operably attached to a surface of the stored material module cap 340 if desired in a specific embodiment. Each of the stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B may also include a retaining unit operably attached to the inner tube 1200, 1230 and positioned to slide within an aperture in the corresponding outer tube 1220, 1210. See Figures 24 and 25 for further detail on these retaining units.
Figure 13 depicts aspects of a stored material module cap 340. The stored material module cap 340 includes connection region 370. The connection region 370 has a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a central stabilizer 350, such as an attachment region 560 of a base of a central stabilizer 350. The stored material module cap 340 is configured to reversibly attach to a central stabilizer 350. Stored material modules 320 configured to be placed in apertures 220 in an edge region of a storage structure 200 (see Figure 2 for example) may include different embodiments of a stored material module cap 340 as suitable for their configuration. Stored material modules 320 configured to be placed in apertures 220 in an edge region of a storage structure 200 (see Figure 2 for example) may also include a stored material module cap 340 as illustrated in Figure 13 to provide interchangeability and flexibility of configurations of the stored material modules 320 within a storage structure 200. The connection region 370 illustrated in Figure 13 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a central stabilizer 350, including a base of the connection region 1350 and a rim of a connection region 1340. The base of the connection region 1350 and a rim of a
connection region 1340 as illustrated in Figure 13 forms a flared structure configured to slide along a corresponding surface of a central stabilizer 350. The connection region 370 illustrated in Figure 13 also includes an indentation 1330. As depicted in Figure 13, an indentation 1330 may be of a size and shape to include a circuitry connector 1310, such as a universal serial bus (USB) connector. A circuitry connector 1310 may also include, for example, a cable connector, a quick-disconnect, a keyed connector, a plug and socket connector, or other types of electrical connectors as suitable to a particular embodiment. As shown in Figure 13, an indentation 1330 may be of a size and shape to expose a shaft 1320 within the stored material module cap 340.
The lower region of the stored material module cap 340 is configured to reversibly attach with the upper face of the topmost stored material unit 330 in a stored material module 320. For example, the stored material module cap 340 may include an aperture 1360 with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a tab structure 900 on a stored material unit 330. For example, a stored material module cap 340 may include one or more apertures 1300 configured to hold a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and an adjacent stored material unit 330. A stored material module cap 340 may also include a surface region 1370 configured to provide minimal overlap with a gap 910 in a stored material unit 330. A surface region 1370 configured to provide minimal overlap with a gap 910 in a stored material unit 330 may be configured to maximize the space available for a user of the system to access stored material in the stored material unit 330, for example by using fingers to remove stored material. In some embodiments, a user of the system may use a device, such as a rod, tongs, tweezers, pincers, pliers or similar devices.
Figure 14 depicts aspects, in an angled cross-section view, of a stored material module cap 340 such as illustrated in Figure 13. The stored material module cap 340 includes a connection region 370 with a base region 1350 and a rim region 1340. The stored material module cap 340 includes a lower region configured to reversibly attach to the upper face of the topmost stored material unit 330 in a stored material module 320. The lower region includes an aperture 1300 configured to hold a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and an adjacent stored material unit 330. The lower region includes a surface region 1370 configured to provide minimal overlap with a gap 910 in a stored material unit 330. As illustrated in Figure 14, the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330. The aperture 1330 is of sufficient dimensions to provide space for a circuitry connector 1310. The circuitry connector 1310 and the corresponding region of the stored material module cap 340 may include apertures configured for a fastener 1430 to attach the circuitry connector 1310 to the stored material module cap 340. The circuitry connector 1310 illustrated in Figure 14 is a universal serial bus (USB) type connector, but other types of circuitry connectors may be used in various embodiments as required by the specific circuitry of an embodiment. The circuitry connector 1310 includes an aperture 1400 positioned to reversibly mate with a
corresponding circuitry connector on a central stabilizer 350.
The stored material module cap 340 depicted in Figure 14 also includes interior structures configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 corning into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340. As will be further shown in the subsequent Figures, this transfer of force by mechanical parts results in one or more stabilizer units (e.g. 570 A, 570 B, not illustrated in Figure 14) held in a fixed position relative to the stored material module cap 340. As illustrated in Figure 14, the stored material module cap 340 includes an indentation 1330 of a size and shape to expose a shaft 1320 enclosed within an internal aperture of the stored material module cap 340. The shaft 1320 includes side regions of varying widths relative to the diameter of the shaft. The shaft includes side regions of varying diameters relative to the axis of the length of the shaft, or diameters approximately parallel with the top surface of the connection region 370 as illustrated in Figures 13 and 14. The shaft 1320 has an equilibrium position relative to the force along the axis of the shaft 1320 from the pressure of an attached spring 1450. The shaft 1320 is configured to transmit force along the axis of the shaft 1320 in response to pressure from a surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340, including the end of the shaft 1320. Contact of a central stabilizer 350 with the surface of the stored material module cap 340 at the end of the shaft 1320 results in the shaft 1320 to move within its associated aperture, resulting in a side region with a different and larger diameter to be placed adjacent to a rod 1410 attached to a rotating plate 1420. The different and larger diameter region of the shaft 1320 causes motion of the rotating plate 1420. As illustrated in Figure 14, the interior of the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1440 sufficient to allow for motion of the rotating plate 1420. Further aspects of interior structures configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340 are illustrated in the following Figures.
Figure 15 illustrates, in a full cross-section view, further aspects of a stored material module cap 340 such as depicted in Figure 14. The stored material module cap 340 includes a connection region 370 with a base region 1350 and a rim region 1340. As shown in Figure 15, the base region 1350 and rim region 1340 form a flanged region for reversibly mating with a corresponding surface of a central stabilizer 350. The stored material module cap 340 includes a lower region configured to reversibly attach with the upper face of the topmost stored material unit 330 in a stored material module 320. The lower region includes an aperture 1300 configured to hold a fastener between the stored material module cap 340 and an adjacent stored material unit 330. The stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330. The aperture 1330 is of sufficient dimensions to provide space for a circuitry connector 1310. The circuitry connector 1310 and the corresponding region of the stored material module cap 340 may include apertures configured for a fastener 1430 to attach the circuitry connector 1310 to the stored material module cap 340. The circuitry connector 1310 includes an aperture 1400 positioned to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a central stabilizer 350.
The stored material module cap 340 includes interior structures configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340. The stored material module cap 340 includes an internal aperture of a size and shape to include a shaft 1320 enclosed within the stored material module cap 340. In the confirmation illustrated, the shaft 1320 end projects above the lower edge of the aperture 1330. A central stabilizer 350 reversibly attached to the stored material module cap 340 would apply pressure to the shaft 1320 end, forcing the shaft downward relative to the view in Figure 15. A central stabilizer 350 reversibly attached to the stored material module cap 340 would apply pressure to the shaft 1320 end, pressing against a spring 1450 positioned at the base of the shaft 1320. The shaft 1320 includes side regions of varying widths relative to the diameter of the shaft 1320. For example, the shaft 1320 includes a region with a relatively small width 1510. The shaft 1320 has an equilibrium position relative to the force along the axis of the shaft 1320 from the pressure of an attached spring 1450. At the equilibrium position, the region of small width 1510 is adjacent to the end of an adjacent rod 1410. When the shaft 1320 is forced downward, or along its axis, due to contact the end of the shaft 1320 with the surface of the central stabilizer 350, the side region of the shaft 1320 adjacent to the rod 1410 is of a different and larger diameter than the region of small width 1510. The pressure on the rod 1410 causes motion of a rotating plate 1420. The interior of the stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1440 sufficient to allow for motion of the rotating plate 1420.
Figure 16 shows the interior structures of a stored material module cap 340, such as illustrated in the preceding Figures, with attached stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. The interior structures of the stored material module cap 340 are configured to transmit force across the stored material module cap 340 in response to the surface of a central stabilizer 350 coming into contact with the surface of the stored material module cap 340. In the view shown in Figure 16, a stored material module cap 340 is illustrated in a top-down cross-section view, which is substantially perpendicular to the view illustrated in Figure 15.
Figure 16 shows a stored material module cap 340 including apertures 1360 with edges configured to reversibly mate with the surfaces of corresponding tabs 900 on an adjacent stored material unit 330. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 16, the center region of attached stabilizer unit 570 A includes circuitry 1110. The embodiment illustrated in Figure 16 corresponds with the embodiment depicted in Figure 11, although the view is rotated 180 degrees in Figure 16 relative to Figure 11. The stored material module cap 340 region adjacent to attached stabilizer unit 570 A may include a slot 1610 configured to provide space for additional circuitry or wiring (not illustrated in Figure 16) connected to the circuitry 1110 in the center region of attached stabilizer unit 570 A. The center region of attached stabilizer unit 570 B includes a retaining unit 1100. The retaining unit 1 100 is configured to transmit force to the end of a rod 1600 attached to the rotating plate 1420 in opposition to the force transmitted via the movement of the rotating plate 1420. In response to the motion of the shaft 1320 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane of the rotating plate 1420 (see Figures 14 and 15), force is transmitted from the shaft 1320 to the adjacent rod 1410 and, correspondingly, to the rotating plate 1420. This transmission of force results in the motion of the rotating plate 1420, as illustrated by the double arrows in Figure 16. The movement of the rotating plate 1420 is limited by an attached rotation pin 1620, which is configured to restrict movement of the rotating plate 1420 along its plane, as illustrated by the double arrows in Figure 16. The movement of the rotating plate 1420 is also restricted by the edges of the aperture 1440. In response to the motion of the rotating plate 1420, the end of the rod 1600 is moved relative to the stabilizer unit 570 B and retaining unit 1100. This results in the position of the stabilizer unit 570 B relative to the stored material module cap 340, as further illustrated in Figure 17.
Figure 17 depicts an embodiment of a stored material module cap 340 attached to a stored material unit 330 and an associated stabilizer unit 570 B. A gap 910 in the side of the stored material unit 330 is visible in the embodiment illustrated in Figure 17. The stored material module cap 340 includes a base region 1350 and a rim region 1340 configured to reversibly mate with the surface of a central stabilizer unit 350 (not depicted in Figure 17). The stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330 and a circuitry connector 1310 within the aperture 1330. Another aperture 1440 is located in the interior of the stored material module cap 340. The interior aperture 1440 is of a size and shape to accommodate the rotating plate 1420. The movement of the rotating plate 1420 is limited by an attached rotation pin 1620, which is configured to permit motion of the rotating plate 1420 in a substantially horizontal direction relative to Figure 17. The movement of the rotating plate 1420 is also restricted by the edges of its associated aperture 1440. The rotating plate 1420 has an attached rod 1600.
In response to the motion of the rotating plate 1420, the rod tip 1710 moves through an aperture 1700 formed in the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of the stabilizer unit 570 B. Both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 include apertures of similar size and shape positioned to form the aperture 1700 in the stabilizer unit 570 B when the rods 1210, 1230 are in a specific relative position. In the embodiments illustrated, the rods 1210, 1230 form the aperture 1700 in the stabilizer unit 570 B when the stabilizer unit 570 B is in its shortest position, i.e. when the rods 1210, 1230 have maximum surface areas in contact. The position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 is limited by pressure from the surface of the retaining unit 1 100. In the
configuration illustrated in Figure 17, the stabilizer unit 570 B is in a restrained position relative to the stored material module cap 340. In the position illustrated in Figure 17, the position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 prevents the relative movement of the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230. The position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 prevents the telescoping extension of the stabilizer unit 570 B.
As can be envisioned from the combination of the above Figures as well as associated text, the embodiment illustrated is operated as follows. Physical pressure of a central stabilizer 350 depresses the end of a shaft 1320 positioned within the stored material module cap 340. The shaft 1320 includes regions of varying diameters, or widths, which provide varying degrees of force against a rod 1410 attached to a rotating plate 1420 within an internal aperture 1440 in the stored material module cap 340. The rotating plate has a second rod 1600 attached, and the rod tip 1710 of the second rod 1600 is positioned to reversibly fit within an aperture 1700 formed in both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of a stabilizer unit 570 B. A retaining unit 1100 located within the inner rod 1230 prevents the rod tip 1710 from substantially entering the interior of the inner rod 1230. The position of the rod tip 1710 within the aperture 1700 prevents the extension of stabilizer unit 570 B by blocking the relative movement of the inner surface of the outer rod 1210 and the outer surface of the inner rod 1230. As also can be envisioned from the Figures and associated text, the removal of the central stabilizer 350 from an adjacent stored material module cap 340 allows the spring 1450 operably attached to the shaft 1320 to extend the surface of the shaft 1320 above the surface of the stored material module cap 340. This brings a region of the shaft 1320 with a relatively small width 1510 into contact with the surface of a rod 1410 attached to a rotating plate 1420. The rotating plate 1420 then moves so that the rod tip 1710 of a second attached rod 1600 is no longer within the aperture 1700 in the stabilizer unit 570 B. In the absence of the rod tip 1710 of a second attached rod 1600 being within the aperture 1700 in the stabilizer unit 570 B, the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of the stabilizer unit 570 B may slide relative to each other, creating a telescoping stabilizer unit 570 B. This mechanism results in the stabilizer unit 570 B held in a fixed position relative to the stored material module cap 340. Although other embodiments may be envisioned by one of skill in the art, the function of the herein-described mechanism operates to retain the position and relative length of a stabilizer unit in relation to a stored material module cap when the apparatus is configured to store material.
Also as illustrated in Figure 17, one or more stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B may include internal retaining units 1720 which establish limits on the relative position of the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 of a stabilizer unit 570 A, 570 B. As illustrated in Figure 17, the inner rod 1230 of a stabilizer unit 570 B includes a retaining unit 1720 attached to the interior surface of the inner rod 1230. The retaining unit 1720 includes a projection 1750 configured to fit within a slit-like aperture (not visible in Figure 17) in both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230. The length of the slit-like aperture in both the outer rod 1210 and the inner rod 1230 establishes the maximum and minimum distance that the inner rod can move relative to the outer rod before the projection 1750 at the end of the slit-like aperture prevents further relative movement of the rods 1210, 1230.
Further aspects of internal retaining units 1720 are illustrated in the following Figures, particular Figures 21-25.
Figure 18 illustrates aspects of a central stabilizer unit 350. A central stabilizer unit 350 includes a base region 560, with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding surface of a stored material module cap 340 (not shown in Figure 18). The base region 560 includes one or more flanges 1850 configured to reversibly mate with the corresponding surface of a stored material module cap 340 and hold the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module cap 340 in a stable position relative to one another. As illustrated herein, the one or more flanges 1850 are configured to reversibly mate with the rim 1340 and the base 1350 of the attachment region 370 in a stored material module cap 340. The base region 560 includes an aperture 1830 configured to accommodate the attachment region 370 in a stored material module cap 340. The base region 560 may include a circuitry connector 1840 of a type to mate with the
corresponding circuitry connector 1310 in an attachment region 370 in a stored material module cap 340. For example, as illustrated herein the circuitry connector 1840 is a USB connector, however other types of connectors may be utilized depending on the embodiment. The circuitry connector 1840 is attached to the base region 560 at a position within the aperture 1830 to reversibly mate with the corresponding circuitry connector 1310 in an attachment region 370 in a stored material module cap 340. The stable positioning of the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module cap 340 (not shown in Figure 18) mates the respective circuitry connectors 1310, 1840.
Also as illustrated in Figure 18, the central stabilizer unit 350 includes an exterior wall 1810. The exterior wall 1810 may be fabricated from a material with sufficient durability and strength for the embodiment. The material used to fabricate the exterior wall 1810 should also have low thermal conduction. For example, some types of rigid plastics, or glass-impregnated plastics, are suitable materials for an exterior wall 1810 of a central stabilizer unit 350. The outer surface dimensions of a central stabilizer unit 350 are of a size and shape to fit within a connector 1 15. A central stabilizer unit 350 such as described herein should be of a size and shape to substantially fill the interior space of a conduit 125 in a substantially thermally sealed container 100 during use. The central stabilizer unit 350 includes an interior region 1800 as defined by the inner surface of the exterior wall 1810 of the central stabilizer unit 350. The interior region 1800 may be substantially filled with a low density, low thermal conduction material, such as low density plastic foam. Although not illustrated in Figure 18, in some embodiments circuitry connectors and/or circuitry may be within the interior region 1800. For example, there may be one or more wire connections in the interior region 1800 connecting circuitry units across the central stabilizer 350. For example, wires may be located in the interior region 1800 connecting the circuitry connector 1840 to a display unit (e.g. 520 of Figure 5) on the exterior of the container 100, or on a lid 500 (see Figures 5-8). The central stabilizer unit 350 may include an interior stabilizer 1820. An interior stabilizer 1820 may be included as necessary in some embodiments to further reinforce and stabilize the structure of the central stabilizer unit 350. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 18, the interior stabilizer 1820 is a hollow tube made of a material of suitable rigidity and low thermal conductivity, for example a rigid plastic material. Although not shown in Figure 18, the interior stabilizer 1820 may also be attached to a lid 500 (see Figures 5-8).
As illustrated in Figure 18, the central stabilizer unit 350 also includes an aperture 550 in the exterior wall 1810. The aperture 550 may include a fastener release handle 1860, configured to control a fastener within the central stabilizer unit 350. The fastener may be configured to stabilize the reversible attachment of the central stabilizer unit 350 to a stored material module cap 340.
Figure 19 illustrates an exterior view of a central stabilizer unit 350. The view presented in Figure 19 is similar to the view presented in Figure 18, only at a different angle to present aspects of the features of the central stabilizer unit 350. As illustrated in Figure 19, the exterior of a central stabilizer unit 350 is depicted in a horizontal view. The central stabilizer unit 350 shown includes an exterior wall 1810. The internal surface of the exterior wall 1810 substantially defines an interior region 1800. An interior stabilizer 1820 is located within the interior region 1800. As illustrated, the end of the interior stabilizer 1820 is positioned above the edge of the exterior wall 1810. This positioning may be helpful, for example, to attach a lid 500 (see Figures 5-8) to the central stabilizer unit 350. Figure 19 also illustrates an aperture 550 in the exterior wall 1810, and a fastener release handle 1860 located within the aperture 550.
The lower end of the central stabilizer unit 350, or the end configured to be inserted into a conduit of a substantially thermally stable container 100, includes a base region 560. The base region 560 is configured with surfaces of a size and shape to reversibly mate with corresponding surfaces on a stored material module cap 340 (not shown in Figure 19). The base region 560 includes one or more flanges 1850 configured to reversibly mate with the corresponding surface of a stored material module cap 340 and hold the central stabilizer unit 350 and the stored material module cap 340 in a stable position relative to one another. The base region 560 includes an aperture 1830 configured to accommodate a connection region 370 of a stored material module cap 340. The base region also includes a circuitry connector 1840.
Figure 20 illustrates a cross-section view of a central stabilizer unit 350 such as those depicted in Figures 18 and 19. The central stabilizer unit 350 includes an exterior wall 1810 and an interior region 1800. An interior stabilizer 1820 is located within the interior region 1800. One end of the interior stabilizer 1820 is attached to the base region 560 of the central stabilizer unit 350, and the other end projects beyond the edge of the exterior wall 1810. The interior stabilizer 1920 may be hollow and include an interior region 2000 configured to accommodate circuitry and circuitry connectors, such as wires. The base region 560 may also include at least one aperture 2010 configured to
accommodate circuitry and circuitry connectors, such as wires. The lower region of the base region 560 includes a flange 1850 with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding surface of a stored material unit cap 340 (not shown). An aperture 1830 in the lower portion of the base region 560 is configured to accommodate a stored material unit cap 340 (not shown). A circuitry connector 1840 is positioned to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector (e.g. 1310, not shown in Figure 20) on a stored material unit cap 340.
Figure 20 illustrates that a central stabilizer unit 350 may include an aperture 550 in the exterior wall 1810. The aperture 550 allows for user access to a fastener release handle 1860 located within the aperture 550. For example, a user may insert one or more fingers into the aperture 550 to operate the fastener release handle 1860. The fastener release handle is connected to a fastener 2020. The fastener 2020 is configured to reversibly provide tension on the surface of an adjacent stored material unit cap 340 (not shown), such as on a surface of a connection region 370 and/or the end of a shaft 1320. As illustrated in Figure 20, a fastener 2020 is adjacent to a fastener stabilizer 2040. The fastener stabilizer 2040 is attached to the internal surface of the exterior wall 1810. A spring 2030 positioned between the adjacent surfaces of the fastener 2020 and the fastener stabilizer 2040 provides force on the fastener surface in a direction away from the adjacent surface of the fastener stabilizer 2040. In the view shown in Figure 20, the force provided by the spring 2030 is in a substantially vertical, or downward, position. The fastener 2020 is thereby moved in contact with the surface of an adjacent stored material unit cap 340 (not shown). The fastener 2020 may be configured to depress a shaft 1320 and thereby to retain the position and relative length of a stabilizer unit 570 in relation to a stored material module cap 340 (not depicted in Figure 20). The fastener 2020 may be configured to provide tension on the surface of an adjacent stored material unit cap 340 and thereby stabilize the relative positions of the central stabilizer unit 350 and the adjacent stored material unit cap 340. A user of the apparatus may put pressure (i.e. from a finger) on the fastener release handle 1860 to reverse the movement of the fastener 2020 relative to the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 surface, releasing the associated tension and decoupling the fastener 2020 from the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 surface. In some embodiments, decoupling the fastener 2020 from the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 surface will also release the previously-stabilized relative positions of the central stabilizer unit 350 and the adjacent stored material unit cap 340 (see above Figures and text).
Figure 21 illustrates aspects of a stored material module 320 in association with a stored material module cap 340. The assembled apparatus shown in Figure 21 depicts the relative positioning and association of the stored material module 320 and its base 420 in relation to an attached stored material module cap 340. The stored material module cap 340 includes an aperture 1330 on a surface distal to the surface attached to the stored material module cap 340. The aperture 1330 includes a circuitry connector 1310. The assembly also includes a stabilizer unit 570 A in association with both the stored material module cap 340 and the stored material module 320.
Figure 22 depicts an internal cross-section view of the apparatus of Figure 21. Figure 22 illustrates aspects of a stored material module 320 in association with a stored material module cap 340 and two stabilizer units 570 A, 570 B. The stored material module 320 includes a base 420. The stored material module 320 includes a plurality of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I, positioned in a vertical array. Although the plurality of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I, depicted in Figure 22 are of substantially similar heights relative to the vertical array of the stored material module 320, some embodiments may include stored material units of different heights but substantially similar widths or diameters. The apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340 affixed to the top of the stored material module 320 at the upper edge of stored material unit 330 A. The stored material module cap 340 is attached to the top of the upper edge of the side wall of stored material unit 330 A at the top of the column of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I. The stored material module cap 340 includes a circuitry connector 1310. The stored material module cap 340 includes a rotating plate 1420 and an attached rod 1600. As illustrated in Figure 22, the rod 1600 is in contact with a retaining unit 1 100 and is in a configuration to prevent the relative movement of the outer rod and the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 B. A retaining unit 1720 within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 B and its associated projection 1750 are fixed at a set position within the inner rod. The stabilizer unit 570 A positioned at the opposing side of the apparatus includes a retaining unit 2210 with a projection (not visible) attached at a location within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 A. The projection (not visible) attached within stabilizer unit 570 A provides a maximum and minimum limit for the relative motion of the tubes within stabilizer unit 570 A, as depicted in subsequent Figures.
Also located within the inner rod of stabilizer unit 570 A are a series of sensors 2200 fixed to the interior surface of the inner rod. In some embodiments, sensors may be attached to one or more stabilizer units (e.g. 570 A and 570 B), including on an interior surface of a stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, sensors may be attached to other regions of the container. The sensors 2200 may be located as desired in a particular embodiment. For example, the sensors 2200 depicted in Figure 22 are positioned to be at approximately the top, center and bottom regions of a storage region 130 of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 when the apparatus is in use within the container 100. In some embodiments, the one or more sensors includes at least one temperature sensor. In some embodiments, at least one sensor may include a temperature sensor, such as, for example, chemical sensors, thermometers, bimetallic strips, or thermocouples. In some embodiments, the one or more sensors includes at least one sensor of a gaseous pressure within one or more of the at least one storage region, sensor of a mass within one or more of the at least one storage region, sensor of a stored volume within one or more of the at least one storage region, sensor of a temperature within one or more of the at least one storage region, or sensor of an identity of an item within one or more of the at least one storage region. A substantially thermally sealed container 100 and associated apparatus may include a sensor network. One or more sensors attached to a stored material module, a stored material module cap and/or a stabilizer unit may function as part of the network. Figure 22 depicts a circuitry link 2220, such as a wire link, connecting the sensors 2200. The circuitry link 2220 may also be connected to a circuitry connector 1310. Data from the sensors 2200 may be transmitted via the circuitry link 2220 to the exterior of the container 100, for example to a display 520 attached to a lid 500. A sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a physical sensor component such as described in U.S. Patent 6,453,749 to Petrovic et al., titled "Physical sensor component," which is herein incorporated by reference. A sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a pressure sensor such as described in U.S. Patent 5,900,554 to Baba et al., titled "Pressure sensor," which is herein incorporated by reference. A sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a vertically integrated sensor structure such as described in U.S. Patent 5,600,071 to Sooriakumar et al., titled "Vertically integrated sensor structure and method," which is herein incorporated by reference. A sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors such as a system for determining a quantity of liquid or fluid within a container, such as described in U.S. Patent 5,138,559 to Kuehl et al., titled "System and method for measuring liquid mass quantity," U.S. Patent 6.050,598 to Upton, titled "Apparatus for and method of monitoring the mass quantity and density of a fluid in a closed container, and a vehicular air bag system incorporating such apparatus," and U.S. Patent 5,245,869 to Clarke et al., titled "High accuracy mass sensor for monitoring fluid quantity in storage tanks," which are each herein incorporated by reference. A sensor network operably attached to the at least one substantially thermally sealed container may include one or more sensors of radio frequency identification ("RFID") tags to identify material within the at least one substantially thermally sealed storage region. RFID tags are well known in the art, for example in U.S. Patent 5,444,223 to Blama, titled "Radio frequency identification tag and method," which is herein incorporated by reference.
Figure 23 depicts an apparatus and view similar to that shown in Figure 22. Figure 23 illustrates aspects of a stored material module 320 in association with a stored material module cap 340 and two stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B when the apparatus is in a configuration to allow the relative movement of the outer rod and the inner rod of the stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B. The stored material module 320 includes a base 420. The stored material module 320 includes a plurality of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I, positioned in a vertical array. In the configuration illustrated in Figure 23, the outer rod and the inner rod of the stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B are in an "unlocked"
configuration, or allowed to slide relative to each other. This allows the individual stored material units 330 A- 3301 of the stored material module 320 to be moved vertically, or along the axis of the stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B. An individual using the apparatus may move one or more of the individual stored material units 330 A- 3301 to access material stored within the individual stored material units 330 A- 3301. For example, as illustrated in Figure 23, stored material units 330 A and 330 B have been positioned at the top of the stabilizer units 570 A and 570 B with a space between the lower face of stored material unit 330 B and the upper face of the adjacent stored material unit 330 C. This space would allow a user of the system to access material stored within stored material unit 330 C. The apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340 affixed to the top of the stored material module 320 at the upper edge of stored material unit 330 A. The stored material module cap 340 is attached to the top of the upper edge of the side wall of stored material unit 330 A at the top of the column of stored material units, 330 A- 330 I. The stored material module cap 340 includes a circuitry connector 1310. The stored material module cap 340 includes a rotating plate 1420 and an attached rod 1600. As illustrated in Figure 23, the rod 1600 is not in contact with a retaining unit 1100 and is in a
configuration to permit the relative movement of the outer rod and the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 B. A retaining unit 1720 within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 B and its associated projection 1750 are fixed at a set position within the inner rod. The stabilizer unit 570 A positioned at the opposing side of the apparatus includes a retaining unit 2210 with a projection (not visible) attached at a location within the inner rod of the stabilizer unit 570 A. The projection (not visible) attached within stabilizer unit 570 A provides a maximum and minimum limit for the relative motion of the tubes within stabilizer unit 570 A, as depicted in subsequent Figures. The sensors 2200 and the circuitry link 2220 located within stabilizer unit 570 A are located at fixed positions relative to the interior surface of the inner tube 1200 of stabilizer unit 570 A and the retaining unit 2210. Figure 24 illustrates an exterior side view of an apparatus such as those depicted in Figures 21-23. The apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 570 B. In the configuration depicted in Figure 24, the stored material module 320 is in a "closed" position, with minimal spaces between the stored material units 330 A- 330 I. The stored material module 320 also includes a base 420. The apparatus includes a stabilizer unit 570 B positioned along the side of the stored material module 320, with the axis of the stabilizer unit 570 B substantially parallel with the axis of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 570 B includes an outer tube 1210 and an inner tube 1230, which are shaped and positioned to slide in a telescoping fashion relative to each other. The outer tube 1210 includes a slit-like aperture 2400 positioned along the length of the outer edge of the outer tube 1210. The inner tube 1230 includes a projection 1750 of a size and shape to fit within the aperture 2400. The projection 1750 is attached to a retaining unit 1720 {see, e.g. Figure 17) not depicted in Figure 24. The retaining unit 1720 is attached at a fixed position relative to the inner tube 1230. The configuration of aperture 2400 and projection 1750 creates a minimum and maximum distance for the relative slide positioning of the outer tube 1210 relative to the inner tube 1230.
Figure 25 illustrates an exterior side view of an apparatus such as those depicted in Figures 21-24. The apparatus includes a stored material module cap 340, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 570 A. In the configuration depicted in Figure 25, the stored material module 320 is in a "closed" position, with minimal spaces between the stored material units 330 A- 330 I. The stored material module 320 also includes a base 420. The apparatus includes a stabilizer unit 570 A positioned along the side of the stored material module 320, with the axis of the stabilizer unit 570 A substantially parallel with the axis of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 570 A includes an outer tube 1220 and an inner tube 1200, which are shaped and positioned to slide in a telescoping fashion relative to each other. The outer tube 1220 includes a slit-like aperture 2500 positioned along the length of the outer edge of the outer tube 1220. The inner tube 1200 includes a projection 2510 of a size and shape to fit within the aperture 2500. The projection 2510 is attached to a retaining unit 2210 (see, e.g. Figure 22) not depicted in Figure 25. The retaining unit 2210 is attached at a fixed position relative to the inner tube 1200. The configuration of aperture 2500 and projection 2510 creates a minimum and maximum distance for the relative positioning of the outer tube 1220 relative to the inner tube 1200.
Figure 26 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus. Figure 26 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600. In this configuration, the apparatus is in a "closed" or "locked" position, with minimal open space surrounding the stored material within the stored material module. The stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350. The stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630. The base stored material unit 2620 is attached to the base 420 of the stored material module 320. The central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame, the apertures 2610 formed along the axis of the stored material module 320, or substantially vertically as shown in Figure 26. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620. The protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 26, the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figure. The relative movement of the stored material module 320 to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 is limited to the substantially vertical direction as defined by the aperture 2630. Figure 27 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus such as shown in Figure 26. Figure 27 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600. In this configuration, the apparatus is in a "closed" or "locked" position, with minimal access to the stored material within the stored material module. This position may be suitable for periods of storage. The stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350. The stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630. The central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620. The protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame. In the embodiment illustrated in Figures 26 and 27, the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figures. The relative movement of the stored material module 320 to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 is limited, as defined by the position of the aperture 2630.
Figure 28 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus such as illustrated in Figures 26 and 27. The view of Figure 28 is similar to the view shown in Figure 26. In the configuration shown in Figure 28, the apparatus is in an "open" position to allow access to material stored in the stored material module 320. Figure 28 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600. The stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350. The stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630. The base stored material unit 2620 is attached to the base 420 of the stored material module 320. The central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620. The protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 28, the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 have slid relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figure. The relative movement of the stored material module 320 to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 is limited, as defined by the direction and position of the aperture 2630. In Figure 28, the relative movement of the stored material module 320 is sufficient to form an access region 2800. The access region 2800 would allow a user of the apparatus to access material stored in the stored material units within the stored material module 320. Although only the topmost stored material unit 330 is shown adjacent to the access region 2800, each of the stored material units within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 to form access regions 2800 adjacent to each of the stored material units.
Figure 29 depicts an embodiment of an apparatus such as illustrated in Figures 26 - 28. The view of Figure 29 is similar to the view shown in Figure 27. In the configuration shown in Figure 29, the apparatus is in an "open" position to allow access to material stored in the stored material module 320. Figure 29 shows an apparatus including a central stabilizer 350, a stored material module 320 and a stabilizer unit 2600. The stored material module 320 includes a cap 340 attached to the central stabilizer 350. The stored material module 320 includes a base stored material unit 2620, the base stored material unit 2620 including at least one aperture 2630. The base stored material unit 2620 is attached to a base 420 of the stored material module 320. The central stabilizer 350 includes a cap 2620 attached to the central stabilizer 350 at an opposing side of the central stabilizer 350 from the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 is configured as an exterior frame with an internal surface configured to mate with external surfaces of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit is attached to the cap 340 of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module 320, an inner surface of the external frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module 320. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes a plurality of apertures 2610 in the external frame. The stabilizer unit 2600 includes one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of at least one aperture 2630 within a base stored material unit 2620. The protrusions form a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module 320 fit within the aperture 2630, limiting the relative movement of the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 relative to the exterior frame. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 29, the stored material units 330 within the stored material module 320 have slid relative to the axis formed by the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600, or substantially vertically as illustrated in the Figure. The relative movement of the stored material module 320 to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 is limited as substantially defined by the shape and position of the aperture 2630. In Figure 29, the relative movement of the stored material module 320 is sufficient to form an access region 2800. The access region 2800 would allow a user of the apparatus to access material stored in the stored material units within the stored material module 320. Although only the topmost stored material unit 330 is shown adjacent to the access region 2800, each of the stored material units within the stored material module 320 may slide relative to the external frame of the stabilizer unit 2600 to form access regions 2800 adjacent to each of the stored material units.
Figure 30 illustrates a base stored material unit 2620 such as shown within an apparatus in Figures 26-29. The base stored material unit 2620 is attached to a stored material module base 420. Similar to the stored material units depicted in other Figures (identified as 330), the base stored material unit 2620 includes a gap region 910 configured to allow visibility and access to stored material within the base stored material unit 2620. The base stored material unit 2620 includes at least one aperture 2630 configured to mate with a projection on a corresponding interior surface of an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600 (see Figures 26-29). The lower edge of the aperture 2630 substantially defines the relative positions of the stored material unit 320 relative to the stabilizer unit 2600. The base stored material unit 2620 includes a side wall 440. At last one flange 3000 projects from the top edge of the side wall 440 of the base stored material unit 2620. The at least one flange 3000 projects in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the surface of the side wall 440. The at least one flange 3000 projects in a substantially perpendicular direction away from the exterior surface of the side wall 440. The flange is configured to reversibly mate with the edges of an aperture 2600 in an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600. The edge of the flange 3000 mating with the edge of an aperture 2600 creates the minimum and maximum size of an access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320. The edges of an aperture 2600 connecting with a edge of the flange 3000 substantially defines the vertical height of the access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320 (see Figures 26-29). The contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the minimum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "closed" or "locked" position (see Figures 26 and 27). Similarly, the contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the maximum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "open" or "unlocked" position (see Figures 28 and 29).
Figure 31 illustrates a base stored material unit 2620 such as shown in Figure 30, and illustrated within an apparatus in Figures 26-29. The base stored material unit 2620 is attached to a stored material module base 420. The base stored material unit 2620 includes a gap region 910 configured to allow visibility and access to stored material within the base stored material unit 2620. The base stored material unit 2620 includes at least one aperture 2630 configured to mate with a projection on a corresponding interior surface of an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600 (see Figures 26-29). The lower edge of the aperture 2630 substantially defines the relative potential motion of the stored material unit 320 relative to the stabilizer unit 2600. The base stored material unit 2620 includes a side wall 440. At last one flange 3000 projects from the top edge of the side wall 440 of the base stored material unit 2620. The at least one flange 3000 projects in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the surface of the side wall 440, or horizontally as depicted in Figure 31. The flange is configured to reversibly mate with the edges of an aperture 2600 in an exterior frame of a stabilizer unit 2600. The edge of the flange 3000 mating with the edge of an aperture 2600 creates the boundaries of an access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320. The edges of an aperture 2600 connecting with an edge of the flange 3000 substantially defines the vertical height of the access region 2800 adjacent to the stored material units within the stored material module 320 (see Figures 26-29). The contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the minimum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "closed" or "locked" position (see Figures 26 and 27). Similarly, the contact between the edge of the flange 3000 and the upper edge of the aperture 2600 substantially defines the maximum displacement possible in a stored material module 320, or the height of the stored material module 320 in a "open" or "unlocked" position (see Figures 28 and 29).
Figure 32 depicts a transport stabilizer 3210 illustrated in association with a substantially thermally sealed container 100 in a vertical cross-section view. The transport stabilizer 3210 is intended for use in a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector. The transport stabilizer 3210 is configured to assume some of the force associated with the connector 115 flexing or moving, particularly in situations when the substantially thermally sealed container 100 is subject to substantial motion. The transport stabilizer 3210 may be of use, for example, during shipment or transport of a substantially thermally sealed container 100. The transport stabilizer 3210 is configured of a size and shape to reversibly mate with the interior of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector. The dimensions of a transport stabilizer 3210 correspond to the dimensions of the interior of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector.
Figure 32 depicts a substantially thermally sealed container 100 including a connector 115 that is a flexible connector. The substantially thermally sealed container 100 includes an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 110, with a gap 120 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 110. The interior surface of the inner wall 110 substantially defines the boundary of a substantially thermally sealed storage region 130. The interior of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130 includes a storage structure 200 attached to the interior surface of the inner wall 110. Although not clearly visible in the cross-section view shown in Figure 32, the storage structure includes a plurality of apertures 220, 210 (see Figure 2). A center aperture 210 is positioned in the center of the support structure 200, with the edges of the center aperture 210 approximately
corresponding to the sides of the conduit 125 (see Figure 2). As illustrated in Figure 32, one or more support structures 3200 maintain the relative position of the substantially planar storage structure 200 relative to the interior surface of the inner wall 110.
Figure 32 depicts a transportation stabilizer unit 3210 in association with the substantially thermally sealed container 100. In the configuration illustrated, the substantially thermally sealed container 100 and the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 are positioned so that the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 assumes a substantial proportion of the force exerted on the flexible connector 115 by the mass and motion of the inner wall 110 and any contents of the substantially thermally sealed storage region 130, including the mass of the storage structure 200. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250 of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in the outer wall 105 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The lid 3250 includes a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the outer wall 105 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 adjacent to an external opening in the outer wall 105. The lid 3250 may be fabricated of a material with sufficient strength to maintain the flexible connector in a compressed position when the reversible fastening unit is attached to the positioning shaft. For example, the lid 3250 may be fabricated from stainless steel. The lid 3250 includes one or more apertures configured to attach a fastener 3255 to the exterior surface of the container 100. The lid includes a central aperture, the aperture configured in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the plane of the lid 3250. A reversible fastening unit 3225 is attached to the lid 3250 at a position adjacent to the central aperture in the lid 3250. The reversible fastening unit 3225 is positioned to fasten a positioning shaft 3220 within the central aperture in the lid. The reversible fastening unit 3225 is positioned to fasten a positioning shaft 3220 in a fixed position relative to the lid 3250. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector 115 of the
substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The end of the wall 3280
substantially defining the tubular structure is operably attached to the lid 3250. As illustrated in Figure 32, the wall 3280 is attached to the lid 3250 at a substantially right angle, or perpendicularly. The wall 3280 includes at least one aperture 3270. In the embodiments illustrated in Figures 32-39, the wall 3280 includes two apertures on opposing faces of the wall 3280. The two apertures illustrated are substantially equivalent in the depicted embodiments. The aperture 3270 has an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 32. The upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 is positioned on the tubular structure at a location less than a maximum length of the flexible connector 115 from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid 3250. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220. The positioning shaft 3220 has a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid 3250. The positioning shaft 3220 is of a length greater than the thickness of the lid 3250 in combination with the length of the wall 3280 between the surface of the lid 3250 and the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280. The wall 3280 has an interior surface, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region 3285 of the tubular region. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a pivot unit 3230, the pivot unit 3230 operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft 3220 and positioned within the interior region 3285. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a support unit 3260. The support unit 3260 is operably attached to the pivot unit 3230. The support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit within the interior region 3285 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the other direction (substantially horizontally as depicted in Figure 32).
The transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290. The end region is of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of an aperture 210 in a storage structure 200 within the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290. As illustrated in Figure 32, the base grip 3245 is configured to reversibly mate with an interior surface of the inner wall 110 of the container 100 when the transport stabilizer 3210 is in use. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a tensioning unit for the base grip 3245. The tensioning unit is configured to maintain pressure on the base grip 3245 against an interior wall 110 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the lid 3250, or
substantially downwards in the view of Figure 32. The tensioning unit may include a tensioning shaft 3240 and a tensioning spring 3295 configured to maintain force along the long axis of the transport stabilizer 3210 to the end of the base grip 3245.
The parts of the transport stabilizer 3210 may be fabricated from a variety of materials as suitable for the embodiment. Materials may be selected for cost, density, strength, thermal conduction properties and other attributes as suitable for the
embodiment. In some embodiments, the transport stabilizer 3210 is substantially fabricated from metal parts, such as stainless steel, brass or aluminum parts. In some embodiments, part of the transport stabilizer 3210 is fabricated from durable plastic materials, including glass-reinforced plastics. In some embodiments, the positioning shaft 3220 is fabricated from a plastic material of suitable durability. In some embodiments, the base grip 3245 is fabricated from a plastic material with suitable coefficient of friction. For example, the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 0.5 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade. For example, the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 0.7 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees
Centigrade. For example, the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than one with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade. For example, the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 1.2 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade. For example, the base grip 3245 may be fabricated from a material with a coefficient of friction greater than 1.5 with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade. Figure 33 illustrates aspects of a transport stabilizer 3210 such as shown in Figure 32. In the view illustrated in Figure 33, the transport stabilizer 3210 is in a configuration as it would be implemented within a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100, although the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 is not illustrated in Figure 33. In the view illustrated in Figure 33, the transport stabilizer 3210 is in a configuration as shown in Figure 32, without the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 illustrated in Figure 32. As illustrated in Figure 32, a transport stabilizer 3210 is of a size and shape to fit a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100 of specific dimensions.
The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250 of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in the outer wall 105 of a
substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The lid 3250 includes one or more apertures 3300 configured to attach a fastener to the exterior surface of the container 100. The lid includes a central aperture, the aperture configured in a substantially perpendicular direction relative to the plane of the lid 3250. A reversible fastening unit 3225 is attached to the lid 3250 at a position adjacent to the central aperture in the lid 3250. The reversible fastening unit 3225 is positioned to fasten a positioning shaft 3220 within the central aperture in the lid. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector 115 of the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115. The region 3310 is shorter than the minimum length of the flexible connector 115. The end of the region 3310 in the wall 3280 is fixed to the lid 3250. As illustrated in Figures 32 and 33, the wall 3280 is attached to the lid 3250 at a substantially right angle, or perpendicularly. The wall 3280 includes at least one aperture 3270. In the embodiments illustrated in Figures 32-39, the wall 3280 includes two apertures on opposing faces of the wall 3280. The two apertures illustrated are substantially equivalent in the depicted embodiments. The aperture 3270 has an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 32. The upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 is positioned on the tubular structure at a location less than a maximum length of the flexible connector 115 from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid 3250. The upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 defines the length of the region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115. The length of the region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115 is defined by the edge of the lid 3250 on one end and the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 at the opposing end. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220. The wall 3280 has an interior surface, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region 3285 of the tubular region. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a pivot unit 3230, the pivot unit 3230 operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft 3220 and positioned within the interior region 3285. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a support unit 3260. The support unit 3260 is operably attached to the pivot unit 3230. The support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit within the interior region 3285 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture 3270 in the wall 3280 when the pivot unit 3230 is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the other direction (substantially horizontally as depicted in Figures 32 and 33). In the view illustrated in Figure 33, the support unit 3260 is rotated by the pivot unit 3230 in a position substantially parallel to the plane of the lid 3250. In the view shown in Figure 33, the support unit 3260 is rotated by the pivot unit 3230 in a position substantially parallel to the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270, and fixed in a position against the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 by the positioning shaft 3220 fixed to the fastener 3225 at a suitable location.
The transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290. The end region is of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of an aperture 210 in a storage structure 200 within the substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a tensioning unit for the base grip 3245. The tensioning unit may include a tensioning shaft 3240 and a tensioning spring 3295 configured to maintain force along the long axis of the transport stabilizer 3210 to the end of the base grip 3245.
Figure 34 depicts an external view of a transport stabilizer 3210 such as illustrated in Figures 32 and 33 in cross-section. Figure 34 illustrates that the transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220 and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250. The lid 3250 illustrated includes a plurality of apertures 3300 configured to allow fasteners to attach the lid 3250 to an exterior wall 105 in a substantially thermally sealed storage container 100. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure. The interior surface of the wall 3280 substantially defines an interior region 3285 in the tubular structure. The wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 illustrated includes two apertures 3270 in the wall 3280. The ends of a single support unit 3260 are visible projecting away from the outer edge of the wall 3280 through the two apertures 3270. The center portion of the support unit 3260 (not shown) is within the interior region 3285 in the tubular structure. The aperture 3270 shown includes an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 34. The upper surface of the support unit 3260 is in a fixed position against the upper edge 3273. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
Figure 35 illustrates aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit 3210. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 shown in Figure 35 is similar to that depicted in Figure 34. In Figure 35 the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 is shown in a substantially horizontal exterior view. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220 and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure. The wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 illustrated includes two apertures 3270 in the wall 3280. The ends of a single support unit 3260 are visible projecting away from the outer edge of the wall 3280 through the two apertures 3270. The apertures 3270 depicted include upper edges 3273 and lower edges 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 35. The upper surface of the support unit 3260 is in a fixed position against the upper edges 3273. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
Figure 36 illustrates aspects of a transportation stabilizer unit 3210. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 shown in Figure 36 is similar to that depicted in Figure 35. In Figure 36, the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 is shown in a substantially horizontal exterior view, but facing the side of the view illustrated in Figure 35. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a positioning shaft 3220 and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure. The wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115. The view of the transportation stabilizer unit 3210 shown in Figure 36 includes an aperture 3270 in the wall 3280. The end of a single support unit 3260 is visible projecting away from the outer edge of the wall 3280 through the aperture 3270. The center portion of the support unit 3260 is within the interior region 3285 in the tubular structure. The aperture 3270 depicted includes an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the view shown in Figure 36. The upper surface of the support unit 3260 is in a fixed position against the upper edge 3273. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
Figure 37 depicts a transportation stabilizer unit 3210 in a vertical cross-section view. As shown, a transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250. The lid 3250 includes one or more apertures 3300 configured to accommodate fasteners to attach the lid 3250 to the exterior of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 (not shown in Figure 37). The lid 3250 has an attached fastener 3225 positioned adjacent to a central aperture in the lid 3250. The fastener 3225 is configured to reversibly attach to a positioning shaft 3220. The positioning shaft 3220 has the potential to move through the central aperture in the lid 3250 when not fixed in position by the fastener 3225. The positioning shaft 3220 is connected to a pivot 3230 within the interior 3285 of the transportation stabilizer unit
3210. The pivot 3230 is attached to a support unit 3260. The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 includes a wall 3280, the wall 3280 substantially defining a tubular structure. The wall 3280 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115 (not shown in Figure 37). The transportation stabilizer unit 3210 depicted in Figure 37 includes two apertures 3270 in the wall 3280 on opposing faces of the tubular structure. The apertures 3270 each include an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275 relative to the position illustrated (i.e. a substantially vertical transport stabilizer unit 3210). The transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
In the view illustrated in Figure 37, the support unit 3260 is rotated by the pivot 3230 so that the support unit 3260 is positioned substantially parallel to the surface of the wall 3280. As illustrated, the pivot unit 3230 is configured to allow movement of the support unit 3260 approximately 90 degrees along a single axis. The support unit 3260 is in a substantially vertical position corresponding to the vertical position of the main axis of the transport stabilizer 3210. The support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit substantially within one of the apertures 3270. The support unit 3260 and the pivot unit 3230 are configured to position the support unit 3260 substantially within the outer diameter of the tubular structure defined by the wall 3280. In this position, the transport stabilizer unit 3210 is configured to fit within a conduit 125 of a substantially thermally sealed container 100.
After the transport stabilizer unit 3210 is positioned with the surface of the lid 3250 in contact with the outer wall 105 of a substantially thermally sealed container 100, the positioning shaft 3220 may be moved by an user of the apparatus to rotate the pivot unit 3230 and thus to move the support unit 3260 in a substantially horizontal position relative to the transport stabilizer 3210 (e.g. as shown in Figure 33). The transport stabilizer 3210 may then be positioned to provide support to a flexible connector 1 15 by a user pulling the positioning shaft 3220 through the central aperture in the lid 3250 to a degree required to for the surface of the support unit 3260 to come into contact with the edge of the flexible connector 1 15 at the inner wall 1 10 of the container 100 (e.g. as illustrated in Figure 32). The positioning shaft 3220 may then be fixed in place with the fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250.
Figure 38 illustrates a transport stabilizer unit 3210 with a support unit 3260 rotated to fit within an aperture 3270 in the wall 3280. This view is similar to an external view of the embodiment illustrated in Figure 37. The transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250. The lid 3250 includes a plurality of apertures 3300 configured to reversibly attach fasteners to the exterior surface of a substantially thermally sealed container 100. The lid 3250 includes a central aperture and an adjacent fastener 3225 attached to the lid 3250. The central aperture provides a space for a positioning rod 3220 to traverse the lid 3250. The positioning rod 3220 is connected to a pivot unit 3230 (not shown) in the interior 3285 of the wall 3280 of the transport stabilizer unit 3210. The support unit 3260 is shown in a substantially vertical position corresponding to the vertical position of the main axis of the transport stabilizer 3210. The support unit 3260 is of a size and shape to fit substantially within the aperture 3270. The aperture 3270 includes an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275. In the position shown in Figure 38, the transport stabilizer unit 3210 is configured to fit within a conduit 125 of a substantially thermally sealed container 100. The edge of the support unit 3260 is braced against the upper edge 3273 of the aperture 3270 in the illustration. This position may minimize potential rotation of the support unit 3260 when the transport stabilizer unit 3210 is lowered into a substantially thermally sealed container 100. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes an end region 3290. The transport stabilizer 3210 includes a base grip 3245 at the terminal end of the end region 3290.
Figure 39 illustrates a transport stabilizer unit 3210 like that depicted in Figure 37, in an external view. The view shown in Figure 39 is of a transport stabilizer unit 3210 at a substantially perpendicular view from that depicted in Figure 37. The transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250 attached at a substantially perpendicular angle to the wall 3280 of the transport stabilizer unit 3210. The wall 3280 defines a substantially tubular structure of the transport stabilizer unit 3210. The lid 3250 includes a central aperture and a fastener 3225 attached to the exterior surface of the lid adjacent to the central aperture. The central aperture is of a size and shape to allow a positioning shaft 3220 to traverse through the lid 3250. The transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a region 3310 configured to fit within the minimum interior of a conduit 125 in a flexible connector 115 (not depicted in Figure 39). The wall 3280 includes two apertures 3270 of substantially similar size and shape on opposing faces of the wall 3280. In the view shown in Figure 39, the apertures 3270 are aligned to appear substantially overlapping. The apertures 3270 each have an upper edge 3273 and a lower edge 3275. As shown in Figure 39, the lower end of the positioning rod 3220 is attached to a pivot unit 3230. The pivot unit 3230 is attached to a surface of a support unit 3260. The view of Figure 39 shows the pivot unit 3230 and the support unit 3260 through the overlapping apertures 3270 and the interior region 3285. The face of the support unit 3260 is the opposite face to that shown in Figure 38.
In some embodiments, one or more sensors may be attached to the transport stabilizer unit 3210. A sensor may be positioned, for example, within the interior 3285 of the transport stabilizer unit 3210. A transport stabilizer unit 3210 may include an indicator, such as a visual indicator like an LED light emitter. An electronic system may be operably connected to a transport stabilizer unit 3210. An electronic system may be operably connected to a sensor and an indicator attached to the transport stabilizer unit 3210. For example, a temperature sensor may be attached to the interior surface of transport stabilizer unit 3210. A LED light emitting indicator may be attached to the outer surface of the lid 3250. An electronic system, including a controller and wire connections, may be attached to the temperature sensor and the indicator. The electronic system may be configured, for example, to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature within the transport stabilizer unit 3210 which is out of a predetermined temperature range. For example, electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 0 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade. For example, electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 2 degrees Centigrade and 8 degrees Centigrade. For example, electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 5 degrees Centigrade and 15 degrees Centigrade. For example, electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature outside of the range of approximately 20 degrees Centigrade and 30 degrees Centigrade. For example, electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature below approximately 0 degrees Centigrade. For example, electronic system may be configured to light the indicator when the temperature sensor senses a temperature above approximately 30 degrees Centigrade.
Figure 40 A depicts an external view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210. Figure 40 A depicts an angled top down view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210. The transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250. A plurality of fasteners 3255 secure the lid 3250 to the exterior wall 105 of the container 100. The lid 3250 includes a central aperture which includes a positioning shaft 3220. The positioning shaft 3220 is fixed in a stable position relative to the lid 3250 by a fastener 3225 attached to the surface of the lid 3250.
Figure 40 B depicts an external view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210. Figure 40 B depicts vertical side view of a substantially thermally sealed container 100 with an attached transport stabilizer unit 3210. The transport stabilizer unit 3210 includes a lid 3250. Fasteners 3255 secure the lid 3250 to the exterior wall 105 of the container 100. The lid 3250 includes a central aperture which includes a positioning shaft 3220. The positioning shaft 3220 is fixed in a stable position relative to the lid 3250 by a fastener 3225 attached to the surface of the lid 3250. With reference now to Figure 41, shown is an example of an apparatus that may serve as a context for the subject matter described herein. Figure 41 illustrates a schematic of an apparatus 4185. The apparatus 4185 includes a structural region 4180, an activation region 4100, a connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100, and a vacuum pump 4130. Each of the structural region 4180, the activation region 4100, the connector 4120, and the vacuum pump 4130 includes an internal, gas- sealed region. For example, the structural region 4180 includes a gas-sealed gap 120 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 110. The entire apparatus 4185 includes an internal, gas-sealed region that is contiguous throughout the regions (e.g. 4100, 4120, 120) of the apparatus 4185.
The structural region 4180 is fabricated from a heat-sensitive material. The structural region 4180 may be fabricated entirely or in part from a heat-sensitive material. The structural region 4180 may be fabricated from a combination of materials. Wherein the structural region includes components fabricated from different materials, the material with the lowest heat tolerance will govern the heat-sensitivity of the entire structural region 4180. The structural region 4180 includes an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 110, with a gas-sealed gap 120 between the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 110. The activation region 4100 is fabricated from a heat-resistant material. The activation region 4100 is entirely fabricated from a heat-resistant material utilizing methods that are also heat-resistant. For example, any epoxy, seals, coatings or similar components within the activation region 4100 structure will be heat-resistant. Wherein the activation region includes components fabricated from different materials, the material with the lowest heat tolerance will govern the heat-resistance of the entire activation region 4100. The activation region 4100 includes one or more getters 41 10.
The connector 4120 is attached to both the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100. The connector 4120 is operably connected to both the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100 with gas-impermeable connections to form a gas-sealed interior. For example, the connector 4120 may be attached to the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100 using gas-impermeable seals on the respective ends of the connector 4120. For example, the connector 4120 may be welded on to the structural region 4180 and the activation region 4100 on the respective ends of the connector 4120 to form a gas-impermeable welding joint. The connector 4120 includes a flexible region 4125. The connector includes a region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100. The vacuum pump 4130 is operably attached to the connector 4120. The vacuum pump 4130 is operably attached to the connector 4120 to allow the vacuum pump 4130 to substantially evacuate the gas within the gas-sealed interior of the apparatus 4185 during utilization of the methods described herein. In some embodiments, the vacuum pump 4130 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 through a tube, duct, conduit or other structure that creates a gas-impermeable seal between the vacuum pump 4130 and the connector 4120. Figure 41, for example, illustrates the vacuum pump 4130 as operably attached to the connector 4120 through a conduit 4170.
The apparatus 4185 includes a gas-sealed interior region throughout the structural region 4180, the activation region 4100, and the connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100. Gas-impermeable seals are located in each of the junctions between regions 4180, 4100 of the apparatus 4185 and the connector. The vacuum pump 4130 is also operably attached to the connector 4120 with a gas- impermeable seal. See: Ishimaru , "Bakable aluminum vacuum chamber and bellows with an aluminum flange and metal seal for ultrahigh vacuum," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A15, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1978, pages 1853-1854; and Jhung et al.,
"Achievement of extremely high vacuum using a cryopump and conflate aluminum gaskets," Vacuum, vol. 43, no. 4, 1992, pages 309-311; which are each incorporated by reference. The vacuum pump 4130 may be attached to the connector 4120 through a through a structure, such as conduit 4170, that includes a gas-impermeable seal between the vacuum pump 4130 and the connector 4120. The vacuum pump 4130 included in a specific embodiment should have sufficient pumping capacity to substantially evacuate the entirety of the gas-sealed interior region throughout the structural region 4180, the activation region 4100, and the connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100.
A valve 4135 may be operably attached to the connector 4120, for example in the region of the connector 4120 between the attached vacuum pump 4130 and conduit 4170 and the attached structural region 4180. A valve 4135 operably attached to the connector 4120 may be configured to inhibit the flow of gas through the connector 4120. A valve 4135 operably attached to the connector 4120 may be configured to block the flow of gas through the connector 4120. A valve 4135 operably attached to the connector 4120 is configured to restrict gas flow through the interior of the connector 4120 at a location along the length of the connector 4120. For example, as illustrated in Figure 41, a valve 4135 may be configured to prevent gas flow between the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180 from the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120, and the interior of the activation region 4100. As an example, as illustrated in Figure 41, a valve 4135 may be integrated into the connector 4120 and configured to reversibly prevent the flow of gas within the interior of the connector 4120. A valve 4135 may be configured to isolate gas present in one region of the interior of the apparatus 4185 from another region of the interior of the apparatus 4185. A valve 4135 may be of a number of types, as appropriate to the embodiment and relative to factors such as cost, size, durability, structural strength, outgassing of fabrication materials, and sealing strength. A valve 4135 may be a quarter-turn valve, such as a butterfly style valve. A valve 4135 may be a ball valve. In some embodiments, there may be a plurality of valves. If a valve 4135 includes organic materials, such as nitrile, in "O" rings or other components, the expected outgassing rate of the value components should be understood to effect the time required to achieve a target minimal gas pressure within the apparatus. See: L. de Csernatony, "The properties of Viton "A" elastomers II: the influence of permeation, diffusion and solubility of gases on the gas emission rate from an O-ring used as an atmospheric seal or high vacuum immersed," Vacuum, vol. 16, no. 3, 1965, pages 129-134, which is incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, baking the value under vacuum conditions prior to assembly of the apparatus {e.g. see Figure 5 and associated text) may reduce outgassing from organic materials within the valve. See: D. J. Crawley and L. de Csernatony, "Degassing characteristics of some Ό' ring materials," Vacuum, vol. 14, 1964, pages 7-9; and S. Rutherford, "The benefits of Viton outgassing," Duniway
Stockroom Corp., 1997, pages 1-5, which are each incorporated by reference.
The structural region 4180 fabricated from a heat- sensitive material includes a device configured for use independently from the remainder of the apparatus. For example, the structural region 4180 may include a storage device (see, e.g. Figure 63) configured for use independently from the remainder of the apparatus. For example, the structural region 4180 may include a storage device (see, e.g. Figure 63) configured for use independently from the connector 4120, the vacuum pump 4130 and the activation region 4100. For example, the structural region 4180 may include a substantially thermally sealed container configured for use independently from the connector 4120, the vacuum pump 4130 and the activation region 4100. In some embodiments, the structural region 4180 includes a device configured for detachment from the remainder of the apparatus. In some embodiments, the structural region 4180 includes a storage device. In some embodiments, the structural region 4180 includes a storage device configured for temperature-stabilized storage. In some embodiments, the structural region 4180 includes a thermally-insulated device. The structural region 4180 may include a storage device with an interior storage region 130 and an opening 4160 in the structural region 4180 of a suitable size and shape to maintain the thermal storage properties of the interior storage region 130 and to allow for the addition and removal of any stored material within the interior storage region 130. The interior storage region 130 is a substantially thermally sealed storage region containing an access opening 4160 of minimal size and shape to allow insertion and removal of stored material from the interior storage region 130. The storage device may include a container, such as a thermally-stabilized container (see, e.g. Figure 63) designed for storage of medicinal agents within the cold chain. As illustrated in Figure 41, the structural region 4180 may have an attached gas pressure gauge 4140, configured to detect and signal the gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120. See:
Mukugi et al., "Characteristics of cold cathode gauges for outgassing measurements in uhv range," Vacuum, vol. 44, nos. 5-7, 1993, pages 591-593; and Saitoh et al., "Influence of vacuum gauges on outgassing rate measurements," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. Al 1, no. 5, Sept/Oct 1993, pages 2816-2821; Hong et al., "Investigation of gas species in a stainless steel ultrahigh vacuum chamber with hot cathode ionization gauges," Meas. Sci. Technol., vol. 15, 2004, pages 359-364; which are each incorporated by reference. The gas pressure gauge 4140 may be operably attached to the gas-sealed gap 120 through a tube or duct 4175. Although not illustrated in Figure 41, in some embodiments a valve may be included in or on the duct 4175 to inhibit the flow of gas through the duct 4175 and to isolate the gas-sealed gap 120 from the gas pressure gauge 4140.
The structural region 4180 fabricated from a heat-sensitive material may be fabricated from a variety of heat-sensitive materials, depending on the embodiment. The structural region 4180 may be fabricated to include a single heat-sensitive material. The structural region 4180 fabricated from a heat-sensitive material may be fabricated from a plurality of materials, one or more of which may be heat-sensitive, depending on the embodiment. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from aluminum. The structural region 4180 may include a plurality of materials in a particular embodiment. The structural region 4180 may be fabricated from composite materials. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from metalized plastic, such as polypropylene, PET, nylon or polyethylene completely covered with a layer of metal, such as aluminum, on the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from plastic with a metal coating, or from plastic with a metal liner, on the interior surface of the gas-sealed gap 120 (e.g. as illustrated as surfaces 4190 in Figure 41). For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from a composite material forming a plastic interior and a metal coating covering the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from a composite material forming a plastic interior and a metal liner covering the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas- sealed gap 120. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from materials including carbon fibers. The structural region 4180 may be fabricated from different materials in layers or areas of the structural region 4180, as suitable for a given embodiment. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated partially or entirely from a plastic exterior region with a gas-impermeable metal liner covering the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 150 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120.
In order to maintain a low gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120, in some embodiments the structural region 4180 is fabricated entirely or partially from low vapor emitting materials. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated from low vapor-emitting materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, or other metals. For example, the structural region 4180 may be fabricated from low vapor-emitting materials such as glass or appropriate ceramics. In order to maintain a low gas pressure within the gas- sealed gap 120, in some embodiments the structural region 4180 is fabricated with a layer of low vapor emitting materials on the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120. For example, the surfaces 4190 may be covered with a layer of stainless steel, aluminum, or other low vapor emitting material. In some embodiments the surfaces 4190 of the outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 facing the gas-sealed gap 120 is cleaned and treated prior to assembly to reduce the sublimation of contaminants (e.g. water, oils, or plastics) from the surfaces 4190 into the gas-sealed gap 120 (see Figure 45 and associated text herein). The specific type of low vapor emitting material used in the fabrication may be selected based on factors such as cost, weight, durability, hardness, strength, and anticipated sublimation from the surface of the particular material at the gas pressures required within the gas-sealed gap 120 and at the expected temperatures of use in a given embodiment. See, for example, Adams, "A review of the stainless steel surface," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. Al, no. 1, Jan-Mar 1983, pages 12-18, which is incorporated by reference. For example, in some embodiments a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 1x10" torr. For example, in some embodiments a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 5x10"* torr. For example, in some embodiments a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 1x10" torr. For example, in some embodiments a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than or equal to 5x10^* torr. For example, in some embodiments a manufactured storage device may include a gas-sealed gap 120 with an internal gas pressure less than 1x10" 2 torr, for example, less than 5x10" 3 torr, less than 5x10 -4 torr, less than 5xl0"5torr, 5x1ο"6 torr or 5xl0"7 torr.
The materials used to fabricate the components of the apparatus 4185, as well as any treatment of the components prior to assembly of the apparatus 4185 (see, e.g., Figure 45 and associated text) will influence the rate of reduction of gas pressure within the apparatus 4185 during the steps of the methods as described herein (see, e.g., Figures 46- 62 and associated text) as well as the maintenance of the low gas pressure over time. See: R.J. Elsey, "Outgassing of vacuum materials- 1," Vacuum, vol. 25, no. 7, 1975, pages 299- 306; Yamazake et al., "High-speed pumping to UHV," Vacuum, vol. 84, 2010, pages 756- 759; Saito et al., "Measurement system for low outgassing materials by switching between two pumping paths," Vacuum, vol. 47, nos. 6-8, 1996, pages 749-752; Watanabe et al, "Reduction in outgassing rate from residual gas analyzers for extreme high vacuum measurements," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A14, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1996, pages 3261-3266; Chun et al., "Effect of the Cr-rich oxide surface on fast pumpdown to ultrahigh vacuum," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A15, no. 5, Sept/Oct 1997, pages 2518-2520; and Nemanic and Setina, "Outgassing of a thin wall vacuum insulating panel," Vacuum, vol. 49, no. 3, 1998, pages 233-237; Poole and Michaelis, "Hiavac and Teflon outgassing under ultra-high vacuum conditions," Vacuum, vol. 30, no. 10, 1980, pages 415-417; and Ishikawa and Nemanic, "An overview of methods to suppress hydrogen outgassing rate from austenitic stainless steel with reference to UHV and EXV," Vacuum, vol. 69, 2003, pages 501-512; which are each incorporated by reference. The term "outgassing," as used herein, refers to the evolution of gas from a solid or liquid in a vacuum or low gas pressure environment. See: Redhead,
"Recommended practices for measuring and reporting outgassing data," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A20, no. 5, Sept/Oct 2002, pages 1667-1675, which is incorporated by reference. The structural stability and the expected outgassing properties of the materials used to fabricate the components of the apparatus 4185 during expected use of the entire apparatus 4185 and any independent use of all or part of the structural region 4180 should be taken into account in material selection. See: S. Choi and B.V. Sankar, "Gas permeability of various graphite/epoxy composite laminates for cryogenic storage systems," Composites: Part B 39, 2008, pages 782-791; Engelmann et al., "Vacuum chambers in composite material," Journal of Vacuum Science and
Technology, vol. A5, no. 4, July/ August 1987, pages 2337-2341; Nemanic and Setina, "Experiments with a thin- walled stainless steel chamber," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A 18, no. 4, July/Aug 2000, pages 1789-1793; Halliday, "An introduction to materials for use in vacuum," Vacuum, vol. 37, nos. 8/9, pages 583-585, 1987; Holtrop and Hansink, "High temperature outgassing test on materials used in DIII-D tokamak," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A24, no. 4, July/ August 2006, pages 1572-1577; Patrick, "Outgassing and the choice of materials for space instrumentation," Vacuum, vol. 23, no. 11, 1973, pages 411-413; Ishimaru, "Ultimate pressure of the order of l0"13 Torr in an aluminum alloy vacuum chamber," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A7, no. 3, May/June 1989, pages 2437-2442; Hirohata et al., "Hydrogen desorption behavior of aluminum materials used for extremely high vacuum chamber," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. Al 1, no. 54, Sept/Oct 1993, pages 2637- 2641; Ishimaru, "Aluminum alloy-sapphire sealed window for ultrahigh vacuum," Vacuum, vol. 33, no. 6, 1983, pages 339-340; and Nemanic and Setina, "Outgassing in thin wall stainless steel cells," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A17, no. 3, May/June 1999, pages 1040-1046; which are each incorporated by reference. In embodiments wherein components of the apparatus 4185, such as the connector 4120 and/or the structural region 4180, are fabricated from a composite, such as an epoxy- containing material, the outgassing rates and associated weight loss of the components should be taken into account in estimating the time required to produce a low gas pressure within the apparatus 4185 using the methods described herein (see, e.g., Figures 46-62 and associated text). In some situations, materials may sublimate to the extent that their structural integrity is reduced at the low gas pressures required in a specific embodiment, and such factors should be taken into account in the design of the apparatus 4185 and the structural region 4180. See: R.D. Brown, "Outgassing of epoxy resins in vacuum," Vacuum, vol. 17, no. 9, 1967, pages 505-509; J. Santhanam and P. Vijendran, "Outgassing rate of reinforced epoxy and its control by different pretreatment methods," Vacuum, vol. 28, no. 8/9, 1978, pages 365-366; and Gupta et al., "Outgassing from epoxy resins and methods for its reduction," Vacuum, vol. 27, no. 2, 1977, pages 61-63, which are each incorporated by reference.
The term "heat-sensitive," as used herein, refers to materials that lose their structural integrity at temperatures below the activation temperature(s) and under the activation condition(s) for the types of getter(s) 4110 used in the apparatus 4185. The term "heat-sensitive," as used herein, is relative to the activation temperature(s) and the pressure conditions used for the specific getters 4110 included in a given embodiment. For example, in some embodiments the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include zirconium- vanadium-iron getters (see US Patent No. 4,312,669 "Non-evaporable Ternary Gettering Alloy and Method of Use for the Sorption of Water, Water Vapor and Other Gasses," to Boffito et al., which is incorporated by reference). For example, in some embodiments the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include St707™ getters with 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron (for example, available from Getter Technologies International Ltd., China). See also Hobson and Chapman, "Pumping of methane by St707 at low temperatures," Journal of Vacuum and Science Technology," vol. A4, no. 3, May/June 1986, pages 300-302, which is incorporated by reference. As noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature of
approximately 700 degrees Centigrade for at least 20 seconds and then reducing the temperature to between approximately 400 degrees Centigrade and approximately 25 degrees Centigrade. Also as noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10~2 torr. A "heat-sensitive material," as used herein, for use with an embodiment incorporating getters fabricated from a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material, would be a heat-sensitive material that is predicted to lose its structural integrity in a temperature of approximately 700 degrees Centigrade lasting for at least 20 seconds. A "heat-sensitive material," as used herein, for use with an embodiment incorporating getters fabricated from a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material, would lose its structural integrity at a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees
Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10"2 torr. For example, in some embodiments the structural region 180 is fabricated from a heat-sensitive material that includes aluminum, or aluminum alloy that loses its structural integrity at temperatures above 250 degrees Centigrade. See: Ishimaru et al., "New all aluminum alloy vacuum system for the TRISTAN e+e- storage accelerator," IEEE
Transactions on Nuclear Science, Vol. NS-28, no. 3, 1981, pages 3320-3322, which is incorporated by reference.
The term "structural integrity," as used herein, refers to a structure maintaining its fabricated form in a set of given conditions. Loss of structural integrity, correspondingly, refers to the failure of a structure to maintain its fabricated form in a set of conditions. "Heat-sensitive" materials, as used herein, refers to materials that lose their structural integrity at temperatures below the activation temperature(s) and under the activation condition(s) for the types of getter(s) 4110 used in an embodiment of an apparatus 4185. Conditions affecting loss of structural integrity may include temperature ranges, such as excessively hot or cold temperatures, and gas pressures, such as minimal gas pressure within an interior region. Conditions affecting loss of structural integrity may include conditions of intended use, such as weight-bearing, erosion, compressive strength, or tensile strength. Loss of structural integrity may be overt or gross, such as when a structure in whole or part melts, deforms, distorts, implodes, or combusts. Loss of structural integrity may include a change the outgassing properties of a material used in fabrication of a structure, for example a plastic material with low outgassing properties may exhibit increased outgassing properties in a set of given conditions, such as temperature or gas pressure. Loss of structural integrity may also be inconspicuous or undetectable to a cursory inspection, such as in the formation of a small hole, surface thinning, alteration of a crystalline or other non-overt structure of a fabricated material, or loss of cohesion at a weld or joint. For example, in some embodiments, aluminum and aluminum alloys are "heat-sensitive," as used herein, and may lose their structural integrity in some conditions required to activate some types of getters employed in the specific embodiment. For example, although aluminum and aluminum alloys may not completely melt into a liquid form at temperatures above 250 degrees Centigrade, in some instances they will begin to soften and, as such, lose their structural integrity. Similarly, copper and copper alloys may be considered heat-sensitive materials in some
embodiments. See Koyatsu et al., "Measurements of outgassing rate from copper and copper alloy chambers," Vacuum, vol. 47, no. 6-8, 1996, pages 709-711, which is incorporated by reference. When combined with the force of gravity on the structural region 4180 and any force due to a low gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120, aluminum and aluminum alloys at temperatures above 250 degrees Centigrade may lose their structural integrity and manufactured form and compress, shift, or bend. Similarly, plastic and plastic composites used in some embodiments may be heat sensitive materials.
As illustrated in Figure 41, in some embodiments the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180 together substantially define the gas-sealed gap 120. For example, the gas-sealed gap 120 may be primarily defined by the boundaries of the inner wall 10 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180. For example, the gas- sealed gap 120 may be substantially established by the boundaries of the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180. Junctions between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 may be, for example, welds, bonds or seals that substantially isolate the gas-sealed gap 120 from the gas environment external to the structural region 4180. In some embodiments, the junctions between the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105 may include additional material, such as welding agents, solder, brazing material or other sealing materials to establish and maintain the isolation of the gas-sealed gap 120 from the gas environment external to the structural region 4180.
In some embodiments, the gas-sealed gap 120 includes additional material. In some embodiments, the gas-sealed gap 120 includes additional material designed to improve the durability and stability of the structural region 4180. For example, the gas- sealed gap 120 may include structural features, such as one or more flanges, struts, braces, crossbars, or posts that may be configured to maintain the stability of the structural region 180. For example, the gas-sealed gap 120 may include internal support structure, such as reinforced regions of the inner wall 110 and the outer wall 105.
In some embodiments, the gas-sealed gap 120 includes additional insulating material that improves the thermal properties of the structural region 4180. For example, the gas-sealed gap 120 may include multilayer insulation material (MLI). See: Wiedmann et al., "Multi Layer Insulation Literature," DLR, Institute of Structural Mechanics, 20 pages total; Wei et al., "Effects of structure and shape on thermal performance of perforated multi-layer insulation blankets," Applied Thermal Engineering, vol. 29, 2009, pages 1264-1266; Halaczek and Rafalowicz, "Heat transport in self-pumping multilayer insulation," Cryogenics, vol. 26, 1986, pages 373-376; Shu et al., "Heat flux from 277 to 77 K through a few layers of multilayer insulation," Cryogenics vol. 26, 1986, pages 671- 677; Jacob et al., "Investigations into the thermal performance of multilayer insulation (300 - 77 K) Part 1 : Calorimetric studies," Cryogenics, vol. 32, no. 12, 1992, pages 1137- 1146; Jacob et al., "Investigations into the thermal performance of multilayer insulation (300 - 77 K) Part 2: Thermal analysis," Cryogenics, vol. 32, no. 12, 1992, pages 1147- 1153; Halaczek and Rafalowicz, "Unguarded cryostat for thermal conductivity
measurements of multilayer insulations," Cryogenics, vol. 25, 1985, pages 529-530;
Mikhalchenko et al., "Theoretical and experimental investigation of radiative-conductive heat transfer in multilayer insulation," Cryogenics, vol. 25, 1985, pages 275-278; Bapat et al., "Experimental investigations of multilayer insulation," Cryogenics, vol. 30, 1990, pages 711-719; US Patent no. 5,590,054 to Mcintosh, titled "Variable-density method for multi-layer insulation;" Zhitomirskil et al., "A theoretical model of the heat transfer process in multilayer insulation," Cryogenics, 1979, pages 265-268; Shu, "Systematic study to reduce the effects of cracks in multilayer insulation Part 1 : theoretical model," Cryogenics, vol. 27, 1987, pages 249-256; Shu, "Systematic study to reduce the effects of cracks in multilayer insulation Part 2: experimental results," Cryogenics, vol. 27, 1987, pages 298-311 ; Glassford and Liu, "Outgassing rate of multilayer insulation," Lockheed Palo Alto Research Laboratory, pages 83-106; Halaczak and Rafalowicz, "Flat-plate cryostat for measurements of multilayer insulation thermal conductivity," Cryogenics, vol. 25, 1985, pages 593-595; Matsuda and Yoshikiyo, "Simple structure insulating material properties for multilayer insulation," Cryogenics, 1980, pages 135-138; Keller et al., "Application of high temperature multilayer insulations," Acta Astronautica, vol. 26, no. 6, 1992, pages 451-458; Scurlock and Saull, "Development of multilayer insulations with thermal conductivities below 01. cm"1 K"1," Cryogenics, May 1976, pages 303-31 1 ; Bapat et al., "Performance prediction of multilayer insulation," Cryogenics vol. 30, 1990, pages 700-710; and Kropschot, "Multiple layer insulation for cryogenic applications," Cryogenics, 1961 , pages 171-177; which are each incorporated by reference.
In some embodiments, there is at least one layer of multilayer insulation material
("MLI") within the gas-sealed gap 120. In some embodiments, there are a plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material within the gas-sealed gap 120, wherein the layers may not be homogeneous. For example, the plurality of layers of multilayer insulation material may include layers of differing thicknesses, or layers with and without associated spacing elements. In some embodiments there may be one or more additional layers within or in addition to the insulation material, such as, for example, an outer structural layer or an inner structural layer.
As illustrated in Figure 41, during some steps of the methods described herein, and when included with the apparatus 4185, the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180 is open to the interior of the connector 4120. The structural region 4180 is joined to the connector 4120 in a manner to form a substantially gas sealed space with the interior of the gas-sealed gap 120. The structural region 4180 is operably attached to the connector 4120 with a seal sufficient to maintain low gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120, such as through action of the vacuum pump 4130. The structural region 4180 is operably attached to the connector 4120 with a seal sufficient to maintain minimal gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap 120, such as through action of the vacuum pump 4130. For example, the structural region 4180 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 with a seal sufficient to maintain gas pressure less than or equal to lxl 0"2 torr within the gas-sealed gap 120 through action of the vacuum pump 4130. As illustrated in Figure 41, some embodiments may include a valve 4135 integral to the connector 4120 and adjacent to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180, wherein the valve 4135 is operably attached in an orientation to isolate the interior of the connector 4120 on the opposing ends of the valve 4135.
The apparatus 4185 includes an activation region 4100 fabricated from a heat- resistant material, the activation region 4100 including one or more getters 4110.
Although a single activation region 4100 is depicted in Figures 41-44, in some
embodiments there may be a plurality of activation regions that may be fabricated from the same or different heat-resistant materials and may contain either the same or different types of getters. In embodiments with a plurality of activation regions, each region may be independently operably attached to a connector. In embodiments with a plurality of activation regions, there may be one or more valves operably attached between one or more of the plurality of activation regions and the associated connector.
As used herein, the term "heat-resistant material" refers to materials that maintain their structural integrity at temperatures and conditions above the activation temperature(s) and within the condition(s) for the types of getter(s) 4110 used in the apparatus 4185. The term "heat-resistant," as used herein, is relative to the activation temperature(s) and gas pressure conditions used for the specific getters 4110 included in a given embodiment. For example, in some embodiments the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include zirconium-vanadium-iron getters (see US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein). For example, in some embodiments the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include St707™ getters with 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron (for example, available from Getter Technologies International Ltd., China). See: Gunter et al., "Microstructure and bulk reactivity of the nonevaporable getter
Zr57V36Fe7," Journal of Vacuum Science Technology, Vol. A16, no.6, Nov/Dec 1998, pages 3526-3535, which is incorporated by reference. As noted in US Patent No.
4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature of approximately 700 degrees Centigrade for at least 20 seconds and then reducing the temperature to between approximately 400 degrees Centigrade and approximately 25 degrees Centigrade. Also as noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between
approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10"2 torr. A "heat- resistant material," as used herein, for use with an embodiment incorporating getters fabricated from a zirconium-vanadium-iron getter material, would be a heat-resistant material that is predicted to maintain its structural integrity in a temperature of
approximately 700 degrees Centigrade lasting for at least 20 seconds. A "heat-resistant material," as used herein, for use with an embodiment incorporating getters fabricated from a zirconium-vanadium-iron getter material, would conserve its structural integrity at a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10"2 torr. For example, in some embodiments the getters 4110 included in the apparatus 4185 may include getters fabricated from a titanium-zirconium- vanadium getter material. See: Matolin and Johanek, "Static SIMS study of TiZrV NEG activation," Vacuum, vol. 67, 2002, pages 177-184, which is incorporated by reference. A "heat-resistant material," as used herein, for use with an embodiment incorporating getters fabricated from a titanium-zirconium- vanadium getter material, would conserve its structural integrity at a temperature less of approximately 300 degrees Centigrade with a gas pressure within the interior of approximately 5x10"11 mbar {see Matolin and Johanek, ibid, which is incorporated by reference). For example, in some embodiments the structural region 4180 is fabricated from a heat-resistant material that includes stainless steel, or stainless steel alloys. For example, in some embodiments the structural region 4180 is fabricated from a heat-resistant material that includes titanium alloy.
Getters of a variety of types may be used in different embodiments. The getters may be fabricated from a variety of getter materials. For example, the getters may be fabricated from non-evaporatable getter material. The selection of getters may depend, for example, on the availability, cost, mass, chemical composition, toxicity and durability of the getter material employed in a given embodiment. The selection of getters may depend, for example, on the activation temperature and conditions for a particular getter material. Some types of getters are activatable at different temperatures and gas pressure conditions for different lengths of time (see, e.g. US Patent No. 4,312,669 "Non-evaporable Ternary Gettering Alloy and Method of Use for the Sorption of Water, Water Vapor and Other Gasses," to Boffito et al., which is incorporated by reference), and for such getter materials the selection of the materials may depend on the range of potential temperatures, gas pressure conditions, and times, or one or more combinations of activation
temperatures, gas pressure conditions and times for a specific getter material. Some getters may require gas pressure conditions less than atmospheric pressures, such as near- vacuum conditions, during activation at particular temperatures (see Matolin and Johanek, ibid, and US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., which are each incorporated by reference). The selection of getters may depend, for example, on the operational temperature of a given getter material, such as within ambient temperatures (i.e. substantially between 20 degrees Centigrade and 30 degrees Centigrade), within refrigeration temperatures (i.e. substantially between 2 degrees Centigrade and 10 degrees Centigrade) or within freezing temperatures (for example, substantially between 0 degrees Centigrade and -10 degrees Centigrade, or substantially between -15 degrees Centigrade and -25 degrees Centigrade). Some embodiments may include a single type of getters, for example getters fabricated from substantially the same active getter material. Some embodiments may include a plurality of types of getters fabricated from substantially distinct getter materials. More information regarding types of getters and getter materials suitable for various
embodiments of the invention may be found in: Tripathi et al., "Hydrogen intake capacity of ZrVFe alloy bulk getters," Vacuum, vol. 48, no. 12, 1997, pages 1023-1025; Benvenuti et al., "Nonevaporable getter films for ultrahigh vacuum applications," Journal of Vacuum and Science Technology, vol. A16, no. 1 , Jan/Feb 1998, pages 148-154; Benvenuti et al., "Decreasing surface outgassing by thin film getter coatings," Vacuum, vol. 50, nos. 1-2, 1998, pages 57-63; Boffito et al., "A nonevaporable low temperature activatable getter material," Journal of Vacuum and Science Technology, vol. 18, no. 3, May/June 1981, pages 1117-1 120; della Porta, "Gas problem and gettering in s.ealed-off vacuum devices," Vacuum, vol. 47, nos 6-8, 1996, pages 771-777; Benvenuti and Chiggiato, "Obtention of pressures in the 10-14 toor range by means of a Zr-V-Fe non evaporable getter," Vacuum, vol. 44, nos. 5-7, 1993, pages 51 1-513; Londer et al., "New high capacity getter for vacuum insulated mobile LH2 storage tank systems," Vacuum, vol. 82, 2008, pages 431- 434; Li et al., "Design and pumping characteristics of a compact titanium-vanadium nonevaporable getter pump," Journal of Vacuum and Science Technology, vol. A16, no. 3, May/June 1998, pages 1139-1 144; Chiggiato, "Production of extreme high vacuum with non evaporable getters," Physica Scripta, vol. T71, 1997, pages 9-13; Benvenuit and Chiaggiato, "Pumping characteristics of the St707 nonevaporable getter (Zr 70 V 24.6-Fe 5.4 wt %)," Journal of Vacuum and Science Technology, vol. A14, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1996, pages 3278-3282; Day, "The use of active carbons as cryosorbent," Colloids and Surfaces A: Physicochem. Eng. Aspects 187-188, 2001, pages 187-206; US Patent No. 4,312,669 "Non-evaporable Ternary Gettering Alloy and Method of Use for the Sorption of Water, Water Vapor and Other Gasses," to Boffito et al; Hobson and Chapman, "Pumping of methane by St707 at low temperatures," Journal of Vacuum and Science Technology, vol. A4, no. 3, May/June 1986, pages 300-302; and Matolin and Johanek, "Static SIMS study of TiZrV NEG activation," Vacuum, vol. 67, 2002, pages 177-184; which are each incorporated by reference. As illustrated in Figure 41, the activation region 4100 includes walls forming a gas-sealed interior. The gas-sealed interior of the activation region 4100 encloses one or more getters 4110. Also as illustrated in Figure 41, the activation region 4100 includes a gas-sealed interior enclosing one or more getters 4110, wherein the gas-sealed interior of the activation region 4100 is open to the interior of the connector 4120. The gas-sealed interior of the activation region 4100 is configured to maintain a reduced gas pressure as established by the vacuum pump 4130. Although not illustrated in Figure 41, some embodiments may include a valve (e.g. as valve 4135) located integral to the connector 4120 at a location adjacent to the activation region 4100, the valve configured to isolate the gas pressure within the connector 4120 at the opposite sides of the valve.
As noted herein, the apparatus 4185 is configured to establish and maintain a reduced gas pressure environment within the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180. Accordingly, the one or more getters 4110 may include non-evaporatable getter material. The one or more getters 4110 may include zirconium, vanadium and iron. For example, the one or more getters 4110 may include 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron. For example, the one or more getters 4110 may include St707 getters
(available, for example, from SAES Getters Group, with corporate headquarters in Lainate, Italy; see attached online brochure downloaded on September 22, 2011, which is incorporated by reference herein). Similar getter materials are also available from other sources, such as Getter Technologies International Ltd., China.
As illustrated in Figure 41, the apparatus 4185 includes a connector 4120 attached to the structural region 4180 and to the activation region 4100, the connector 4120 including a flexible region 4125 and a region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100. The connector 4120 may be fabricated, for example, from stainless steel or stainless steel alloy. The connector 4120 may be fabricated, for example, from different materials in different regions, as appropriate to the embodiment. Generally, the connector 4120 is fabricated from material(s) with low vapor emission on the surface within the connector 4120 as well as sufficient strength, durability, and heat tolerance for a specific embodiment and associated methods (as described further in the section below). Cost, weight, and flexibility may also be factors in the selection of material(s) for fabrication of the connector 4120. See, for example, Nemanic and Setina, "A study of thermal treatment procedures to reduce hydrogen outgassing rate in thin wall stainless steel cells," Vacuum, vol. 53, 1999, pages 277-280; and Koyatsu et al., "Measurements of outgassing rate from copper and copper alloy chambers," Vacuum, vol. 47, no. 6-8, 1996, pages 709-711, which are each incorporated by reference.
The connector may include a valve 4135 configured to inhibit the flow of gas within the connector 4120. Some embodiments may include more than one valve. As illustrated in Figure 41, a valve 4135 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 at a location between the vacuum pump 4130 and the outer wall 105 of the structural region. The valve 4135 may be operably attached to the connector 4120 at a location between the vacuum pump 4130 and the region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100.
As illustrated in Figure 41, in some embodiments the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is adjacent to the activation region 4100 of the apparatus 4185. The flexible region 4125 is configured to allow the activation region 4100 to shift orientation relative to the remainder of the apparatus 4185 (see also Figures 42-44) while retaining the low gas pressure within the connector as established and maintained by the vacuum pump 4130. As illustrated in Figure 41, the flexible region 4125 is configured in an arc forming approximately a right angle, with the result that the activation region 4100 and the structural region 4180 are not in a horizontally linear alignment. As illustrated in Figures 41-44, in some embodiments the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is configured to flex along the long axis of the connector 4120 (i.e. as depicted by the double headed arrow in Figure 41). The change in configuration of the flexible region 4125 results in the change in relative orientation of the activation region 4100 and the structural region 4180, as illustrated in Figures 41-44. The flexible region 4125 may be flexible due to the combination of the material from which it is fabricated as well as the configuration of that material. For example, the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 may be fabricated from stainless steel in a bellows-type configuration. A bellows-type configuration would be fabricated from suitable material and configured to allow for flexibility in the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120. For example, the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 may be fabricated from stainless steel and configured in a corrugated, channeled, grooved or ridged shape to allow for flexibility of the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120.
As illustrated in Figure 41, the apparatus 4185 includes a vacuum pump 4130 operably attached to the connector 4120. The vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to establish a gas pressure within the apparatus 4185 less than the gas pressure in the environment adjacent to the apparatus 4185. In some embodiments, the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to establish a gas pressure that is substantially evacuated. In some embodiments, the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to establish a gas pressure that is near vacuum. For example, in some embodiments the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to evacuate the gas-sealed gap 120 in the interior of the structural region 4180, the interior of the activation region 4100 and the interior of the connector 4120 to a gas pressure less than or equal to 1 10" torr. For example, in some embodiments the vacuum pump 4130 has sufficient pumping strength to evacuate the gas-sealed gap 120 in the interior of the structural region 4180, the interior of the activation region 4100 and the interior of the connector 4120 to a gas pressure less than or equal to 5xl0"3 torr, 5x10" torr, 5xl0~5 torr, 5xl0"6 torr or 5xl0"7 torr. The vacuum pump 4130 may be a rotary vane style vacuum pump. Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by Pfeiffer Balzers Company, (Pfeiffer Vacuum GmbH, Germany). Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by the Edwards Vacuum Company (US Headquarters
Tewksbury MA; Global Headquarters United Kingdom). Vacuum pumps suitable in some embodiments include Pfeiffer Balzers model TSH060 and Edwards model RV12.
The apparatus 4185 includes a region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100. In some embodiments, the apparatus 4185 includes a region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the connector 4120 adjacent to the structural region 4180 along the length of the connector 4120. As illustrated in Figure 41 , the region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the remainder of the apparatus 4185 may be located in a region of the connector 4120 adjacent to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180. The apparatus 4185 includes a region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment configured to allow for the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180 to maintain its low gas pressure (e.g. less than or equal to lxlO"2 torr) during detachment of the structural region 4180 from the remainder of the apparatus 4185. The region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100 may be, for example, a section of aluminum tubing. In embodiments using aluminum tubing for the region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100, the aluminum tube may be, for example, one half inch in diameter and 0.035 inches thick tubing, such as model 3003-O available from Aircraft Spruce and Specialty Company (Corona, CA). In embodiments including aluminum tubing for the region 4127 of the connector 4120 configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region 4180 from the activation region 4100, the aluminum tube may be, for example, collapsed on itself (i.e. "pinched off') and the edges sealed together using a pinch and crimp
instrument. For example, an ultrasonic welder may be used to seal and detach the sections of aluminum tubing.
The apparatus 4185, as illustrated in Figures 41-44 and as described in the associated methods herein, is designed and fabricated to allow activated getters 41 10 to be moved within the apparatus 4185 from the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 into the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180. The activated getters 4110 are moved within the apparatus 4185 while the interior spaces of the activation region 4100, the connector 4120 and the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180 include gas pressure lower than that in the environment surrounding the apparatus 4185. The activated getters 41 10 are moved within the apparatus 4185 while the interior spaces of the activation region 4100, the connector 4120 and the gas-sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180 are being actively evacuated by the vacuum pump 4130.
Further aspects of the apparatus 4185 are shown in Figures 42-44. Figures 42-44 illustrate additional aspects of the apparatus 4185 shown in Figure 41, particularly in relation to the design and fabrication of the apparatus 4185 to allow the activated getters 4110 to move within the interior of the connector 4120 between the activation region 4100 and the gas- sealed gap 120.
Figure 42 depicts the apparatus 4185 with the flexible region 4125 of the connector
4120 moved so that the activation region 4100 is directly above the structural region 4180. As shown in Figure 42, the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is fabricated and configured to allow it to bend into a substantially straight configuration. As is apparent from the combination of Figures 41 and 42, the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 is fabricated and configured to allow it to bend from a substantially right angle (as shown in Figure 41) to a substantially linear configuration (as shown in Figure 42). This motion is depicted by the double-headed arrow in Figure 42. The apparatus 4185 depicted in Figure 42 is oriented with the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 so that the activation region 4100 is directly above the structural region 4180 to allow for the getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C, to fall with the force of gravity (depicted by the single headed arrows) through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120.
Figure 42 also depicts the motion of the activated getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 4110 C, from the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 (e.g. illustrated with single- headed arrows). For purposes of illustration, the getters 41 10 as shown in Figure 41 are given individual identifiers A, B and C in Figure 42; however, the individual getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C are intended to be equivalent to the group of getters 41 10 shown in Figures 41 , 43, 44 and 45. Although three individual getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C in a substantially oval shape are shown, the specific number and shape of the getters 41 10 would depend on the specific embodiment. As illustrated in Figure 42, the apparatus 4185 is fabricated from material configured to allow the getters 41 10 A, 41 10 B, 41 10 C to move from the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120. The getters 41 10 selected for a particular embodiment should be of a size and shape to move out of the activation region 4100, through the connector 4120, and into the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180. Getters in a form with rounded edges are well-suited for this purpose, but getters of varying shapes may be used in different embodiments. Getters formed as granules may be utilized in some embodiments, however getters formed as granular shapes may become stuck within the connector 4120 and not move easily into the gas-sealed gap 120. Preferably, the entirety of the getters 41 10 should be located within the gas-sealed gap 120 at the end of the method steps. Preferably, no getters 41 10 should remain in the connector 4120 during sealing of the connector 4120. For example, the getter material may reduce the integrity of the sealed region of the connector 4120.
Correspondingly, the activation region 4100 should be operably attached to the connector 4120 in a manner to minimally impede the movement of the getters 41 10 out of the activation region 4100 and into the internal region within the connector 4120. The attachment should provide a sufficient seal to allow for the establishment and maintenance of a reduced gas pressure (e.g. less than or equal to lxl O"2 torr) within the interior of the apparatus 4185 by the vacuum pump 4130. For example, in embodiments where the apparatus is fabricated from metal, the activation region 4100 may be attached to the connector 4120 by weld junctions. These weld junctions should be sufficiently smooth and minimally facing on the interior of the apparatus 4185 to provide minimal impedance of the getters 41 10 through the connector 4120. Similarly, the structural region 4180 should be operably attached to the connector 4120 in a manner to minimally impede the movement of the getters 41 10 out of the interior of the connector 4120 and into the gas- sealed gap 120 within the structural region 4180.
The interior diameter of the connector 4120, including within its own regions 4125 and 4127, as well as the interior diameter of any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) opening(s) should be suitable for the passage of the getters 4110 through the apparatus 4185 between the activation region 4100 and the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180. The size and shape of any particular getters 4110 used should be less than the interior diameter of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) utilized within the apparatus 4185. The interior of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) incorporated into the apparatus 4185 should include minimal surfaces which may impede the movement of the getters 4110 through the apparatus 4185. For example, the interior of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) should be substantially smooth, without sharp, jutting, or rough edges that may impede the getters 4110. For example, the interior of the connector 4120 and any valve(s) (e.g. 4135) should be substantially free of internal elements, such as struts or braces, which may inhibit getters 4110 travelling through the interior. Generally, the interior of the apparatus 4185 should be designed and fabricated to allow for the direct movement of the getters 4110 from the interior of the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180 when the activation region 4100, connector 4120 and the structural region 4180 are appropriately oriented (i.e. as depicted in Figure 42). In some embodiments, the interior of the apparatus 4185 should be designed and fabricated to allow for the direct movement of the getters 4110 from the interior of the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180, such as through the force of gravity, when the activation region 4100, connector 4120 and the structural region 4180 are appropriately positioned (i.e. as depicted in Figure 42). In some embodiments, the interior of the apparatus 4185 should be designed and fabricated to allow for the direct movement of the getters 4110 through mechanical transfer from the interior of the activation region 4100 through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 in the structural region 4180.
Figure 42 depicts the flexible region 4125 of the connector 4120 in a substantially straight configuration, and with the activation region 4100 of the apparatus 4185 positioned above the structural region 4180. The apparatus is fabricated to allow the flexible region 4125 of the connector to move the relative positioning of the apparatus 4185, as illustrated in the double-headed arrow, between the position shown in Figure 41 and that shown in Figure 42. Figure 42 depicts getter 41 10 A in a position to soon fall through the force of gravity (depicted by downward facing arrows) through the connector 4120 and into the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180. Figure 42 also depicts getter 41 10 B positioned within the connector 4120 and moving through the force of gravity through the connector 4120 towards the structural region 4180. Figure 42 depicts getter 4110 C in the junction between the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180 and the connector 4120 adjacent to the outer wall 105.
Figure 43 illustrates the apparatus 4185 positioned similarly to that shown in
Figure 42, at a later stage (see methods described herein). In the view illustrated in Figure 43, the activated getters 4110 are all positioned within the gas-sealed gap 120 of the structural region 4180. Although the activated getters 4110 are illustrated in a cluster in Figure 43, they may also be distributed within the gas-sealed gap 120. In some embodiments, structural elements within the gas-sealed gap 120 confine some or all of the activated getters 41 10 into a defined region of the gas-sealed gap 120. For example, the gas-sealed gap 120 may include internal braces or struts that restrict the mobility of the getters 4110 within the gas-sealed gap 120. For example, the gas-sealed gap 120 may include wire netting material configured to restrict the movement of the getters 41 10 within the gas-sealed gap 120.
Figure 43 depicts that the connector 4120 includes a crimped area 4300 with the opposing faces of the connector brought together to form a gas-impermeable seal. The crimped area 4300 is within the region 4127 configured for sealing and detachment of the connector 4120. As shown in Figure 43, the crimped area 4300 may be positioned adjacent to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180, but with a length 4320 of the connector 4120 between the crimped area 4300 and the surface of the outer wall 105. Also as shown in Figure 43, there may be a length 4310 of the connector 4120 between the crimped area 4300 and a valve 4135. As illustrated by the double-headed arrows in Figure 43, after the crimped area 4300 is formed, the structural region 4180 is detached from the remainder of the apparatus 4185. In order to detach the structural region 4180 from the remainder of the apparatus 4185, the connector 4120 is separated at the crimped area while maintaining the reduced gas pressure (e.g. less than or equal to l lO"2 torr) within the gas- sealed gap 120. In some embodiments, a gas-impermeable seal may be formed in the connector 4120 substantially simultaneously as the separation at the sealed site. For example, the connector 4120 may be sealed and separated with an ultrasonic welding device.
Figure 44 shows the apparatus 4185 positioned similarly to that shown in Figure 43, at a later stage (see methods described herein). In Figure 44, the activated getters 4110 are within the gas-sealed gap 120. Also as shown in Figure 44, the connector 4120 has been separated at the crimped area 4300. The separation of the connector 4120 at the crimped area 4300 results in the detachment of the structural region 4180 from the remainder of the apparatus 4185 (double headed arrows). Figure 44 also shows a sealing agent 4400 applied to the surface of the crimped area 4300 adjacent to the structural region 4180. The sealing agent 4400 is positioned and applied to ensure that the crimped area 4300 adjacent to the structural region 4180 maintains its structural integrity and does not include any holes or spaces that would permit gas from the environment external to the outer wall 105 to enter the gas-sealed gap 120. The sealing agent 4400, if included in a particular embodiment, adheres to the surface of the separated crimped area 4300 to form a gas-tight seal on the interior of the connector length 4310 adjacent to the outer wall 105. For example, the sealing agent may include epoxy material.
Figure 45 illustrates an optional method of preparation of the metallic system components of the apparatus prior to assembly of the apparatus. In order to establish and maintain a substantially reduced gas pressure (e.g. less than or equal to 1x10" torr) within the apparatus, the metallic surfaces of the components of the apparatus may optionally be cleaned and prepared to minimize outgassing from surface contaminants on the metallic surfaces. Figure 45 depicts, as an example, a flowchart of a method that may be used in some embodiments to prepare the metallic system components of the apparatus as described herein prior to assembly of the apparatus. See also Y.T. Sasaki, "A survey of vacuum material cleaning procedures: A subcommittee report of the American Vacuum Society Recommended Practices Committee," Journal of Vacuum Science & Technology A: Vacuum, Surfaces, and Films, vol. 9, May. 1991, p. 2025, which is incorporated by reference.
Figure 45 illustrates a flowchart of a method to prepare metallic system
components prior to assembly 4500 of an apparatus. Block 4510 depicts cleaning components with denatured alcohol. This step may reduce grease, oil and similar contaminants on the surfaces of the components. The flowchart also includes optional
- I l l - block 4520, illustrating mechanically polishing the components. See, for example, Kato et al., "Achievement of extreme high vacuum in the order of 10"10 Pa without baking of test chamber," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A8, no. 3, May/June 1990, pages 2860-2864, which is incorporated by reference. This step may be omitted, for example wherein the components already are sufficiently smooth. See: S. Okamura, "Outgassing measurement of finely polished stainless steel," Journal of Vacuum Science & Technology A: Vacuum, Surfaces, and Films, vol. 9, Jul. 1991, p. 2405; M. Suemitsu et al., "Ultrahigh-vacuum compatible mirror-polished aluminum-alloy surface: Observation of surface-roughness-correlated outgassing rates," Journal of Vacuum Science &
Technology A: Vacuum, Surfaces, and Films, vol. 10, 1992, pp. 570-572; M. Suemitsu et al., "Development of extremely high vacuums with mirror-polished AL-alloy chambers," Vacuum, vol. 44, nos. 5-7, 1993, pages 425-428; H.F. Dylla, "Correlation of outgassing of stainless steel and aluminum with various surface treatments," Journal of Vacuum Science & Technology A: Vacuum, Surfaces, and Films, vol. 11, Sep. 1993, p. 2623; Mohri et al., "Surface study of Type 6063 aluminum alloys for vacuum chamber materials," Vacuum, vol. 34, no. 6, 1984, pages 643-647; and Y.T. Sasaki, "Reducing SS 30 316 hydrogen outgassing to 2x10[sup -15] torr Vcm[sup 2] s," Journal of Vacuum Science &
Technology A: Vacuum, Surfaces, and Films, vol. 25, 2007, p. 1309, which are all incorporated by reference. If the components are mechanically polished, they may be subsequently cleaned an additional time with denatured alcohol (not illustrated in Figure 45).
Block 4530 illustrates washing the components with detergents and water. A detergent washing step may reduce the presence of fine contaminants such as hydrocarbon oils and solvents, which may contribute to undesirable outgassing within the finished apparatus. See: R. Elsey, "Outgassing of vacuum materials-II," Vacuum, vol. 25, 1975, pp. 347-361, which is incorporated by reference. As an example, hand dishwashing detergent {i.e. Dawn Advanced Power Dish Soap, manufactured by the Procter & Gamble Company) may be used to hand wash the components in warm tap water and a standard soft sponge. As an additional example, the detergent Alconox® may be used to clean the components in tap water (available from Alconox Inc., White Plains NY). Optional block 4540 depicts rinsing the washed components with deionized water (DI water). Optional block 4550 illustrates blowing the components dry with dehumidified nitrogen gas, or a comparable inert gas. This step may reduce non-visible water molecules adhering to the surface of the components. See, for example: A. Berman, "Water vapor in vacuum systems," Vacuum, vol. 47, no. 4, 1996, pages 327-332; J.-R. Chen et al., "Outgassing behavior of A6063-EX aluminum alloy and SUS 304 stainless steel," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A5, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1987, pages 3422-3424; Y. C. Liu et al., "Thermal outgassing study on aluminum surfaces," Vacuum, vol. 44, nos. 5-7, 1993, pages 435-437; Chen and Liu, "A comparison of outgassing rate of 304 stainless steel and A6063-EX aluminum alloy vacuum chamber after filling with water," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A5, no. 2, Mar/ April 1987, pages 262-264; Ishimaru et al., "Fast pump-down aluminum ultrahigh vacuum system," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A10, no. 3, May/June 1992, pages 547-552; Miki et al., "Characteristics of extremely fast pump-down process in an aluminum ultrahigh vacuum system," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A12, no. 4, July/ August 1994, pages 1760-1766; and Chen et al., "Outgassing behavior on aluminum surfaces: water in vacuum systems," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A12, no. 4, Jul/Aug 1994, pages 1750- 1754, which are each incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, treatment with different types of gas may be included. See: Tatenuma et al., "Quick acquisition of clean ultrahigh vacuum by chemical process technology," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. Al 1, no. 4, July/ August 1993, pages 1719-1724; Tatenuma et al., "Acquisition of clean ultrahigh vacuum using chemical treatment," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A16, no. 4, July/ August 1998, pages 2693-2697; and L. C. Beavis, "Interaction of hydrogen with the surface of type 304 stainless steel," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. 10, no. 2, March/ April 1973, pages 386-390; which are incorporated by reference. Block 560 depicts baking the components under vacuum conditions. See, for example: H. Ishimaru, "Fast pump-down aluminum ultrahigh vacuum system," Journal of Vacuum Science & Technology A: Vacuum, Surfaces, and Films, vol. 10, May 1992, p. 547, which is incorporated by reference.
Baking components under vacuum conditions has been demonstrated to be useful for reducing outgassing from some materials, for example, for aluminum and stainless steel components. See: J. Young, "Outgassing Characteristics of Stainless Steel and Aluminum with Different Surface Treatments," Journal of Vacuum Science and
Technology, 1969; Odaka and Ueda, "Dependence of outgassing rate on surface oxide layer thickness in type 304 stainless steel before and after surface oxidation in air," Vacuum, no. 47, nos. 6-8, 1996, pages 689-692; Odaka et al., "Effect of baking temperature and air exposure on the outgassing rate of type 316L stainless steel," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A5, no. 5, Sept/Oct 1987, pages 2902-2906; Zajec and Nemanic, "Hydrogen bulk states in stainless-steel related to hydrogen release kinetics and associated redistribution phenomena," Vacuum, vol. 61, 2001, pages 447-452; Bernardini et al., "Air bake-out to reduce hydrogen outgassing from stainless steel," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A16, no. 1, Jan Feb 1998, pages 188- 193; Nemanic et al., "Anomalies in kinetics of hydrogen evolution from austenitic stainless steel from 300 to 1000° C," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A19, no. 1, Jan/Feb 2001, pages 215-222; Nemanic and Bogataj, "Outgassing of thin wall stainless steel chamber," Vacuum, vol. 50, no. 3-4, 1998, pages 431-437; Cho et al., "Creation of extreme high vacuum with a turbomolecular pumping system: a baking approach," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A13, no. 4, July/ August 1995, pages 2228-2232; and Y. Ishikawa and K. Odaka, "Reduction of outgassing from stainless surfaces by surface oxidation," Vacuum, vol. 41, 1990, pp. 1995-1997; which are incorporated by reference. For example, stainless steel components may be baked for 30 hours at 250 degrees Centigrade in a chamber with a gas pressure of approximately 1x10" torr. As an additional example, aluminum components or composite components may be baked at 150 degrees Centigrade for 60-70 hours in a chamber with a gas pressure of approximately lxlO"2 torr. See also: Chen et al., "An aluminum vacuum chamber for the bending magnet of the SRRC synchrotron light source," Vacuum, vol. 41, nos. 7-9, 1990, pages 2079-2081; Burns et al., "Outgassing test for non-metallic materials associated with sensitive optical surfaces in a space environment," Materials and Processes Laboaratory, George C. Marshall Space Flight Center, 1987; and Chen et al., "Thermal outgassing from aluminum alloy vacuum chambers," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A3, no. 6, Nov/Dec 1985, pages 2188-2191, which are each incorporated by reference. In addition or alternately, baking components in the presence of inert gas has been
demonstrated to be useful for reducing outgassing from some materials. In some embodiments, as an alternate to near-vacuum gas pressure conditions, the components are baked in the presence of inert gas, such as nitrogen.
After the components are cleaned and prepared, the components of the apparatus are assembled. A helium leak check may be performed to ensure that seals and/or junctions are sufficient to maintain reduced gas pressure conditions within the interior of the apparatus. In addition, the apparatus may be purged with dehydrated nitrogen gas during the check of the final assembly. See: K. Yamazaki, et al., "High-speed pumping to UHV," Vacuum, vol. 84, Dec. 2009, pp. 756-759; and Chun et al., "outgassing rate characteristic of a stainless-steel extreme high vacuum system," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A14, no. 4, July/August 1996, pages 2636-2640; which are incorporated by reference.
Figure 46 illustrates a flowchart of a method utilizing an apparatus such as those described herein (as above). Figure 46 depicts a method 4600, including steps depicted as blocks 4610, 4620, 4630, 4640 and 4650. Block 4610 illustrates establishing vacuum within a gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions. As used herein, "vacuum" refers to the gas pressure in substantially evacuated space. As used herein, "vacuum" refers to a low gas pressure relative to the gas pressure in the environment external to the apparatus. Different levels of vacuum may be suitable in different embodiments. For example, as used herein, "vacuum" refers to substantially evacuated space that may have a gas pressure less than lxlO"2 torr, less than 5xl0"3 torr, less than 5x10^ torr, less than 5xl0"5 torr, less than 5xl0"6 torr or less than 5x10~7 torr. Different gas pressures may be desirable depending on the specific embodiment, including factors such as durability, cost, components, fabrication, structure and expected duration of use. The vacuum may be established within an interior of the at least one activation region, within an interior of the at least one structural region, and within an interior of the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus. The vacuum may be established utilizing a vacuum pump operably connected to the gas-sealed apparatus. Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by Pfeiffer Balzers Company, (Pfeiffer Vacuum GmbH, Germany). Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by the Edwards Vacuum Company (US Headquarters Tewksbury MA; Global Headquarters United Kingdom). Vacuum pumps suitable in some embodiments include Pfeiffer Balzers model TSH060 and Edwards model RV12. See also Ishimaru and Hismatsu, "Turbomolecular pump with an ultimate pressure of 10" Torr," Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology, vol. A 12, no. 4, July/ August 1994, pages 1695-1698; and Jhung et al., "Achievement of extremely high vacuum using a cryopump and conflate aluminum gaskets," Vacuum, vol. 43, no. 4, 1992, pages 309-311, which are each incorporated by reference. In some embodiments, heating the apparatus components while establishing the vacuum may reduce the time required to establish vacuum, for example by increasing the rate of evaporation of traces of water on the surfaces of the interior of the apparatus. In order to heat the apparatus components while establishing the vacuum, the apparatus may be placed within an oven of suitable size and operating conditions. In addition or alternately, in order to heat the apparatus components while establishing the vacuum, the exterior surfaces of the apparatus may be wrapped with heat tape, and the base of the apparatus may be placed on a hot plate. Suitable heat tape for some embodiments includes, for example, insulated heat tapes and may include fiberglass heavy insulated heat tapes (e.g. model AIH-0510100 from HTS/Amptek Corporation, Stafford Texas). The gas-sealed apparatus may be heated, for example, in temperature increments to ensure even heating, to allow time to monitor the apparatus, to allow for maintenance of the low gas pressure within the interior, and to ensure that the apparatus does not over-heat. The apparatus may be heated, as an example, to approximately 130-150 degrees Centigrade in approximately 50 degree increments during establishment of vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus. The apparatus may be heated, as an example, to approximately 180-220 degrees Centigrade in approximately 20 degree increments during establishment of vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus. Depending on the embodiment, establishing the vacuum may take several days, even with heating of the apparatus components assisting in a reduction of the time required. For example, establishing the vacuum may take a time on the order of 5-7 days of continual action by the vacuum pump and heating of the apparatus components. Even after suitable cleaning and other preparation, outgassing of volatile materials from the internal surfaces of the gas-sealed apparatus is expected, and will increase the time required to reach a suitably low gas pressure for a given
embodiment. For example, heating the gas-sealed apparatus will increase outgassing of material from the internal surfaces of the gas-sealed apparatus. Suitable gas pressure within the interior of the apparatus is established when a gas pressure gauge operably attached to the apparatus displays a reading in the range appropriate for the embodiment (e.g. a gas pressure less than 1x10 2 torr, less than 5xl0"3 torr, less than 5x10^* torr, less than 5xl 0"5 torr, less than 5xl0"6 torr or less than 5xl0"7 torr).
The method flowchart depicted in Figure 46 also includes block 4620, showing heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus. As noted above, the activation temperature for a particular embodiment is dependent on the specific getters included in that embodiment. Heating of an activation region includes heating the getters within the activation region to a suitable temperature. Getters suitable for some embodiments include zirconium- vanadium-iron getters, as described in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein. As noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid.,
incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature of approximately 700 degrees Centigrade for at least 20 seconds and then reducing the temperature to between approximately 400 degrees Centigrade and approximately 25 degrees Centigrade. Also as noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10"2 torr. In some embodiments, the activation region may be heated to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes. In some embodiments, the activation region may be heated in intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade.
Heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus may include heating the activation region independently from the remainder of the apparatus while the vacuum pump attached to the apparatus is operating. For example, the activation region may be heated with a heat source external to the apparatus. In some embodiments, in order to heat the activation region, the activation region exclusively to the remainder of the apparatus may be placed within an oven of suitable size, shape and properties. In some
embodiments, in order to heat the activation region, the exterior surfaces of the activation region may be wrapped with heat tape. Suitable heat tape for some embodiments includes, for example, insulated heat tapes and may include fiberglass heavy insulated heat tapes {e.g. model ΑΓΗ-0510100 from HTS/Amptek Corporation, Stafford Texas). Heating the activation region may include heating with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus. For example, if heat tape is used, a specific section of heat tape may be wrapped around the outer surface of the activation region and set to a temperature higher than any temperature setting for the remainder of the apparatus.
The method flowchart depicted in Figure 46 also includes block 4630, illustrating allowing the at least one activation region and the getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material. The activation region may be cooled through radiative heat loss. For example, in embodiments where heat tape is used to heat the external surface of the activation region, the heat tape may be removed and the activation region allowed to cool by heat radiation into the external environment. In some embodiments, the activation region may be allowed to cool to a specific temperature, or temperature range, such as approximately 100 degrees Centigrade, approximately 150 degrees Centigrade, approximately 200 degrees Centigrade, approximately 250 degrees Centigrade, approximately 300 degrees Centigrade, or approximately 350 degrees Centigrade.
As shown in Figure 46, the method flowchart also includes block 4640, depicting transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus. For example, the cooled getters may be transferred through the gas-sealed apparatus by gravitational transfer, such as through reorienting the relative positions of the activation region and the structural region and allowing the getters to move through gravity through the apparatus (see Figures 41-44 and associated text, above). For example, the cooled getters may be transferred through the apparatus through a mechanical transfer, such as with an internal trowel, scoop, ladle, or fork configured to transfer the cooled getters within the gas-sealed apparatus.
The flowchart depicted in Figure 46 also includes block 4650, illustrating separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. For example, the connector may be separated at a region adjacent to the surface of the outer wall of the structural region by crimping the connector sufficiently to establish a gas-tight seal, and separating the connector into two parts at the crimped region. An ultrasonic welder may be utilized to separate the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. A specialized crimping device may be used to separate the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. Figure 47 illustrates additional aspects of the method illustrated in the flowchart of Figure 46. Figure 47 shows block 4610, which illustrates establishing vacuum within a gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat- resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions. Optional blocks 4700, 4710 and 4720 illustrate optional aspects of the method. Block 4700 illustrates establishing vacuum within an interior of the at least one activation region, within an interior of the at least one structural region, and within an interior of the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus. For example, vacuum may be established using a vacuum pump operably attached to the apparatus and the methods described herein. In some embodiments, additionally heating the apparatus may decrease the time required to establish vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions. Block 4710 depicts utilizing a vacuum pump operably connected to the gas-sealed apparatus. For example, some embodiments may utilize a rotary vane style vacuum pump. Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by Pfeiffer Balzers Company, (Pfeiffer Vacuum GmbH, Germany). Suitable vacuum pumps for some embodiments are manufactured, for example, by the Edwards Vacuum Company (US Headquarters Tewksbury MA; Global Headquarters United Kingdom). Vacuum pumps suitable in some embodiments include Pfeiffer Balzers model TSH060 and Edwards model RV12. Figure 7 includes block 4720, depicting establishing gas pressure less than or equal to lxlO"2 torr within the gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat- sensitive material, and a connector between the regions. In some embodiments, the gas pressure established within the gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat- sensitive material, and a connector between the regions may be less than 5x10"3 torr, less than 5X10"4 torr, less than 5xl0"5 torr, less than 5x1ο"6 torr or less than 5xl0"7 torr.
Figure 48 illustrates additional aspects of the method flowchart depicted in Figure 47. Flowchart block 4620 depicts heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus. Flowchart block 4620 may include one or more of optional blocks 4800 and 4810. Block 4800 depicts heating the activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes. The activation region should be heated to a temperature and for a duration sufficient to activate the particular type of getters within the activation region given the conditions of a particular embodiment, such as the size, shape and position of the getters as well as the gas pressure within the activation region. As described herein, the activation temperature and activation conditions (e.g. time and gas pressure) of the particular type of getters used in a particular embodiment is the basis for determining the heating temperature and time of the activation region. Block 4810 illustrates heating the activation region with a heat source external to the apparatus. For example, exclusively of the remainder of the apparatus the activation region may be placed within an oven of suitable size, shape and operating parameters. For example, the outer surface of the activation region may be heated with a heat tape wrapped around the activation region of the apparatus. Suitable heat tape for some embodiments includes, for example, insulated heat tapes and may include fiberglass heavy insulated heat tapes (e.g. model AIH-0510100 from HTS/Amptek Corporation, Stafford Texas). Heating the activation region may include heating with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus.
Figure 49 illustrates aspects of the method flowchart as illustrated in Figure 46. Flowchart block 4620 depicts heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus. Flowchart block 4620 may include one or more of optional blocks 4900 and 4910. Block 4900 depicts heating the activation region with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus. For example, heat tape may be wrapped around the exterior surface of the activation region and not other regions of the apparatus, and the heat tape specifically controlled independently of any other controls. Block 4910 illustrates heating the at least one activation region in intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. For example, if the at least one activation region is initially at a temperature of approximately 25 degrees Centigrade, the at least one activation region may be heated to approximately 75 degrees Centigrade, then 125 degrees Centigrade, then 175 degrees Centigrade, and so on until the final desired activation temperature is reached.
Figure 50 depicts aspects of the method flowchart illustrated in Figure 46. Block 4630 shows allowing the at least one activation region and the getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material. Flowchart block 4630 may include one or more of optional blocks 5000 and 5010. Block 5000 illustrates allowing the at least one activation region to cool to an ambient temperature through radiative heat loss. For example, any heat tape may be turned off, allowed to cool, and then removed from the exterior surface of an activation region. The activation region then is allowed to cool to either a predetermined temperature or an ambient temperature through radiative heat loss. Block 5010 depicts allowing the at least one activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade. For example, approximately 250 degrees Centigrade may be a temperature compatible with structural stability of a heat-sensitive material such as aluminum.
Figure 51 shows aspects of the method flowchart illustrated in Figure 46. Block
4640 shows transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus. Block 4640 may include one or more of optional blocks 5100 and 5110. Block 5100 depicts bending the connector to allow the cooled one or more getters to move from the cooled at least one activation region to the at least one structural region through the connector. For example, the method may include bending a flexible region of the connector to place the activation region in a position substantially above the structural region, allowing the getters to fall through the force of gravity from the one activation region to the structural region through the connector. The vacuum pump may be operational during the getter transfer to maintain the established vacuum within the apparatus. Block 5110 illustrates bending the connector to alter the relative positioning of the cooled at least one activation region to the at least one structural region in relation to the connector. For example, the method may include bending the connector to alter the relative position of the at least one activation region relative to the structural region.
Figure 52 depicts aspects of the method flowchart illustrated in Figure 46. Block 4640 shows transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the apparatus. Block 4640 may include optional block 5200. Block 5200 shows transferring the cooled one or more getters into a gas-sealed gap between an inner wall and an outer wall of the structural region. For example, the activation region may be positioned so that the connector is in a substantially linear configuration, and oriented so that the opening of the activation region attached to the connector is approximately directly above an opening into the gas-sealed gap that is operably attached to the connector. Block 650 shows separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. For example, the connector may be crimped and separated at a region adjacent to the outer surface of the structural region. Block 4650 may include optional block 5210. Block 5210 depicts sealing the connector at a position adjacent to the structural region. For example, as illustrated in Figures 41-44, the connector may include a region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region in a location adjacent to the structural region. The region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region need not be directly next to the exterior surface of the structural region; as shown in Figures 41-44, there may be a section of the connector between the exterior surface of the structural region and the position where the connector is sealed and detached.
Figure 53 shows aspects of the method flowchart illustrated in Figure 46. Block 4650 shows separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. For example, the connector may be welded together and then disconnected using an ultrasonic welding device. Block 4650 may include optional block 5300. Block 5300 depicts crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the crimp location. For example, an ultrasonic welder may be used to weld to opposite faces of the connector together, and then to break the connector at the weld joint. For example, a crimping device specialized to crimp the connector sufficiently to form a gas-impermeable seal may be used, and the connector then broken at the seal location. As shown in Figure 53, the method flowchart may also include optional block 5310. Block 5310 depicts adding sealing material to a surface of the separated connector adjacent to the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. Sealing material, such as epoxy material, may be added to the surface of the separated connector, such as over the crimp or weld site. See also Figure 44 and associated text. Figure 54 depicts aspects of the method flowchart shown in Figure 46. Figure 54 illustrates that the flowchart may include one or more of optional blocks 5400 and 5410. Block 5400 may include block 5410. Block 5400 shows heating the structural region to a preset temperature for a predetermined time after establishing vacuum within the structural region and before heating the activation region. For example, the structural region may be heated to approximately 150 degrees to facilitate establishment of a durable vacuum within the apparatus. For example, the structural region may be heated with heat tape placed on the external surface of the structural region. For example, the structural region may be placed on a heat plate. Block 5410 depicts heating the structural region to the preset temperature by intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. For example, if starting at an ambient temperature of approximately 25 degrees Centigrade, the structural region may be heated to approximately 75 degrees Centigrade, then to approximately 125 degrees Centigrade, then to approximately 175 degrees Centigrade, then to approximately 225 degrees Centigrade, and so on until the desired temperature is reached. The heating series may be held at any or all of the series of temperatures for a given time period, for example for 10 minutes, 1 hour, 5 hours, or 1 day.
Figure 55 illustrates aspects of the method flowchart shown in Figure 46. Figure 55 illustrates that the flowchart may include optional block 5500. Block 5500 depicts heating the structural region to a preset temperature prior to transferring the cooled one or more getters; and maintaining the preset temperature while separating the connector. For example, the structural region may be placed on a hot plate heated to a preset temperature before the transfer of the cooled one or more getters, and the structural region maintained on the hot plate set to a constant temperature during transfer of the getters. For example, the structural region may be wrapped with heat tape and heated to a preset temperature prior to the transfer of the getters, and the temperature maintained during the transfer. For example, the structural region may be heated to a predetermined temperature between approximately 125 degrees Centigrade and approximately 175 degrees Centigrade, and this temperature maintained during the getter transfer. For example, the structural region may be heated to a predetermined temperature between approximately 175 degrees Centigrade and approximately 225 degrees Centigrade, and this temperature maintained during the getter transfer. For example, the structural region may be heated to a predetermined temperature between approximately 200 degrees Centigrade and approximately 250 degrees Centigrade, and this temperature maintained during the getter transfer.
Figure 56 illustrates a flowchart of a method. Block 5600 of the flowchart illustrates that the method is of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device. Block 5600 includes blocks 5610, 5620, 5630, 5640, 5650, 5660, 5670, 5680 and 5690. Block 5610 illustrates assembling the components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap. Block 5620 depicts attaching the storage device to an apparatus, the apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the apparatus. Block 5630 shows activating the vacuum pump to establish gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Block 5640 illustrates heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time. Block 5650 shows heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Block 5660 illustrates allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature. Block 5670 shows flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear. Block 5680 depicts allowing the getters to fall along the connector interior into the gas-sealed gap in the storage device, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Block 5690 shows separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas- sealed gap of the storage device.
Block 5620 depicts attaching the storage device to an apparatus, the apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the apparatus. For example, the assembled device may be attached to an apparatus with a substantially gas-impermeable junction to form an apparatus such as illustrated in Figures 41-44. As shown in Figures 41-44, the interior of the apparatus includes a gas-sealed space within the getter activation region, the connector and the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. The gas-sealed gasp within a storage device may be connected to an apparatus through a conduit, for example with one or more ducts as illustrated as 4175 in Figure 63.
Figure 57 illustrates aspects of the flowchart depicted in Figure 56. Figure 57 illustrates that block 5610 may include optional block 5700. Block 5610 illustrates assembling the components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap. For example, the components of a storage device may be assembled into a device as illustrated in Figures 41-44 and in Figure 63. As shown in Figure 57, block 5610 may include optional block 5700. Block 5700 depicts assembling the components of the storage device to form a gas-sealed gap within the storage device. For example, there may be joints, welds or seals included in the assembled components to create a gas-impermeable seal around the perimeter of the gas-sealed gap within the storage device.
Figure 57 shows further aspects of the flowchart depicted in Figure 56. Figure 17 illustrates that block 5630 may include optional block 5710. Block 5630 depicts activating the vacuum pump to establish gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. For example, one or more vacuum pumps may be utilized to establish substantially evacuated space within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. For example, one or more vacuum pumps may be utilized to establish an extremely low gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Block 5710 illustrates establishing a gas pressure of less than or equal to 1x10" torr. For example, one or more vacuum pumps may be utilized to establish a gas pressure less than 5 10" torr, less than SxlO^torr, less than 5xl0"5 torr, less than S lO^torr or less than 5xlO"7 torr within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
Figure 58 illustrates additional aspects of the flowchart shown in Figure 56. Block 5640 illustrates heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a
predetermined length of time. For example, the storage device may be heated with an external heat source to a predetermined temperature for a length of time estimated to be required to evaporate any surface contaminants on the interior surface of the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. For example, the storage device may be heated with an external heat source to a predetermined temperature for a length of time estimated to be required to dehydrate the interior surface of the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. The heating temperature and time will depend on the specific embodiment, for example the type of material used to fabricate the storage device, the prior surface treatment of the material (for example as described in relation to Figure 45, text above), and the desired final gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Figure 58 illustrates that block 5640 may include one or more of optional blocks 5800 and 5810. Block 5800 illustrates heating the storage device in increments of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. For example, in an embodiment where heat tape wrapped around the exterior of the storage device is implemented to heat the storage device, the controller for the heat tape may be set to warm the heat tape in approximately 50 degree Centigrade increments. Warming the storage device in increments may be desirable, for example, to avoid overheating, or to ensure that the storage device is heated evenly throughout the surface, or to confirm that the junctions between the storage device and the connector are retaining a gas seal during the process. Warming the storage device in increments may be desirable, for example, to allow for time to check the gas pressure internal to the apparatus during the process.
Block 5810 illustrates heating the storage device to between approximately 130 degrees Centigrade and approximately 150 degrees Centigrade for at least 100 hours. The specific time and temperature will depend on the embodiment, and the time required to reduce the internal gas pressure of the apparatus to a target gas pressure. For example, the specific time and temperature will depend on factors including the material used to fabricate the storage device, any pretreatment of the components, the size and shape of the gas-sealed gap, the size and shape of the interior of the apparatus, and the pumping capacity of the vacuum pump in a given embodiment. In some embodiments, the storage device may be heated to between approximately 150 degrees Centigrade and approximately 200 degrees Centigrade. In some embodiments, the storage device may be heated for approximately 75 hours. In some embodiments, the storage device may be heated for approximately 100 hours, or approximately 125 hours.
Figure 59 shows additional aspects of the flowchart shown in Figure 56. Block
5650 illustrates heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. As discussed above, the activation temperature and time required in a specific embodiment depends on the getters used. For example, as noted in US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein, a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material may be activated by heating to a temperature less than 450 degrees Centigrade, such as approximately 400 degrees Centigrade, or between approximately 250 and approximately 350 degrees Centigrade, for a time between 1 and 10 minutes while in an environment with a gas pressure of less than 10"2 torr. Also relevant is the material used in the fabrication of the activation region including the getters, clearly a user of the apparatus and method would not heat the getter activation region to a temperature predicted to compromise the structural integrity of the activation region. For example, a user of the apparatus and method would not heat the getter activation region to a temperature wherein the getter activation region could not maintain its shape and structure in response to the internal force of the low gas pressure. For example, a user of the apparatus and method would not heat the getter activation region to a temperature wherein the getter activation region would be predicted to melt, implode or deform based on the material and fabrication of the structure.
Figure 59 illustrates that the flowchart of Figure 56 may also include one or more of optional blocks 5900 and 5910 within block 5650. Block 5900 depicts heating the activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes. For example, in embodiments employing a zirconium- vanadium-iron getter material, the getter material may be activated at approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for a duration of at least 45 minutes (see US Patent No. 4,312,669, ibid., incorporated by reference herein). Block 5910 illustrates heating the getter activation region with a heat source external to the getter activation region. For example, the getter activation region may be wrapped with heat tape on the external surface of the getter activation region as a heat source. For example, the getter activation region may be placed in direct contact with a hot plate or similar heating surface as a heat source.
Figure 60 depicts aspects of the method flowchart shown in Figure 56. The flowchart shown in Figure 60 depicts the method of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device 5600 as illustrated in Figure 56, as well as flowchart blocks 5610, 5620, 5630, 5640, 5650, 5660, 5670, 5680, 5690 and optional blocks 6000 and 6010. The flowchart shown in Figure 60 includes block 5660, showing allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature. For example, after heating (as illustrated in block 5650), the getter activation region and the one or more getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with further steps of the method. For example, after heating (as illustrated in block 5650), the getter activation region and the one or more getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with allowing the getters to fall along the connector interior into the gap in the storage device (as shown in block 5680). For example, the getter activation region and the getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with the structural integrity of the connector). For example, the getter activation region and the getters may be cooled to a temperature compatible with the structural integrity of the storage device. The predetermined temperature(s) will depend on factors including the material used to fabricate the regions of the apparatus, as well as safe and desirable handling temperatures for the apparatus in a given embodiment.
Temperatures of the activation region may be determined through means suitable to a given embodiment, such as estimates based on the external surface conditions of the activation region. In some embodiments, there may be an embedded temperature sensor within the activation region.
Figure 60 illustrates that the flowchart depicted in Figure 56 may include optional block 6000 within block 5660. Block 6000 shows allowing the getter activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade through radiative heat loss. For example, in embodiments using heat tape on the exterior surface of the activation region to heat the activation region, the heat tape may be entirely or partially removed and the activation region allowed to cool through radiative heat loss from the external surface. For example, in embodiments wherein the activation region is placed in direct physical contact with a surface of a heat source (e.g. a hot plate), the activation region may be removed from the heat source and allowed to cool. The temperature of the surface of the activation region may be used as an approximation for the temperature of the entire activation region and its contents (e.g. the one or more getters). In some embodiments, there may be a temperature sensor within the interior of the activation region and the reading of that temperature sensor may be utilized in the method.
As shown in Figures 56 and 60, the flowchart includes block 5670, which depicts flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear. For example, as illustrated in Figures 41-44, the shape of the connector may be altered to allow the getter activation region to be moved to a position substantially above an opening in the gap in the storage device and for the connector to be substantially straight. The connector may be flexed into a position that allows for the activated getters to fall from an opening in the getter activation region through the interior of the connector and into the gap in the storage device. As shown in Figure 60, block 5 may include optional block 6010. Block 6010 shows flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear by flexing a region of the connector adjacent to the getter activation region. For example, as illustrated in Figures 1-4 and described in the associated text (see above), the connector may include a flexible region, such as a region in a corrugated or bellows-type configuration, adjacent to the activation region. The flexible portion of the connector adjacent to the activation region may be flexed to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is substantially above the storage device.
Figure 61 illustrates aspects of the flowchart depicted in Figure 56. Figures 56 and
61 include block 5690, depicting separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. For example, the connector may be sealed at a location adjacent to the storage device and then two sections of the connector separated either at the seal site or adjacent to the seal site in a manner to maintain the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Figure 61 shows that block 5690 of the flowchart may include one or more of optional blocks 6100 and 61 10. Block 6100 depicts physically crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the crimp location. For example, the connector may be flattened at a location adjacent to the storage device by physically pressing together the sides of the connector with a crimping device sufficient to create a gas-sealed region in the connector at the crimp site. After the connector is sufficiently crimped to create a gas-tight seal in the connector, the connector may be physically broken into two pieces at the crimp location. If desired, an additional sealing or stabilization material (e.g. epoxy) may be added to the external surface of the connector to stabilize the sealed surface (see also item 4400 in Figure 44). Block 61 10 depicts separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure utilizing an ultrasonic welding device.
Figure 62 depicts further aspects of the flowchart as shown in Figure 56. Figure 62 shows that block 5600, the method of establishing and maintaining vacuum within a storage device, may include one or more of optional blocks 6200, 6210, 6220 and 6230. Block 6200 illustrates heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined time after establishing gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gap of the storage device. For example, it may be desirable in some embodiments to dehydrate the interior surfaces of the gas-sealed gap in the storage device (e.g. item 4190 in Figure 41) through heating prior to the connector being sealed. For example, it may be desirable in some embodiments to heat the storage device to a temperature similar to the temperature of the getters when they are placed within the gas-sealed gap to ensure even heating and associated expansion of the storage device prior to addition of the heated getters. Block 6210 illustrates monitoring gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. For example, it may be desirable in some embodiments to attach a gas pressure gauge to the storage device. Figure 63, for example, illustrates two ducts 4175 attached to the outer wall 105 of the structural region 4180 including a storage device. A gas pressure gauge could be attached to one of the ducts 4175 if desired in a specific embodiment. Block 6220 shows monitoring gas pressure within the connector. A gas pressure gauge, for example, may be operably attached to the connector through a duct or a similar structure and used to monitor gas pressure within the connector during one or more steps of the method. Block 6230 shows adding sealing material to the surface of the separated connector adjacent to the storage device. For example, an epoxy compound may be added to the surface of the separated connector adjacent to the storage device (see also item 4400 in Figure 44).
Figure 63 depicts a cross-section view of a substantially thermally sealed storage container, such as may be included in a structural region 4180 of an apparatus (not depicted in Figure 63). The cross-section view is presented to illustrate various aspects of the container that are not visible in an external view. The cross-section presented is approximately half of the container, with the omitted region being substantially similar to the illustrated region. Figure 63 is an example of an embodiment of a unit included in a structural region 4180 of an apparatus (not depicted in Figure 63), although other embodiments are within the scope of the disclosure herein. The substantially thermally sealed storage container depicted in Figure 63 includes an outer wall 105 and an inner wall 1 10. The inner wall 105 substantially defines a storage region 130 within the container. The outer wall 105 and the inner wall 1 10 are separated by a gas-sealed gap 120.
The container depicted in Figure 63 also includes an access tube 6340 between the interior storage region 130 and the exterior of the container. The access tube 6340 is attached to the inner wall 1 10 with a gas-impermeable seal 6320. For example, the access tube 6340 and the inner wall 1 10 may both be fabricated from stainless steel, and the gas- impermeable seal 6320 may be a suitable weld joint. The interior of the access tube 6340 forms an opening 125 between the exterior of the container and the interior storage region 130. The opening 125 is of a sufficient size and shape to allow stored material to be placed within and removed from the interior of the interior storage region 130, while substantially maintaining the storage and thermal properties of the interior storage region 130. The container also includes a neck region 6330 in a substantially tubular structure surrounding the access tube 6340. The neck region 6330 is attached to the outer wall 105 with a gas-impermeable seal 6360. For example, the neck region 6330 and the outer wall 105 may both be fabricated from stainless steel, and the gas-impermeable seal 6360 may be a suitable weld joint. The end of the access tube 6340 distal to the inner wall 110 and the end of the neck region 6330 distal to the outer wall 105 are connected with an end seal 6310. Although the end seal 6310 depicted is a discrete unit joining the gap between the surfaces of the access tube 6340 and the neck region 6330, the end seal 6310 may also include a crimp or other form of a gas-impermeable seal. As shown in Figure 63, the gas- sealed gap 120 may be coextensive with the region 6350 between the neck region 6330 and the access tube 6340.
Figure 63 also depicts two ducts 4175 attached to the outer wall 105. These ducts 4175 may be suitable for the attachment of a gas pressure gauge (such as identified as 4140 in Figures 41-44) or other device as suitable to the embodiment. In the embodiment illustrated in Figure 63, the ends of the ducts 4175 are closed with barrier units 6300 secured with a gas-impermeable seal, such as welds or rivets. As the ducts 4175 are coextensive with the gas-sealed gap 120, the ducts 4175 should be similarly gas-sealed to preserve the reduced gas pressure e.g. less than or equal to 1x10" torr) within the gas- sealed gap 120.
A storage container such as depicted in Figure 63 may include phase-change material within the interior storage region 130. Generally speaking, specific properties of the materials, including durability, mass, corrosiveness, toxicity, and cost, should be taken into account in the selection of the materials used in fabricating a storage container. See, for example, Nemanic and Setina, "A study of thermal treatment procedures to reduce hydrogen outgassing rate in thin wall stainless steel cells," Vacuum, vol. 53, 1999, pages 277-280; and Koyatsu et al., "Measurements of outgassing rate from copper and copper alloy chambers," Vacuum, vol. 47, no. 6-8, 1996, pages 709-711, which are each incorporated by reference. In embodiments including phase change materials, the specific properties of the phase change materials, including durability, mass, corrosiveness, toxicity, and cost, should be taken into account in the selection of the materials used in fabricating the storage container. For example, the inner wall 105 should be fabricated from a material that retains its structural stability in the presence of the specific phase change material utilized under the expected use conditions. See: Zalba et al., "Review on thermal energy storage with phase change: materials, heat transfer analysis and applications," Applied Thermal Engineering, vol. 23, 2003, pages 251-283; and Bo et al., "Tetradecane and hexadecane binary mixtures as phase change materials (PCMs) for cool storage in district cooling systems," Energy, vol. 24, 1000, pages 1015-1028; which are each incorporated by reference.
Systems described herein include an apparatus, comprising: a stored material module including a plurality of storage units configured for storage of one or more medicinal units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container and including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit; a storage stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the stored material module; a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one storage stabilizer unit; and a central stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit in the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units are fabricated from plastic. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store medicinal vials. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store less than 30 medicinal vials. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store prefilled medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the apparatus, each of the plurality of storage units are configured to store less than 25 prefilled medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least one tab on one edge and at least one corresponding indentation on an opposing edge. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units comprise: a side wall; at least one tab on at least one edge of the side wall; and at least one indentation on at least one opposing edge of the side wall, wherein the at least one .tab on each of the storage units is reversibly mated with the at least one indentation on an adjacent storage unit. In some embodiments of the apparatus, at least one of the plurality of storage units comprises: at least one indentation configured to reversibly mate with an exterior surface of the at least one stabilizer unit. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units are arranged in a vertical stack within the stored material module. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units are configured to be interchangeable within the stored material module. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units are of a substantially similar size and shape. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least two storage units of a
substantially similar diameter with distinct lengths.
Some embodiments of the apparatus include a stored material module base operably attached to the stored material module at an end of the stored material module distal to the stored material module cap. In some embodiments, the stored material module base comprises: one or more apertures with edges configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the at least one stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit comprises: at least two tubes of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned one inside the other, the tubes sized to slide relative to each other. In some embodiments, each of the at least two tubes comprise: an aperture along a partial length of each of the tubes, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other, the conduit substantially perpendicular to the axis of the tubes. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit comprises: an inner tube and at least one exterior tube of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned as at least one interior and at least one exterior tube relative to each other, the tubes sized to slide relative to each other; an aperture along a partial length of the inner tube and each of the at least one exterior tube, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other, the conduit substantially perpendicular to the axis of the tubes; and retaining units fixed to an internal surface of the inner tube at a region adjacent to the aperture in the inner tube, the retaining units including ends projecting through the apertures in each of the tubes. In some embodiments, wherein the plurality of storage units are configured to slide along an axis substantially defined by the storage stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from plastic. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from glass-reinforced plastic. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit comprises: an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module, a surface of the exterior frame substantially conforming to a surface of the stored material module; a plurality of apertures in the exterior frame; one or more protrusions from the surface of the exterior frame at an edge facing the stored material module, the one or more protrusions corresponding to edge surfaces of apertures within a stored material module base.
In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture with a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a tab of a stored material unit. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: a connection region, including a base and a rim, with a surface of the connection region configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the central stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: a connection region, including an aperture; and a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a surface of the central stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture configured to attach a fastener between the stored material module and the stored material module cap. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to an interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; at least one aperture in the first tube and at least one aperture in the second tube, the apertures positioned to form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other; a shaft configured to move in response to pressure from a surface of the central stabilizer unit; a force transmission unit configured to transfer force from movement of the shaft to a rod; an end of the rod of a size and shape to substantially fill the conduit formed from the at least one aperture in the first tube and the at least one aperture in the second tube when the tubes are in the specific position relative to each other. In some embodiments, wherein the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to the interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; at least one aperture in the stored material module cap configured to accommodate one or more wires joining circuitry within the second tube to circuitry located exterior to the second tube.
In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: a base including at least one surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: a fastener positioned to reversibly attach the central stabilizer unit to the stored material module cap; and a mechanical release operably attached to the fastener, the release positioned for access from an exterior surface of the central stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: a core stabilizer; and low thermal density material surrounding the core stabilizer. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: at least one aperture forming a conduit for circuitry. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: an outer wall.
Some embodiments of the apparatus include one or more sensors positioned within the storage stabilizer unit. Some embodiments include a lid attached to the end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an exterior surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit. Some embodiments include a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit operably attached to the lid; at least one global positioning device operably attached to the lid; and an electronic system operably attached to the lid. Some embodiments include a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit integral to the lid; an electronic system operably attached to the lid; and a user input device operably attached to the electronic system. Some embodiments include a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; an electromechanical switch operably attached to the lid, the electromechanical switch positioned on a surface of the lid adjacent to the outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in the region adjacent to the exterior end of the conduit; an electronic system operably attached to the electromechanical switch; and an indicator operably attached to the lid. Some embodiments include a substantially thermally sealed storage container including a storage structure.
Embodiments include a substantially thermally sealed storage container, comprising: an outer assembly, including: an outer wall substantially defining a substantially thermally sealed storage container, the outer wall substantially defining a single outer wall aperture; an inner wall substantially defining a substantially thermally sealed storage region, the inner wall substantially defining a single inner wall aperture; the inner wall and the outer wall separated by a distance and substantially defining a gap; at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material disposed within the gap; a connector forming a conduit connecting the single outer wall aperture with the single inner wall aperture; and a single access aperture to the substantially thermally sealed storage region, wherein the single access aperture is defined by an end of the connector; and an inner assembly within the substantially thermally sealed storage region, including: a storage structure configured for receiving and storing a plurality of modules, wherein the plurality of modules includes both at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module; a stored material module including a plurality of storage units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with the storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container; at least one storage stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module; a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with the at least one stabilizer unit; and a central stabilizer unit operably connected to the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is positioned to substantially fill the conduit.
In some embodiments of the container, the connector is a flexible connector. In some embodiments of the container, the gap comprises: substantially evacuated space with a pressure less than or equal to 5x10^ torr. In some embodiments of the container, the at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material includes multilayer insulation material ("MLI"). In some embodiments of the container, the substantially thermally sealed storage region is configured to be passively maintained at a temperature between 2 and 8 degrees Centigrade for at least 30 days. In some embodiments of the container, the storage structure is affixed to an interior of the substantially thermally sealed storage region in a position substantially parallel to a diameter of the conduit. In some
embodiments of the container, the storage structure is affixed to an interior of the substantially thermally sealed storage region in a position substantially perpendicular to a central axis formed by the connector. In some embodiments, each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store medicinal vials. In some embodiments of the container, each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store less than 30 medicinal vials. In some
embodiments of the container, each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store one or more prefiUed medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the container, each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store less than 25 prefiUed medicinal syringes. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least one tab on at least one edge of the storage units; and at least one indentation on at least one opposing edge of the storage units, wherein the at least one tab on each of the storage units is reversibly mated with the at least one indentation on an adjacent storage unit. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least one indentation configured to reversibly mate with an exterior surface of the at least one stabilizer unit. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units are arranged in a vertical stack within the stored material module. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units are configured to be interchangeable within the stored material module. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units are of a substantially similar size and shape. In some embodiments of the container, the plurality of storage units comprise: at least two storage units of a substantially similar diameter with distinct lengths.
Some embodiments of the container include a stored material module base operably attached to the stored material module at an end of the stored material module distal to the stored material module cap. In some embodiments, the stored material module base comprises: one or more apertures with edges configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the storage stabilizer unit.
In some embodiments of the container, the at least one stabilizer unit comprises: at least two tubes of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned one inside the other, the tubes sized and positioned for their surfaces to slide relative to each other. In some embodiments, the at least two tubes each comprise: an aperture along a partial length of each of the tubes, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other:
In some embodiments of the container, the at least one stabilizer unit comprises: at least two tubes of different internal diameters, the tubes positioned as at least one interior tube and at least one exterior tube relative to each other, the tubes sized and positioned for their surfaces to slide relative to each other; an aperture along a partial length of each of the tubes, wherein the apertures form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other; and one or more retaining units fixed to an internal surface of the at least one inner tube at a region adjacent to the aperture in the inner tube, the retaining units including ends projecting through the apertures in each of the tubes. In some
embodiments, the plurality of storage units are configured to slide along an axis substantially defined by the at least one storage stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from stainless steel. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit is fabricated from glass-reinforced plastic. In some embodiments, the storage stabilizer unit comprises: an exterior frame of a size and shape to substantially surround the stored material module, an inner surface of the exterior frame substantially conforming to an outer surface of the stored material module; a plurality of apertures in the exterior frame; and one or more protrusions from a surface of the exterior frame at a surface facing the stored material module, the protrusions corresponding to one or more edge surfaces of an aperture within a stored material unit.
In some embodiments of the container, the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture with a surface configured to reversibly mate with the surface of a tab of a stored material unit. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: a connection region, including an aperture; and a circuitry connector within the aperture, the circuitry connector configured to reversibly mate with a corresponding circuitry connector on a surface of the central stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: at least one aperture configured to attach a fastener between the stored material module and the stored material module cap. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to an interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; at least one aperture in the first tube and at least one aperture in the second tube, the apertures positioned to form a conduit when the tubes are in a specific position relative to each other; a shaft configured to move in response to pressure from a surface of the central stabilizer unit; a force transmission unit configured to transfer force from movement of the shaft to a rod; and an end of the rod of a size and shape to substantially fill the conduit formed from the at least one aperture in the first tube and the at least one aperture in the second tube when the tubes are in the specific position relative to each other. In some embodiments, the stored material module cap comprises: a first substantially hollow tube with one end fixed to a surface of the stored material module cap; a second substantially hollow tube with a smaller diameter than the first tube, the second tube positioned within the first tube with an exterior surface adjacent to an interior surface of the first tube, the surfaces configured to allow the second tube to slide within the first tube; and at least one aperture in the stored material module cap configured to accommodate wires joining circuitry within the second tube to circuitry located exterior to the second tube.
In some embodiments of the container, the central stabilizer unit comprises: a base including at least one surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: a fastener positioned to reversibly attach the central stabilizer unit to the stored material module cap; and a mechanical release operably attached to the fastener, the release positioned for access from an exterior surface of the central stabilizer unit. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: a core stabilizer; and a low thermal density material surrounding the core stabilizer. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: at least one aperture forming a conduit for circuitry. In some embodiments, the central stabilizer unit comprises: an outer wall.
Some embodiments of the container comprise: one or more sensors positioned within the at least one storage stabilizer unit. Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit. Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit operably attached to the lid; at least one global positioning device operably attached to the lid; and an electronic system operably attached to the lid. Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit at a site distal to the stored material module cap; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; a display unit integral to the lid; an electronic system operably attached to the lid; and a user input device operably attached to the electronic system. Some embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit; a handle attached to the lid on a surface distal to the end of the central stabilizer unit; an electromechanical switch operably attached to the lid, the electromechanical switch positioned on a surface of the lid adjacent to an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in the region adjacent to the exterior end of the conduit; an electronic system operably attached to the electromechanical switch; and an indicator operably attached to the lid. Some
embodiments comprise: a lid attached to an end of the central stabilizer unit, the lid of a size and shape conforming with an outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a region adjacent to an exterior end of the conduit; an
electromechanical switch operably attached to the lid, the electromechanical switch positioned on the surface of the lid adjacent to the outer surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in the region adjacent to the exterior end of the conduit; an electronic system operably attached to the electromechanical switch; and an indicator operably attached to the lid.
Some embodiments of the container include a transportation stabilizer unit with dimensions corresponding to a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible connector, comprising: a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in an outer wall of a substantially thermally sealed storage container including a flexible connector, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container adjacent to the external opening in the outer wall; a central aperture in the lid; a reversible fastening unit adjacent to the central aperture in the lid, the reversible fastening unit positioned to fasten a shaft within the central aperture in the lid; a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible connector from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; a positioning shaft with a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid, the positioning shaft of a length greater than the thickness of the lid in combination with the length of the wall between the surface of the lid and the edge of the aperture in the wall; an interior surface of the wall, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region; a pivot unit operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft and positioned within the interior region; a support unit operably attached to the pivot unit, the support unit of a size and shape to fit within the interior region when the pivot unit is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture in the wall when the pivot unit is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the other direction; an end region of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of an aperture in a storage structure within the substantially thermally sealed storage container; a base grip at the terminal end of the end region; and a tensioning unit for the base grip, configured to maintain pressure on the base grip against an interior wall of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the lid.
In some embodiments of the container, the lid of the transportation stabilizer unit comprises: at least one aperture configured for a fastener to reversibly attach the lid to the outer wall of the substantially thermally sealed storage container. In some embodiments, the transportation stabilizer unit lid is fabricated with sufficient strength to maintain the flexible connector in a compressed position when the reversible fastening unit is attached to the positioning shaft. In some embodiments, the transportation stabilizer unit pivot unit is configured to allow movement of the support unit approximately 90 degrees along a single axis. In some embodiments, the transportation stabilizer unit positioning shaft is positioned within the aperture in the lid. In some embodiments, the transportation stabilizer unit reversible fastening unit attaches to the positioning shaft with sufficient tension to maintain the flexible connector in a compressed position. In some
embodiments, the transportation stabilizer unit base grip comprises: a surface with a coefficient of friction greater than one with the surface of the interior wall at temperatures between approximately 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade. In some embodiments, the transportation stabilizer unit comprises: a handle attached to the lid on a surface opposite to the surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container. In some embodiments, the transportation stabilizer unit comprises: a sensor; an indicator; and an electronic system operably attached to the sensor and the indicator.
In some embodiments, an apparatus comprises: a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible connector; and a stabilizer unit with dimensions corresponding to the substantially thermally sealed storage container, the stabilizer unit including: a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in an outer wall of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the outer wall adjacent to the external opening; a central aperture in the lid; a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible connector from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid; a positioning shaft with a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid, the positioning shaft of a length greater than a thickness of the lid in combination with a length of the wall between the surface of the lid and an edge of the aperture in the wall; a reversible fastening unit operably attached to the lid in a region adjacent to the aperture in the lid and positioned to operably attach to the positioning shaft; an interior surface of the wall, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region; a pivot unit operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft and positioned within the interior region; a support unit operably attached to the pivot unit, the support unit of a size and shape to fit within the interior region when the pivot unit is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture in the wall when the pivot unit is rotated in the other direction; an end region of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with an interior surface of an aperture in a storage structure within the substantially thermally sealed storage container; a base grip at a terminal end of the end region, including a surface with a coefficient of friction greater than one with a surface of an interior wall of the container at temperatures between 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade; and a tensioning unit for the base grip, configured to maintain pressure on the base grip against the interior wall of the container in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the lid. Some embodiments include an apparatus, comprising: a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, the structural region including an outer wall and an inner wall with a gas-sealed gap between the outer wall and the inner wall; an activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, the activation region including one or more getters; a connector attached to the structural region and to the activation region, the connector including a flexible region and a region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region; and a vacuum pump operably attached to the connector.
In some embodiments, the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a storage device. In some embodiments, the storage device is configured for temperature-stabilized storage in a temperature range. In some embodiments, the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a thermally-insulated device. In some embodiments, the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a device configured for detachment from a remainder of the apparatus. In some embodiments, the structural region of the apparatus comprises: a device configured for use independently from a remainder of the apparatus.
In some embodiments, the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: aluminum. In some embodiments, the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: metalized plastic. In some embodiments, the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: plastic with metal coating all surfaces of the heat-sensitive material facing the gas-sealed gap. In some embodiments, the heat-sensitive material of the apparatus comprises: a low vapor emitting material.
In some embodiments, the outer wall and the inner wall of the apparatus together substantially define the gas-sealed gap. In some embodiments, the gas-sealed gap comprises: multilayer insulation material. In some embodiments, the gas-sealed gap comprises: gas at a pressure less than or equal to lxlO"2 torr. In some embodiments, the gas-sealed gap is open to an interior of the connector.
In some embodiments, the heat-resistant material of the apparatus comprises: stainless steel. In some embodiments, the heat-resistant material of the apparatus comprises: titanium alloy. In some embodiments, the activation region of the apparatus comprises: a gas-sealed interior, wherein the one or more getters are enclosed within the gas-sealed interior. In some embodiments, the gas-sealed interior is open to an interior of the connector. In some embodiments, the one or more getters comprise: non-evaporatable getter material. In some embodiments, the one or more getters comprise: zirconium, vanadium and iron. In some embodiments, the one or more getters comprise: 70% zirconium, 24.6% vanadium and 5.4% iron.
In some embodiments, the connector of the apparatus comprises: stainless steel. In some embodiments, the connector of the apparatus comprises: a valve configured to inhibit the flow of gas within the connector. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the flexible region of the connector is adjacent to the activation region. In some embodiments of the apparatus, the flexible region of the connector has a bellows configuration.
In some embodiments, the vacuum pump of the apparatus is sufficient to evacuate an interior of the structural region, the activation region and the connector to a gas pressure less than or equal to 1 10" torr.
In some embodiments, the region of the apparatus configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region is adjacent to the structural region along the connector.
In some embodiments, the apparatus comprises: a gas-sealed, connected space interior to each of the structural region, the activation region and the connector. In some embodiments, the apparatus comprises: a pressure gauge operably connected to the gas- sealed gap. In some embodiments, the apparatus comprises: a pressure gauge operably connected to the connector. In some embodiments, the apparatus comprises: one or more seals between the structural region, the activation region and the connector, the seals sufficient to maintain a vacuum within the structural region, the activation region and the connector.
In some embodiments, a method comprises: establishing vacuum within a gas- sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions; heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus; allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material;
transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus; and separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the established vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
In some embodiments, the establishing vacuum of the method comprises:
establishing vacuum within an interior of the at least one activation region, within an interior of the structural region, and within an interior of the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus. In some embodiments, the establishing vacuum of the method comprises: utilizing a vacuum pump operably connected to the gas-sealed apparatus. In some embodiments, the establishing vacuum of the method comprises: establishing gas pressure less than or equal to 1x10" torr.
In some embodiments, the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes. In some embodiments, the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region with a heat source external to the apparatus. In some embodiments, the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region with a heat source in direct thermal contact with the at least one activation region and not in direct thermal contact with the structural region and the connector of the gas-sealed apparatus. In some embodiments, the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region of the method comprises: heating the at least one activation region in intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade.
In some embodiments, the allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat- sensitive material of the method comprises: allowing the at least one activation region to cool to an ambient temperature through radiative heat loss. In some embodiments, the allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material of the method comprises: allowing the at least one activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade.
In some embodiments, the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus of the method comprises: bending the connector to allow the cooled one or more getters to move from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector. In some embodiments, the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus of the method comprises: bending the connector to alter the relative positioning of the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region in relation to the connector. In some embodiments, the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas- sealed apparatus of the method comprises: transferring the cooled one or more getters into a gas-sealed gap between an inner wall and an outer wall of the structural region.
In some embodiments, the separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the established vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters of the method comprises: sealing the connector at a position adjacent to the structural region. In some embodiments, the separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the established vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters of the method comprises: crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the location of the crimping.
In some embodiments, the method comprises: adding sealing material to a surface of the separated connector adjacent to the structural region including the cooled one or more getters. In some embodiments, the method comprises: heating the structural region to a preset temperature for a predetermined time after establishing vacuum within the structural region and before heating the at least one activation region. In some
embodiments, the heating the structural region comprises: heating the structural region to the preset temperature by intervals of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. In some embodiments, the method comprises: heating the structural region to a preset temperature prior to transferring the cooled one or more getters; and maintaining the preset temperature while separating the connector. Some embodiments include a method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, comprising: assembling substantially all structural components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas- sealed gap; attaching the storage device to a gas-sealed apparatus, the gas-sealed apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the gas-sealed apparatus; activating the vacuum pump to establish a gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas- sealed gap of the storage device; heating the storage device to a predetermined
temperature for a predetermined length of time; heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate the one or more getters within the getter activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device; allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature; flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear; allowing the one or more getters to fall along the connector interior into the gas-sealed gap in the storage device, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device; and separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the assembling the substantially all structural components of the storage device including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap comprises: assembling the substantially all structural components of the storage device to form the gas-sealed gap within the storage device. In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the activating the vacuum pump to establish a gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas- sealed gap of the storage device comprises: establishing a gas pressure of less than or equal to lxl 0"2 torr.
In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time comprises: heating the storage device in increments of approximately 50 degrees Centigrade. In some embodiments of the method of
establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time comprises: heating the storage device to between approximately 130 degrees Centigrade and approximately 150 degrees Centigrade for at least 100 hours.
In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate the one or more getters comprises: heating the getter activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes. In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate the one or more getters comprises: heating the getter activation region with a heat source external to the getter activation region. In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a predetermined temperature comprises: allowing the getter activation region to cool to approximately 250 degrees Centigrade through radiative heat loss.
In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the flexing the connector comprises: flexing a region of the connector adjacent to the getter activation region. In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device comprises: physically crimping the connector; and breaking the connector at the location of the physical crimping. In some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device, the separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device comprises: utilizing an ultrasonic welding device.
Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time after establishing the gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: monitoring the gas pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device. Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: monitoring the gas pressure within the connector. Some embodiments of the method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device comprise: adding sealing material to a surface of the separated connector adjacent to the storage device.
All of the above U.S. patents, U.S. patent application publications, U.S. patent applications, foreign patents, foreign patent applications and non-patent publications referred to in this specification and/or listed in any Application Data Sheet, are
incorporated herein by reference, to the extent not inconsistent herewith.
One skilled in the art will recognize that the herein described components (e.g., operations), devices, objects, and the discussion accompanying them are used as examples for the sake of conceptual clarity and that various configuration modifications are contemplated. Consequently, as used herein, the specific exemplars set forth and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, use of any specific exemplar is intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of specific components (e.g., operations), devices, and objects should not be taken limiting.
In a general sense, those skilled in the art will recognize that the various aspects described herein which can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, and/or any combination thereof can be viewed as being composed of various types of "electrical circuitry." Consequently, as used herein "electrical circuitry" includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of memory (e.g., random access, flash, read only, etc.)), and/or electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, optical-electrical equipment, etc.). Those having skill in the art will recognize that the subject matter described herein may be implemented in an analog or digital fashion or some combination thereof.
Those skilled in the art will recognize that at least a portion of the devices and/or processes described herein can be integrated into an image processing system. Those having skill in the art will recognize that a typical image processing system generally includes one or more of a system unit housing, a video display device, memory such as volatile or non-volatile memory, processors such as microprocessors or digital signal processors, computational entities such as operating systems, drivers, applications programs, one or more interaction devices (e.g., a touch pad, a touch screen, an antenna, etc.), control systems including feedback loops and control motors (e.g., feedback for sensing lens position and/or velocity; control motors for moving/distorting lenses to give desired focuses). An image processing system may be implemented utilizing suitable commercially available components, such as those typically found in digital still systems and/or digital motion systems.
Those skilled in the art will recognize that at least a portion of the devices and/or processes described herein can be integrated into a data processing system. Those having skill in the art will recognize that a data processing system generally includes one or more of a system unit housing, a video display device, memory such as volatile or non-volatile memory, processors such as microprocessors or digital signal processors, computational entities such as operating systems, drivers, graphical user interfaces, and applications programs, one or more interaction devices (e.g., a touch pad, a touch screen, an antenna, etc.), and/or control systems including feedback loops and control motors (e.g., feedback for sensing position and/or velocity; control motors for moving and/or adjusting components and/or quantities). A data processing system may be implemented utilizing suitable commercially available components, such as those typically found in data computing/communication and/or network computing/communication systems.
With respect to the appended claims, those skilled in the art will appreciate that recited operations therein may generally be performed in any order. Also, although various operational flows are presented in a sequence(s), it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently. Examples of such alternate orderings may include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplemental, simultaneous, reverse, or other variant orderings, unless context dictates otherwise.
Furthermore, terms like "responsive to," "related to," or other past-tense adjectives are generally not intended to exclude such variants, unless context dictates otherwise.
With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singular terms herein, those having skill in the art can translate from the plural to the singular and/or from the singular to the plural as is appropriate to the context and/or application. The various singular/plural permutations are not expressly set forth herein for sake of clarity.
While particular aspects of the present subject matter described herein have been shown and described, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, based upon the teachings herein, changes and modifications may be made without departing from the subject matter described herein and its broader aspects and, therefore, the appended claims are to encompass within their scope all such changes and modifications as are within the true spirit and scope of the subject matter described herein. It will be understood by those within the art that, in general, terms used herein, and especially in the appended claims (e.g., bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as "open" terms (e.g., the term "including" should be interpreted as "including but not limited to," the term "having" should be interpreted as "having at least," the term "includes" should be interpreted as "includes but is not limited to," etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is intended, such an intent will be explicitly recited in the claim, and in the absence of such recitation no such intent is present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain usage of the introductory phrases "at least one" and "one or more" to introduce claim recitations. However, the use of such phrases should not be construed to imply that the introduction of a claim recitation by the indefinite articles "a" or "an" limits any particular claim containing such introduced claim recitation to claims containing only one such recitation, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases "one or more" or "at least one" and indefinite articles such as "a" or "an" (e.g., "a" and/or "an" should typically be interpreted to mean "at least one" or "one or more"); the same holds true for the use of definite articles used to introduce claim recitations. In addition, even if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is explicitly recited, those skilled in the art will recognize that such recitation should typically be interpreted to mean at least the recited number (e.g., the bare recitation of "two recitations," without other modifiers, typically means at least two recitations, or two or more recitations). Furthermore, in those instances where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B, and C, etc." is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., " a system having at least one of A, B, and C" would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those instances where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B, or C, etc." is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., " a system having at least one of A, B, or C" would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that typically a disjunctive word and/or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, claims, or drawings, should be understood to contemplate the possibilities of including one of the terms, either of the terms, or both terms unless context dictates otherwise. For example, the phrase "A or B" will be typically understood to include the possibilities of "A" or "B" or "A and B."
The herein described subject matter sometimes illustrates different components contained within, or connected with, different other components. It is to be understood that such depicted architectures are merely exemplary, and that in fact many other architectures may be implemented which achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense, any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality is effectively "associated" such that the desired functionality is achieved. Hence, any two components herein combined to achieve a particular functionality can be seen as "associated with" each other such that the desired functionality is achieved, irrespective of architectures or intermedial components. Likewise, any two components so associated can also be viewed as being "operably connected", or "operably coupled," to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being "operably couplable," to each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components.
While various aspects and embodiments have been disclosed herein, other aspects and embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The various aspects and embodiments disclosed herein are for purposes of illustration and are not intended to be limiting, with the true scope and spirit being indicated by the following claims.

Claims

What is claimed is: CLAIMS
An apparatus, comprising:
a stored material module including a plurality of storage units configured for
storage of one or more medicinal units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container and including a surface configured to reversibly mate with a surface of a stabilizer unit;
a storage stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with the surface of the stored material module;
a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with a surface of at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the at least one storage stabilizer unit; and
a central stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is of a size and shape to substantially fill a conduit in the substantially thermally sealed storage container.
A substantially thermally sealed storage container, comprising:
an outer assembly, including:
an outer wall substantially defining a substantially thermally sealed storage
container, the outer wall substantially defining a single outer wall aperture; an inner wall substantially defining a substantially thermally sealed storage region, the inner wall substantially defining a single inner wall aperture; the inner wall and the outer wall separated by a distance and substantially defining a gap;
at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material disposed within the gap; a connector forming a conduit connecting the single outer wall aperture with the single inner wall aperture; and a single access aperture to the substantially thermally sealed storage region, wherein the single access aperture is defined by an end of the connector; and
an inner assembly within the substantially thermally sealed storage region, including: a storage structure configured for receiving and storing a plurality of modules, wherein the plurality of modules includes both at least one heat sink module and at least one stored material module;
a stored material module including a plurality of storage units, the stored material module including a surface configured to reversibly mate with the storage structure within a substantially thermally sealed storage container;
at least one storage stabilizer unit configured to reversibly mate with a surface of the stored material module;
a stored material module cap configured to reversibly mate with at least one of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module and configured to reversibly mate with the at least one stabilizer unit; and
a central stabilizer unit operably connected to the stored material module cap, wherein the central stabilizer unit is positioned to substantially fill the conduit.
3. The substantially thermally sealed storage container of claim 2, wherein the connector is a flexible connector.
4. The substantially thermally sealed storage container of claim 2, wherein the gap
comprises:
substantially evacuated space with a pressure less than or equal to 5x1ο"4 torr.
5. The substantially thermally sealed storage container of claim 2, wherein the at least one section of ultra efficient insulation material includes multilayer insulation material ("MLI").
6. The substantially thermally sealed storage container of claim 2, wherein the
substantially thermally sealed storage region is configured to be passively maintained at a temperature between 2 and 8 degrees Centigrade for at least 30 days.
The substantially thermally sealed storage container of claim 2, wherein each of the plurality of storage units within the stored material module are configured to store medicinal vials.
A transportation stabilizer unit with dimensions corresponding to a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible connector, comprising:
a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external opening in an outer wall of a substantially thermally sealed storage container including a flexible connector, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the substantially thermally sealed storage container adjacent to the external opening in the outer wall;
a central aperture in the lid;
a reversible fastening unit adjacent to the central aperture in the lid, the reversible fastening unit positioned to fasten a shaft within the central aperture in the lid;
a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross-section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid;
an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible connector from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid;
a positioning shaft with a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid, the positioning shaft of a length greater than the thickness of the lid in combination with the length of the wall between the surface of the lid and the edge of the aperture in the wall; an interior surface of the wall, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region;
a pivot unit operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft and positioned within the interior region;
a support unit operably attached to the pivot unit, the support unit of a size and shape to fit within the interior region when the pivot unit is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture in the wall when the pivot unit is rotated approximately 90 degrees in the other direction; an end region of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with the interior surface of an aperture in a storage structure within the substantially thermally sealed storage container;
a base grip at the terminal end of the end region; and
a tensioning unit for the base grip, configured to maintain pressure on the base grip against an interior wall of the substantially thermally sealed storage container in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the lid.
An apparatus, comprising:
a substantially thermally sealed storage container with a flexible connector; and a stabilizer unit with dimensions corresponding to the substantially thermally
sealed storage container, the stabilizer unit including:
a lid of a size and shape configured to substantially cover an external
opening in an outer wall of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, the lid including a surface configured to reversibly mate with an external surface of the outer wall adjacent to the external opening;
a central aperture in the lid;
a wall substantially defining a tubular structure with a diameter in cross- section less than a minimal diameter of the flexible connector of the substantially thermally sealed storage container, an end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid;
an aperture in the wall, wherein the aperture includes an edge at a position on the tubular structure less than a maximum length of the flexible connector from the end of the tubular structure operably attached to the lid;
a positioning shaft with a diameter in cross- section less than a diameter in cross- section of the central aperture in the lid, the positioning shaft of a length greater than a thickness of the lid in combination with a length of the wall between the surface of the lid and an edge of the aperture in the wall; a reversible fastening unit operably attached to the lid in a region adjacent to the aperture in the lid and positioned to operably attach to the positioning shaft;
an interior surface of the wall, the interior surface substantially defining an interior region;
a pivot unit operably attached to a terminal region of the positioning shaft and positioned within the interior region;
a support unit operably attached to the pivot unit, the support unit of a size and shape to fit within the interior region when the pivot unit is rotated in one direction, and to protrude through the aperture in the wall when the pivot unit is rotated in the other direction;
an end region of a size and shape configured to reversibly mate with an interior surface of an aperture in a storage structure within the substantially thermally sealed storage container;
a base grip at a terminal end of the end region, including a surface with a coefficient of friction greater than one with a surface of an interior wall of the container at temperatures between 2 degrees and 8 degrees Centigrade;
a tensioning unit for the base grip, configured to maintain pressure on the base grip against the interior wall of the container in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the lid.
10. An apparatus comprising:
a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, the structural region including an outer wall and an inner wall with a gas-sealed gap between the outer wall and the inner wall;
an activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, the activation region including one or more getters;
a connector attached to the structural region and to the activation region, the
connector including a flexible region and a region configured for sealing and detachment of the structural region from the activation region; and a vacuum pump operably attached to the connector.
11. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the structural region comprises:
a storage device.
12. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the gas-sealed gap comprises:
multilayer insulation material.
13. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the gas-sealed gap comprises:
gas at a pressure less than or equal to 1x10" torr.
14. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the one or more getters comprise:
non-evaporatable getter material.
15. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the vacuum pump is sufficient to evacuate an interior of the structural region, the activation region and the connector to a gas pressure less than or equal to lxl 0"2 torr.
16. The apparatus of claim 10, comprising:
a gas-sealed, connected space interior to each of the structural region, the
activation region and the connector.
17. A method comprising:
establishing vacuum within a gas-sealed apparatus including at least one activation region fabricated from a heat-resistant material, a structural region fabricated from a heat-sensitive material, and a connector between the regions;
heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an
activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus;
allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material; transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus; and
separating the connector between the regions while maintaining the established vacuum within the structural region including the cooled one or more getters.
18. The method of claim 17, wherein the establishing vacuum comprises:
establishing gas pressure less than or equal to 1x10" torr.
19. The method of claim 17, wherein the heating the at least one activation region to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate one or more getters within the at least one activation region comprises:
heating the at least one activation region to a temperature of approximately 400 degrees Centigrade for at least 45 minutes.
20. The method of claim 17, wherein the allowing the at least one activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a temperature compatible with structural stability of the heat-sensitive material comprises:
allowing the at least one activation region to cool to an ambient temperature
through radiative heat loss.
21. The method of claim 17, wherein the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus comprises:
bending the connector to allow the cooled one or more getters to move from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector.
22. The method of claim 17, wherein the transferring the cooled one or more getters from the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region through the connector, while maintaining the established vacuum within the gas-sealed apparatus comprises: bending the connector to alter the relative positioning of the cooled at least one activation region to the structural region in relation to the connector.
23. A method of establishing and maintaining a vacuum within a storage device,
comprising:
assembling substantially all structural components of a storage device, including an outer wall and an inner wall substantially defining a gas-sealed gap;
attaching the storage device to a gas-sealed apparatus, the gas-sealed apparatus including a getter activation region containing one or more getters, a vacuum pump, and a connector operably connecting the storage device to the gas-sealed apparatus;
activating the vacuum pump to establish a gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device;
heating the storage device to a predetermined temperature for a predetermined length of time;
heating the getter activation region and the one or more getters to an activation temperature for an activation time suitable to activate the one or more getters within the getter activation region, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device;
allowing the getter activation region and the one or more getters to cool to a
predetermined temperature;
flexing the connector to move the storage device and the getter activation region into a relative position wherein the getter activation region is above the storage device and the connector is substantially linear;
allowing the one or more getters to fall along the connector interior into the gas- sealed gap in the storage device, while maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device;
separating the connector at a location adjacent to the storage device while
maintaining the established gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device.
24. The method of claim 23, wherein the activating the vacuum pump to establish a gas pressure below atmospheric pressure within the gas-sealed gap of the storage device comprises:
establishing a gas pressure of less than or equal to 1 10" torr.
PCT/US2011/001939 2010-11-29 2011-11-28 Temperature-stabilized storage systems WO2012074549A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP11844442.1A EP2646739A4 (en) 2010-11-29 2011-11-28 Temperature-stabilized storage systems
CN201180056904.0A CN103282717B (en) 2010-11-29 2011-11-28 The stocking system of temperature stabilization

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/927,982 2010-11-29
US12/927,981 US9139351B2 (en) 2007-12-11 2010-11-29 Temperature-stabilized storage systems with flexible connectors
US12/927,981 2010-11-29
US12/927,982 US20110127273A1 (en) 2007-12-11 2010-11-29 Temperature-stabilized storage systems including storage structures configured for interchangeable storage of modular units
US13/135,126 US8887944B2 (en) 2007-12-11 2011-06-23 Temperature-stabilized storage systems configured for storage and stabilization of modular units
US13/135,126 2011-06-23
US13/199,439 2011-08-29
US13/199,439 US8322147B2 (en) 2007-12-11 2011-08-29 Methods of manufacturing temperature-stabilized storage containers
US13/200,555 2011-09-23
US13/200,555 US20120085070A1 (en) 2007-12-11 2011-09-23 Establishment and maintenance of low gas pressure within interior spaces of temperature-stabilized storage systems

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012074549A1 true WO2012074549A1 (en) 2012-06-07

Family

ID=46172205

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2011/001939 WO2012074549A1 (en) 2010-11-29 2011-11-28 Temperature-stabilized storage systems

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20120085070A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2646739A4 (en)
CN (1) CN103282717B (en)
WO (1) WO2012074549A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE102014003342B4 (en) * 2014-03-07 2017-10-19 Astrium Gmbh Cryogenic fuel tank with a measuring module
DE102020134059A1 (en) 2020-12-17 2022-06-23 Bernhard Sixt Thermally insulated transport container

Families Citing this family (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8211516B2 (en) 2008-05-13 2012-07-03 Tokitae Llc Multi-layer insulation composite material including bandgap material, storage container using same, and related methods
US8485387B2 (en) 2008-05-13 2013-07-16 Tokitae Llc Storage container including multi-layer insulation composite material having bandgap material
US9243726B2 (en) 2012-10-03 2016-01-26 Aarne H. Reid Vacuum insulated structure with end fitting and method of making same
CN103090184A (en) * 2013-02-06 2013-05-08 徐毅 Quick desorption method for adsorbed natural gas
CN107062682B (en) * 2013-03-29 2020-04-24 脱其泰有限责任公司 Temperature-controlled storage system
WO2015006487A1 (en) 2013-07-09 2015-01-15 United Technologies Corporation Erosion and wear protection for composites and plated polymers
US9789664B2 (en) 2013-07-09 2017-10-17 United Technologies Corporation Plated tubular lattice structure
EP3019705B1 (en) 2013-07-09 2019-01-30 United Technologies Corporation High-modulus coating for local stiffening of airfoil trailing edges
US9726418B2 (en) * 2013-11-27 2017-08-08 Tokitae Llc Refrigeration devices including temperature-controlled container systems
CN103722318A (en) * 2013-12-08 2014-04-16 无锡伊诺永利文化创意有限公司 Welding device
US9463918B2 (en) 2014-02-20 2016-10-11 Aarne H. Reid Vacuum insulated articles and methods of making same
CN103777557B (en) * 2014-02-28 2016-05-25 安徽农业大学 Be applicable to the general control module of Cold Chain Logistics compartment microenvironment
DE102015008128A1 (en) * 2014-11-25 2016-05-25 Liebherr-Hausgeräte Lienz Gmbh Vacuum connection device
JP5916909B1 (en) * 2015-02-06 2016-05-11 株式会社日立国際電気 Substrate processing apparatus, gas rectifier, semiconductor device manufacturing method and program
US10639238B2 (en) 2015-03-13 2020-05-05 Fisher Clinical Services, Inc. Passive cold storage container systems with packaging tray and retention plate
US10497908B2 (en) 2015-08-24 2019-12-03 Concept Group, Llc Sealed packages for electronic and energy storage devices
CN105090742B (en) * 2015-08-29 2018-04-13 华南理工大学 A kind of absorbed natural gas transfer cask for being used for natural gas storing and transport
US10065256B2 (en) 2015-10-30 2018-09-04 Concept Group Llc Brazing systems and methods
ITUA20161329A1 (en) 2016-03-03 2017-09-03 Saes Pure Gas Inc Compression of carbon dioxide and delivery system
US11702271B2 (en) 2016-03-04 2023-07-18 Concept Group Llc Vacuum insulated articles with reflective material enhancement
CA3043868A1 (en) 2016-11-15 2018-05-24 Concept Group Llc Multiply-insulated assemblies
CN110770489B (en) 2016-11-15 2022-03-01 概念集团有限责任公司 Reinforced vacuum insulation article with microporous insulation
JP2020531764A (en) 2017-08-25 2020-11-05 コンセプト グループ エルエルシー Insulation parts of composite geometry and composite materials
JP7351077B2 (en) * 2018-09-28 2023-09-27 トヨタ自動車株式会社 high pressure tank
CN111567471B (en) * 2020-05-15 2021-10-19 潍坊金浩包装制品有限公司 Soft body posture fish pond of easy to assemble dismantlement
US20240066942A1 (en) * 2022-08-24 2024-02-29 Caleb Arthur Sommers System for transporting perishable goods utilizing phase change materials and waste heat
DE102023200287A1 (en) * 2023-01-16 2024-08-01 Mahle International Gmbh Valve for an internal combustion engine and manufacturing method

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US520584A (en) * 1894-05-29 Adjustable curtain-rod
US4526015A (en) * 1984-10-15 1985-07-02 General Electric Company Support for cryostat penetration tube
US4955204A (en) * 1989-11-09 1990-09-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Cryostat including heater to heat a target
US5012102A (en) * 1989-05-10 1991-04-30 U.S. Philips Corp. Methods of producing vacuum devices and infrared detectors with a getter
US20020083717A1 (en) * 2000-12-29 2002-07-04 Mullens Patrick L. Containment system for samples of dangerous goods stored at cryogenic temperatures
US20060021355A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2006-02-02 Bruker Biospin Ag Cryostat configuration
US7596957B2 (en) * 2003-07-18 2009-10-06 Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft Zur Forderung Der Angewandten Forschung E.V. Device and method for handling a probe
US20090275478A1 (en) * 2008-04-30 2009-11-05 Andrew Farquhar Atkins Method and apparatus for maintaining a superconducting system at a predetermined temperature during transit
US20100016168A1 (en) * 2005-11-01 2010-01-21 Andrew Farquhar Atkins Apparatus and method for transporting cryogenically cooled goods or equipment

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR860099A (en) * 1939-09-11 1941-01-06 Insulated transport box
BE559232A (en) * 1956-07-16
US3034845A (en) * 1960-05-02 1962-05-15 Union Carbide Corp Dispensing apparatus for low-temperature storage containers
US3168362A (en) * 1962-02-01 1965-02-02 Union Carbide Corp Thermally insulated bulk storage container
US5277031A (en) * 1991-11-27 1994-01-11 Western Precooling Systems Method and apparatus for cooling produce
US6119465A (en) * 1999-02-10 2000-09-19 Mullens; Patrick L. Shipping container for storing materials at cryogenic temperatures
DE10210075B4 (en) * 2002-03-08 2008-04-30 Stapla Ultraschall-Technik Gmbh Device for sealing and separating a pipe section
US7921577B2 (en) * 2006-09-12 2011-04-12 Victaulic Company Method and apparatus for drying sprinkler piping networks

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US520584A (en) * 1894-05-29 Adjustable curtain-rod
US4526015A (en) * 1984-10-15 1985-07-02 General Electric Company Support for cryostat penetration tube
US5012102A (en) * 1989-05-10 1991-04-30 U.S. Philips Corp. Methods of producing vacuum devices and infrared detectors with a getter
US4955204A (en) * 1989-11-09 1990-09-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Cryostat including heater to heat a target
US20020083717A1 (en) * 2000-12-29 2002-07-04 Mullens Patrick L. Containment system for samples of dangerous goods stored at cryogenic temperatures
US7596957B2 (en) * 2003-07-18 2009-10-06 Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft Zur Forderung Der Angewandten Forschung E.V. Device and method for handling a probe
US20060021355A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2006-02-02 Bruker Biospin Ag Cryostat configuration
US20100016168A1 (en) * 2005-11-01 2010-01-21 Andrew Farquhar Atkins Apparatus and method for transporting cryogenically cooled goods or equipment
US20090275478A1 (en) * 2008-04-30 2009-11-05 Andrew Farquhar Atkins Method and apparatus for maintaining a superconducting system at a predetermined temperature during transit

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP2646739A4 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE102014003342B4 (en) * 2014-03-07 2017-10-19 Astrium Gmbh Cryogenic fuel tank with a measuring module
DE102020134059A1 (en) 2020-12-17 2022-06-23 Bernhard Sixt Thermally insulated transport container

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2646739A4 (en) 2018-01-10
CN103282717A (en) 2013-09-04
EP2646739A1 (en) 2013-10-09
US20120085070A1 (en) 2012-04-12
CN103282717B (en) 2016-04-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2646739A1 (en) Temperature-stabilized storage systems
US8887944B2 (en) Temperature-stabilized storage systems configured for storage and stabilization of modular units
US20110127273A1 (en) Temperature-stabilized storage systems including storage structures configured for interchangeable storage of modular units
US20230157276A1 (en) Shipping Container
US9814651B2 (en) Storage systems and methods for medicines
US9913777B2 (en) Storage systems and methods for medicines
US9877894B2 (en) Storage systems and methods for medicines
US20180036202A1 (en) Storage systems and methods for medicines
US9205969B2 (en) Temperature-stabilized storage systems
US20160262979A1 (en) Storage systems and methods for medicines
US9140476B2 (en) Temperature-controlled storage systems
US10253918B2 (en) Insulated storage and transportation containers
US10823478B2 (en) Modular thermal device
US8069680B2 (en) Methods of manufacturing temperature-stabilized storage containers
US20090001086A1 (en) Container insert incorporating thermally insulative panels
EP2979044B1 (en) Temperature-controlled storage systems
US20150027157A1 (en) Temperature-controlled medicinal storage devices
US20230390155A1 (en) Portable Preservation System
JP6838906B2 (en) Liquid bag quick freezing container

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201180056904.0

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11844442

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE